JP2022171953A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.

SOLUTION: A game machine 10 includes: an electric support member 36 operable between a standby position and an operation position; a first through gate 318 for detecting passage of game balls 99 through a second passage 352 of a distribution device 35; and a second through gate 319 provided in a right area of a game board to detect passage of the game balls 99. The electric support member 36 is operated from a standby position to an operation position with detection of passage of the game balls 99 by the first through gate 318 or the second through gate 319 as an opportunity, and permits entry of the game balls 99 through the second passage 352 when they are in an operation position and of the game balls 99 through the second through gate into a second winning hole 315.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Generally, a pachinko game machine called a digipachi has a first starting port for performing a jackpot lottery when a game ball wins a prize. In addition, some game machines are provided with a second starting port that enables the winning of game balls by the operation of electric accessories in order to allow a large number of jackpot lotteries to be won with a small number of game balls. In addition, some game machines are provided with a distribution device that alternately distributes game balls to the first start port and the second start port (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-231902

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest in the game and the interest in the game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the level of interest in a game and the interest in the game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a shooting control means (41) capable of shooting game balls at predetermined intervals (Th);
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
with
The distributing part (94) shifts the rotational direction from the second direction to the first direction when a first switching point (P1) for switching the rotational direction from the first direction to the second direction is set as a starting point. The unit rotation period (Ts) from the second switching point (P2) to the first switching point (P1) again is a positive integer multiple or substantially positive of the predetermined interval (Th). It is characterized by being an integer multiple (for example, a range of ±15% of a positive integer multiple of the rotation period).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play the big win game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the sorting device of the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a sorting member of the sorting device. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect|action of a distribution member. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect|action of a sorting apparatus. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect|action of a sorting apparatus. 5(A) and 5(B) are cross-sectional views for explaining the operation of the sorting device, and FIG. 5(C) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 14; FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a through gate process procedure executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a normal symbol control process executed in the main process of FIG. 17; 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal electric accessory control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device; The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine based on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine based on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine based on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the principal part of the special variable prize-winning apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening/closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 . FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of the feather accessory apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of the feather accessory apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 42; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 46; 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 46; Sectional drawing which shows an example of the distribution apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of the distribution apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 53(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a sorting device for a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 53(B) is a sorting device for a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of an apparatus. FIG. 54(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a sorting device for a gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 54(B) is a sorting device for a gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of an apparatus. FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of the electric support member of the game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55(B) is a plan view of the electric support member of the game machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55(C) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 56(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A1-A1 of FIG. 56(A). FIG. 57(A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. FIG. 57(C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the support member, and FIG. 57C is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 58(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A2-A2 of FIG. 58(A). FIG. 59(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 59(B) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The perspective view which shows the principal part of a support member. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of a game machine according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 61(B) is an electric support member of the game machine according to the twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the principal part of a support member. FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of an electric support member for a game machine according to a twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of an electric support member of a game machine according to the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 63(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A3-A3 of FIG. 63(A). FIG. 64(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of a game machine according to a thirtieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 64(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 65(A) is a view of FIG. 64(A) when the electric support member is in a standby state, and FIG. 65(B) is a sectional view taken along line A3-A3 of FIG. 65(A). FIG. 66(A) is a view of FIG. 64(A) when the electric support member is in the operating position, and FIG. 66(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A4-A4 of FIG. 66(A). FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a sorting device and an electric tulip accessory device of a game machine according to a thirty-first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 68(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member for a game machine according to the thirty-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 68(B) is the thirty-third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of the game machine according to the embodiment; FIG. 69(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device for a game machine and an electric support member in a standby state according to the thirty-fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The perspective view of the principal part of A). Fig. 70(A) is a view showing the main part when the electric support member is at the operating position in Fig. 69(A); Fig. 70(B) is a perspective view showing the main part of Fig. 70(A); FIG. 71(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of a game machine according to the thirty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 71(B) is a main part of FIG. The figure which shows a part. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member of a game machine according to a thirty-sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 73(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device for a game machine according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in the standby position, and FIG. The perspective view of the principal part of A). FIG. 74(A) is a diagram showing the case where the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 73(B), and FIG. 74(B) is a plan view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention. . FIG. 75(A) is a view showing the essential parts of a game board including a sorting device and an electric support member for a game machine according to a thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 75(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 76(A) is a sectional view along the A5-A5 section line of FIG. 75(B), and FIG. 76(B) is a sectional view along the A6-A6 section line of FIG. 75(B). FIG. 77(A) is a diagram showing a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is at the standby position, and FIG. 77(B) is a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is at the operating position. illustration. FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 31 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to the thirty-ninth embodiment of the present invention; A diagram showing an example of a game board including the sorting device and the second start port of the game machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows the distribution part of the distribution apparatus of FIG. The figure which shows operation|movement of the distribution part of the distribution apparatus of FIG. The figure which shows the effect|action of the distribution part of the distribution apparatus of FIG. The figure which shows the effect|action of the distribution part of the distribution apparatus of FIG. FIG. 81 is a perspective view showing an example of an electric support member that opens and closes the second starting port of FIG. 80; 86(A) is a cross-sectional view along the A6-A6 section line of FIG. 80, and FIG. 86(B) is a cross-sectional view along the A7-A7 section line of FIG. Fig. 87(A) is a view when the electric support member is at the operating position in Fig. 86(A); Fig. 87(B) is a view when the electric support member is at the operating position in Fig. 86(A); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of lighting timing and lighting timing of a synchronization lamp; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main controller of the gaming machine according to the embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of synchronous lamp control processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 90; FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 25; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting apparatus in the 40th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting apparatus in the 41st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 96(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the 42nd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 96(B) is an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the 43rd embodiment of the present invention. illustration. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting apparatus in the 44th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting apparatus in the 45th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 99(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device according to the forty-sixth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 99(B) is an example of the main part of the sorting device according to the forty-seventh embodiment of the present invention. illustration. Sectional drawing which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting apparatus in the 48th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 101(A) is a perspective view showing an example of a sorting member of a sorting device according to the forty-ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 101(B) is a main part of the sorting device according to the forty-ninth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example. FIG. 102(A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the essential parts of the sorting device according to the fiftieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. Sectional drawing which shows an example. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to a fifty-second embodiment of the present invention; Fig. 104(A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to a fifty-third embodiment of the present invention; Fig. 104(B) is a diagram showing the torsion coil spring of Fig. 104(A); The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the modification of the sorting apparatus in the 53rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the distribution apparatus in the 54th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 107(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to a fifty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 107(B) is an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to a fifty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 107(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the fifty-seventh embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 108(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the fifty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 108(B) is an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the fifty-ninth embodiment of the present invention. 108(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the sixtieth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 109(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the 61st embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 109(B) is an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the 62nd embodiment of the present invention. , FIG. 109(C) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device according to the sixty-third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The figure which shows an example of the principal part. FIG. 110(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the 65th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 110(B) is an example of a main portion of a sorting device according to the 66th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 110(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the sixty-seventh embodiment of the present invention; Figures 111(A) and 111(B) are diagrams showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the sixty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and Figure 111(C) is a sorting apparatus according to the sixty-ninth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the principal part of an apparatus. FIG. 112(A) is a view showing an example of the essential part of the sorting device according to the 70th embodiment of the present invention, and FIGS. 112(B) and 112(C) are perspective views showing the spiral spring of FIG. 112(A). figure. 113(A) is a cross-sectional view along the A8-A8 section line of FIG. 112(A), and FIG. 113(B) is a cross-sectional view along the A9-A9 section line of FIG. 112(A). The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting apparatus in the 71st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 115(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the seventy-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 115(B) is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting device shown in FIG. 115(A). The figure which shows operation|movement of the sorting apparatus shown to FIG. 115(A). The figure which shows an example of the principal part of the sorting apparatus in 73rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing lighting timing and lighting timing of a synchronization lamp; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of distribution member control processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of synchronous lamp control processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 119; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the sorting apparatus in the 74th embodiment of this invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing lighting timing and lighting timing of a synchronization lamp; FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of distribution member control processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of synchronous lamp control processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 119; FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 25; FIG. FIG. 127(A) is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member and a second starting port according to the seventy-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 127(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 128(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A10-A10 of FIG. 127(A), and FIG. 128(B) is a view of FIG. 128(A) when the electric support member is at the operating position. FIG. 129(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member and a second starting port according to the seventy-sixth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 77 is a diagram showing essential parts of a game board including an electric support member in the embodiment of No. 77; FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member and a second starting port according to the seventy-eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a game board including an electric support member and a second starting port according to the seventy-ninth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 132(A) is a view showing an example of a main part of a game board including an electric support member and a second start port according to the 80th embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 132(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member, a drawing 132(C) is a view when the electric support member is at the standby position in FIG. 131(A); FIG. 201 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member, and a second starting port according to the eighty-first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 134(A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a sorting device according to the 82nd embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 134(B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a sorting device according to the 83rd embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 134(C) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a sorting device according to the eighty-fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 134(D) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a sorting device according to the eighty-fifth embodiment of the present invention.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION First to eighty-fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings for better understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to game machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported by the front frame 11 at its left end. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an electric decoration part 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 10) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like which is triggered by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined specific period in the special game effect.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact type switch, and may be a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

Also, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player with respect to the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button presentation or the like in the special game presentation.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is operated so that the game balls are shot toward the game area at regular intervals, for example, once every 0.6 seconds. Drive controlled. In addition, the game ball may have a shooting interval set according to the game state among a plurality of predetermined shooting intervals. For example, the shooting interval of the game ball may be different between the special game state and the jackpot game state. Specifically, in the special game state, the game ball is launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and in the jackpot game state, the game ball is launched at a longer interval than in the special game state, for example, even if it is set at 1 second intervals. good.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in a row. It is used to lead to the game ball launching mechanism 32 . Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is made of colorless or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin so that the player can visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform sound output in game effects and the like. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the electric decoration section 27 incorporates a light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp presentation by lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first left starting opening 314L, a first right starting opening 314R, a second starting opening 315, and a variable winning opening 316b. A variable winning device 316 having a variable winning device 316, an out port 317, a first through gate 318, a second through gate 319, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 37, a distribution device 35, and an electric support member 36 (movable Accessory member) is provided. The first left starting opening 314L and the first right starting opening 314R correspond to winning openings having the same function, and are hereinafter collectively referred to as "first starting opening 314". The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 314, 315". Also, the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 may be collectively referred to as "through gates 318 and 319". The general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b correspond to winning openings having different functions.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the various winning openings (general winning opening 313, first starting opening 314, second starting opening 315 or variable winning opening 316b) It is discharged from the out port 317 .

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . The game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls by using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4, openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the out opening 317. ing. Each of the general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b has a ball entry sensor 313a, which can individually detect the passage of a game ball. 314La, 314Ra, 315a and 316a (see FIG. 10). The incoming ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a are proximity sensors having through holes, for example.

Through gates 318 and 319 are gates through which game balls can pass. The through gates 318 and 319 have incoming ball sensors 318a and 319a (see FIG. 10) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gates 318 and 319, respectively. The incoming ball sensors 318a and 319a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes. When the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, a normal pattern winning lottery is performed as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory supporting the winning to the second starting port 315.例文帳に追加. However, the normal symbol winning lottery is not executed in the big winning game state. It should be noted that the lottery result of the normal symbol per lottery is indicated by the normal symbol which is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED lamp pair in the normal symbol display 373 which will be described later. Hereinafter, "normal pattern" may be abbreviated as "normal pattern", for example, "normal pattern random number storage area" is an abbreviation for "normal pattern reservation area".

Here, the first through gate 318 is provided in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 arranged in the lower center of the game board 31, and the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 is detected by the entering ball sensor 318a. do. On the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the first through gate 318 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the left side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is left-handed. The first through gate 318 may be located upstream of the electric support member 36 in the route leading to the right first starting port 314R in the sorting device 35, for example near the introduction port 350 above the sorting member 38. may be placed. In addition, the first through gate 318 may be arranged outside the sorting device 35 in the vicinity of the dead nail (navel nail) 31H. ) 31H may be arranged in the portion where 31H was provided. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the entrance ball sensor 318a can detect the passage of the game ball in the specific area (in this embodiment, the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35), and it is not necessary to configure it as a through gate. In this case, it is conceivable to attach a mark to the sorting device 35 at the position of the entering ball sensor 318a to indicate that it is a specific area.

On the other hand, the second through gate 319 is provided above the right portion of the variable winning device 316 on the right side of the game board 31 . In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the second through gate 319 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball hits to the right.

The entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, The detection result of 319 a is input to the main control unit 331 . In the following description, detection of a game ball entering by the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a may be referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls by other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

The variable winning device 316 has, in addition to the variable winning opening 316b, an opening/closing door 316c for switching presence/absence of restriction on entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316b. The opening/closing door 316c is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . In the variable prize winning device 316, opening the opening/closing door 316c enables game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316b, and closing the opening/closing door 316c restricts entry of game balls to the variable winning opening 316b. be done. The variable winning device 316 is arranged on the right side of the game board 31, and the opening/closing door 316c is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the player shifts to the jackpot game state triggered by the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot, the player moves to the variable winning port 316b by hitting right in the round game in which the open/close door 316c is opened. You can win the ball. As a result, the player can obtain more prize balls in the jackpot game than in the special game.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first left starting hole 314L, the first right starting hole 314R or the second starting hole 315 is detected by the entering ball sensors 314La, 314Ra or the entering ball sensor 315a, the main A jackpot lottery is performed by the control unit 331 . Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 37 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display etc. of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, winning of a game ball to the general winning port 313, the first left starting port 314L, the first right starting port 314R, the second starting port 315, and the variable winning port 316b is detected by the entering ball sensor 313a, When detected by 314La, 314Ra, 315a and 316a, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first start opening 314 or the second start opening 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable prize opening 316b. The number of prize balls in this case is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game described later) in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened. ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 5 times, 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, the jackpot lottery is executed as described above. Then, when the big win lottery result is a big win, the state shifts to a predetermined big win game state more advantageous to the player than the special game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 2R normal jackpot game state, a 2R probability variable jackpot game state, a 5R normal jackpot game state, a 5R probability variable jackpot game state, and a 16R probability variable jackpot game state. In the 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R probability variable jackpot game state, the variable winning opening 316b is opened twice until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the variable winning opening 316b. It is a game state including the opening and closing execution mode that is performed. The 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R probability variable jackpot game state are game states in which the round game is performed 5 times in the opening/closing execution mode, and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is the game state in which the round game is performed 16 times in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same amount of game balls in any game state in the round game, and in terms of the game balls that can be obtained, the larger the number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode, the more the player It is an advantageous playing state. Therefore, in this embodiment, in terms of the number of game balls that can be acquired, the 16R variable jackpot is most advantageous for the player, followed by the 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R variable jackpot game state. Yes, the 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R probability variable jackpot game state are the most disadvantageous to the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31 . The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the special figure according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 are displayed. Various displays such as game effect displays are performed. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display sections separately from the pattern display section 341 . The sub-display section is arranged, for example, in the upper portion, the lower portion, the left portion, or the right portion of the pattern display portion 341 . The sub display portion may be movable between a position covering the pattern display portion 341 and a position not covering the pattern display portion 341 . Also, the sub-display section may be arranged on the upper plate 23 .

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the main designs. Also, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special symbol game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time elapses from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. be. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

The main display section 37 is arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31 and has a first special symbol display device 371 , a second special symbol display device 372 , a normal symbol display device 373 and a reserved number display device 374 . The main display portion 37 may be arranged at the lower left or lower right portion of the game board 31 .

The first special symbol display 371 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning the first starting port 314 . A symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the first special symbol display 371 is called a first special symbol. In addition, in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the winning of the first start port 314, the first special symbol display device 371 stops displaying after the first special symbol is variably displayed. It's called pattern games.

The second special symbol display 372 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for winning the prize to the second starting port 315 . The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the second special symbol display 372 is called a second special symbol. In addition, display by stopping after changing the second special symbol for displaying the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery is called a second special symbol game.

Incidentally, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to simply as a special symbol. In addition, "special design" may be abbreviated as "special design". For example, "first special symbol" and "second special symbol" are abbreviations of "first special symbol" and "second special symbol" respectively, and "first special symbol game" and "second special symbol game" ” are abbreviations of “first special symbol game” and “second special symbol game” respectively. Further, the first special symbol display device 371 and the second special symbol display device 372 are not limited to 7-segment display devices. may be

The normal symbol display 373 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (normal electric accessory) in the main control unit 331 (whether to be in a support state) in response to the winning of the through gates 318 and 319. The lottery result in the lottery per normal pattern is specified. The normal symbol display device 373 includes a pair of LED lamps, and indicates the lottery result by the normal symbol that is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LED lamps. It should be noted that the normal symbol display 373 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED or the like instead of the pair of LED lamps.

In the pending number indicator 374, the pending number N of the variable display of the special symbols generated by winning the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is a plurality of LED lamps in a row (8 pieces in this embodiment) is displayed by the number of lights. The display processing for such a pending number N is executed based on the pending number N stored in the special figure pending number storage area NA in the special figure pending storage area 412b of the RAM 412, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sorting device 35 is provided in the central lower portion of the game board 31 . As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, the sorting device 35 includes an introduction port 350, a sorting member 38, a first passage 351 and a second passage 352. As shown in FIG. In this sorting device 35, game balls 99 entered through the introduction port 350 move leftward (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 4 and 5A) and rightward (FIGS. 4 and 5A) of the sorting member 38. 5 (A) in the clockwise direction) alternately distributes to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 .

The introduction port 350 is a portion that allows game balls to enter the sorting device 35 . The introduction port 350 is arranged directly below the life nail (navel nail) 31H of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the life nail 31H is introduced into the introduction port 350. - 特許庁A game ball is led to the life nail 31H mainly from the windmill 31F by the road nail 31M. Further, above the life nail 31H, there is provided a guiding part 31E for guiding a game ball dropped onto the stage 31S to the life nail 31H through a warp port 31W provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball dropped to the stage 31S is also guided to the life nail 31H. Here, the windmill 31F and the warp port 31W are provided on the left side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the shooting handle 22 is operated so that the game balls sent to the game board 31 pass through the left side of the game board 31, that is, the game balls are collected in the life nail 31H by the so-called left-hand hitting, and the game balls are collected at the inlet. A game ball can be introduced into the sorting device 35 via 350 . In addition, in the game machine 10, when the shooting handle 22 is operated so that the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes through the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball enters the variable winning opening 316b. A nail is arranged in the life nail 31H so that the game balls do not gather, and the introduction of the game ball from the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 cannot be expected in the case of right-handed hitting. Therefore, it is easier for the player to receive a jackpot lottery using the sorting device 35 rather than right-handed, and left-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed. (See FIG. 13(B))), it is recommended to play the game left-handed.

The distribution member 38 distributes game balls introduced from the introduction port 350 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 . The first passage 351 is open downward, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 are released in the direction toward the left first starting port 314L provided directly below the first passage 351. The second passage 352 is open downward, and the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are released in the direction toward the right first starting port 314R provided directly below the second passage 352.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the distribution member 38 has a rotating shaft 381, a partition piece 382, a ball receiving guide piece 383, and an eccentric portion 384. As shown in FIGS. In the distribution member 38 , the partition piece 382 , the ball receiving guide piece 383 and the eccentric portion 384 are integrally rotated about the rotating shaft 381 . The partition piece 382 extends perpendicularly to the ball receiving and guiding piece 383 from the center of the ball receiving and guiding piece 383 . The ball receiving guide piece 383 has a left ball receiving guide piece 385 on the left side of the partition piece 382 and a right ball receiving guide piece 386 on the right side of the partition piece 382 .

Also, the eccentric portion 384 changes the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 and has a moving member 387 and an accommodating portion 388 that accommodates the moving member 387 . The moving member 387 is, for example, a spherical body, a cylindrical body, or the like, and moves left and right in the housing portion 388 according to the posture of the distribution member 38 . When the distribution member 38 is in a right-tilted posture in which the partition piece 382 is tilted rightward with respect to the vertical direction (solid lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 , and the moving member 387 shifts the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 to the right side of the center. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the right tilting posture. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38 is in a left-tilted posture in which the partition piece 382 is tilted to the left with respect to the vertical direction (state of phantom lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 is It is positioned on the left side of the housing portion 388, and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the left side of the center. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the left-tilted posture.

In such a distribution member 38, a game ball 99 that has entered the distribution device 35 is placed between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, and between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. accepted anywhere in between. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6(A) and 6(B), when the distribution member 38 is tilted to the right, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving/inducing piece 385 . 6(C) and 6(D), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99 between the partition piece 382 and the left ball reception/induction piece 385, the load of the game ball , it rotates to the left (counterclockwise direction) and changes to a left-tilted posture. Thereby, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 is guided to the left side (first passage 351 side) along the left ball receiving guide piece 385 .

As shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B), the game ball 99 guided to the left along the left ball receiving guide piece 385 falls along the first passage 351, and the first passage 351 It is possible to easily win a prize at the left first starting port 314L arranged directly below. In addition, although the first passage 351 is linear in FIG. 4 and the like, the first passage 351 may have a non-linear shape such as a bent shape, a curved shape, an inclined shape, or a combination of two or more of these shapes. may be In the case of such a non-linear first passage 351, the left first starting port 314L is positioned at a position where the game ball that has passed through the first passage 351 can easily win, depending on the position and shape of the exit of the first passage 351. placed in

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(A), when the distribution member 38 is in the left tilting posture, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving/inducing piece 386 . Further, as shown in FIG. 8(B), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99, it rotates to the right (clockwise direction) due to the load of the game ball, and changes to a right tilting posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving/inducing piece 386 is guided to the right along the right ball receiving/inducing piece 386 and falls along the second passage 352 . At this time, the game ball 99 passes through the first through gate 318 . The passing of the game ball 99 through the first through gate 318 is detected by the ball entering sensor 318a (see FIG. 10). As a result, an opportunity is given to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory), and when the result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, the electric support member 36. is activated. The probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery wins and the operation time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery wins depend on the game state (mode) as described later. (See FIGS. 13B to 13D).

As shown in FIGS. 8(B) and 8(C), the game ball 99 guided to the right side along the right ball receiving guide piece 386 falls along the second passage 352, and the second passage 352 It moves toward the right first starting port 314R arranged directly below.

Here, the second starting port 315 is arranged between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. This second starting port 315 is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 formed between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. enters the second starting port 315 . Between the second passage 352 and the right first starting port 314R, a plate-like electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory is provided. This electric support member 36 restricts the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R and also to the second starting port 315 by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The operating position (second position) that supports the winning of game balls, and the standby position ( 1st position) in the opening 360 provided in the game board 31 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 8(C), when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the electric support member 36 does not protrude from the game board 31, so that the winning of the game ball to the right first start hole 314R is electrically operated. Since it is not restricted by the support member 36, the game ball falling along the second path 352 can easily enter the right first starting port 314R. The design of the second passage 352 can be changed in the same manner as the first passage 351, and the arrangement of the right first starting port 314R can be changed as appropriate according to the shape of the second passage 352 and the like.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the electric support member 36 protrudes from the game board 31 and the right first start port 314R is blocked by the opening/closing portion 362 of the electric support member 36, thereby restricting the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R. Further, when the electric support member 36 is at the operating position, the game ball 99 dropped along the second passage 352 is guided above the ball receiving portion 391 by the guide portion 363 of the electric support member 36, and then It falls to part 391 . The game ball 99 that has fallen into the ball receiving portion 391 enters the second starting port 315 . In addition, game balls that flow down from the stage 310 provided below the variable prize winning device 316 or from above the electric support member 36 and received by the electric support member 36 can also win prizes in the second starting port 315 . That is, in this embodiment, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 hit to the right side area of the game board 31 are moved by the single electric support member 36 to the second path. A ball can be entered into the starting port 315 .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9C, the electric support member 36 is positioned between the left side of the stage 310 provided below the variable prize winning device 316 and the upper side of the right first starting port 314R. It is a plate-shaped member arranged downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, a pair of wall portions 361 are provided that protrude upward from the edges in the width direction. These wall portions 361 function as guides that guide the game ball 99 from the right (upstream) upstream end to the left (downstream) downstream end. A plurality of delay guides 364 (four in this embodiment) are provided in a region on the left side (downstream side) of the central portion of the electric support member 36 . The plurality of delay guides 364 extend from the wall portion 361 in a staggered manner, and are formed in an inclined shape such that the distal end portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the proximal end portion. Therefore, a plurality of delay guides 364 (delay section) move the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) along a path meandering back and forth. Here, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining more profits than expected, but this point will be described later.

Note that the configuration of the electric support member 36 can be changed in various ways. For example, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and the electric support member 36 does not necessarily have to be a plate-like member. Representative modifications of the electric support member 36 will be described later as thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63. FIG.

By the way, as described above, the electric support member 36 is, in the special game state in which the special game is executed, the normal symbol hit triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball through the through gates 318 and 319. It is activated by winning the lottery result in the lottery. In addition, the operation time of the electric support member 36 (the time when the electric support member 36 is not in the standby position, or the time from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the start of return) is when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. is determined according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state (mode A to mode E (see FIG. 13 (B))), and the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode A to mode C is short (for example, 0 .6 seconds), and in Modes D and E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is longer (eg, 6 seconds). The operation time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is such that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 can be guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36, while the electric support member 36 is electrically operated from the stage 310 when hitting to the right. A game ball that has moved to the support member 36 or a game ball that is received by the electric support member 36 after being guided by a first retraction guide nail 393 and a second retraction guide nail 394 described later cannot enter the second start port 315 (for example, 0 .6 seconds). For one or both of the first thru gate 318 and the second thru gate 319, the electric support member 36 may be operated without performing the normal symbol winning lottery when the passage of the game ball is detected.

Here, the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 by hitting left is distributed to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, and the game ball of the first passage 351 wins the left first start port 314L, The game ball in the second path 352 falls toward the right first starting port 314R. The game ball falling from the second passage 352 enters the right first starting port 314R if the electric support member 36 is not operating, and if the electric support member 36 is operating, the second start is supported by the electric support member 36. It is guided to mouth 315 . On the other hand, a game ball that flows down the right side of the sorting device 35 as in the case of hitting to the right is not introduced into the sorting device 35, so it does not enter the first start port 314, and the electric support member 36, but if the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short (mode A to mode C), the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position before the game ball reaches the second start port 315. , and does not win the second starting port 315 . Specifically, since the electric support member 36 has a plate shape extending between the stage 310 and the right first start port 314R and has a delay guide 364, the electric support member 36 is moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36. The time required for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36 is longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A-C. Therefore, in modes A to C in which the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short, the player collects game balls in the life nail 31H and uses the sorting device 35 to use the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. Left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to win the game ball in the first round. On the other hand, in modes D and E, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer than the time required for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 that has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36. Therefore, it is better to pass the game ball through the second through gate 319 and enter the game ball in the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36, so that there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the first start port 314. It is more advantageous to the player than using 35. Therefore, in mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, right-handed hitting is encouraged.

By the way, some conventional game machines have a sorting device that alternately sorts game balls between a first starter and a second starter whose function is different from that of the first starter. However, when the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting section and the second starting section by the distribution device, there is concern that the game will become monotonous and the interest in the game will decrease.

On the other hand, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the distribution device 35 that alternately distributes the game balls to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, and unlike the conventional game machine, the first A first starting port 314 having the same function is provided below each outlet of the passage 351 and the second passage 352 . Moreover, in the sorting device 35 , the first through gate 318 is provided only in the second passage 352 of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 . Then, when the passage of the game ball to the second passage 352 is detected by the through gate 318, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36.例文帳に追加Therefore, when left-handed hitting is performed to use the sorting device 35, the game ball is guided to the left first starting port 314L by the first passage 351, and the game ball wins the left first starting port 314L. The second path 352 can cause the game ball to enter the right first starting hole 314R, and the second path 352 and the electric support member 36 can guide the game ball to the second starting hole 315. In addition, when hitting to the right, the game ball does not enter the sorting device 35, and the passage of the game ball to the second through gate 319 triggers the operation of the electric support member 36, thereby causing the second game ball to enter the game ball. A game ball can be guided to the starting port 315 . As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the monotonous one in which game balls are assigned to two types of starting units (first starting unit and second starting unit) having different functions as in conventional gaming machines. Differently, by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, it is possible to achieve a plurality of states in which the game ball can enter the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the game becomes monotonous. It is difficult and can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a conventional game machine, the first starter is arranged at a position where a prize can be won when hitting to the left, while the second starter is placed on the right side of the game board together with ordinary electric accessories such as a through gate and an electric support member. Many can be seen placed in In such a game machine, while a game ball can win in the first starting portion when hitting to the left, no game ball can win in the second starting portion arranged on the right side of the game board. When the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball can win in the second starting part arranged on the right side of the game board, but the game ball does not win in the first starting part. In general, a big win in a big win lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting part is more advantageous than the winning of a game ball into the first starting part. For example, in the jackpot in the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting part, the ratio of jackpot types advantageous to the player, such as jackpots with a large number of rounds in the jackpot game, is high. Then, in a gaming machine in which the function of the starting part that can win a prize is different between the case of left-handed and the right-handed, the game state is such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of winning per normal symbol are low, and the special pattern fluctuation time and normal pattern fluctuation are low. It has a normal mode with a long time and a short-time variable mode with a high jackpot winning probability and normal pattern winning probability and a short special figure variation time and normal figure variation time. In addition, in the normal mode, not only is the winning probability per normal symbol low and the normal symbol fluctuation time is long, but the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of normal symbol per is short. Therefore, in the normal mode, the support time of the normal electric role for the winning of the game ball to the second starting part triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate is short, and the support of the normal electric role is low frequency. can only be received by That is, in the normal mode, even if the player hits to the right, not only can he/she hardly receive the benefit of the support of the normal electric accessory, but also the winning of the game ball to the first start section cannot be expected, so the player must hit the game to the left. It is a good idea to do so. On the other hand, in the time probability variable mode, not only is the probability of winning per normal symbol high and the normal symbol fluctuation time is short, but the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of normal symbol per is long. Therefore, in the time-saving variable mode, the support time of the normal electric accessory for the winning of the game ball to the second starting part triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate is long, and the support of the normal electric accessory is high. can be received frequently. That is, in the time-saving probability variable mode, it is better to win the game ball to the second starting part by hitting to the right than to win the game ball to the first starting part by hitting to the left. In other words, by hitting the left in the normal mode, the game ball is won in the first starting unit to perform the first special symbol game, while the second special symbol game is performed by performing the right stroke in the time-saving probability variable mode. The profit for the player is maximized. In addition, as the probability variable mode, in addition to the time-saving probability variable mode, there is also a game machine having a so-called latent probability variable mode in which the probability variable mode is not specified. The latent probability variable mode has a high probability of winning a jackpot like the time-saving probability variable mode, but generally the support for normal electric accessories is the same as the normal mode. That is, in the latent probability variable mode, the variation time of the normal symbols for the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate is long, and the probability of winning the normal electric accessory operation in the normal symbol lottery is low. It is possible to receive the support of the ordinary electric accessory for the prize winning of the game ball to the starting part only for a short time and at a low frequency. Therefore, in the latent probability variable mode, since it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the second starting part when hitting to the right, it is possible to win the game ball to the first starting part by hitting to the left in the same way as in the normal mode. It is encouraged to play special game. Not only in the normal mode and the latent probability variable mode, but in game states where left-handed hitting is encouraged, it is preferable to eliminate the advantages of right-handed hitting, such as making it difficult to receive support from normal electric accessories.

On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 is provided with the sorting device 35, it is not specified that the special figure gaming state is a probability variable mode (high probability mode) as in the conventional gaming machine, and left-handed hitting is encouraged. In the mode C, the electric support member 36 operates for a short time when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is winning. Therefore, in the game machine 10 as well, it is preferable to prevent the game ball from entering the second start hole 315 even when the electric support member 36 is activated by hitting to the right in the mode C. In the gaming machine 10, the electric support member 36 as the normal electric accessory is provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay units. Here, if the electric support member 36 is not provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as a delay portion, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) along a straight path. move in the direction of On the other hand, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 as in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 meanders in the electric support member 36 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side ( downstream). Therefore, by providing the delay guide 364 in the electric support member 36, the movement distance of the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 can be increased. The time until the game ball reaches the second starting port 315 can be made longer than the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode C. As a result, when the special game state is the above-described mode C, and when it is mode A and mode B in which left-handed hitting is encouraged similarly to mode C, that is, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short. In this case, even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 as the player hits to the right, the electric support member 36 is pulled before the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Since it returns to a standby state, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 315.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 when a hitting method (right hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left hitting) is performed. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state in which left-handed is encouraged, the player can be encouraged to actively play left-handed.

Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, above the electric support member 36, a plurality of nails are provided between the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the sorting device 35. A first retraction guide nail 393 and a second retraction guide nail 394 (retraction guide portion) are provided. These retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36 which is the right area of the sorting device 35 in the direction of retreating from the sorting device 35 . That is, the retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315 . Therefore, when the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394 are provided, the game ball flowing down from above can be received at a position away from the second starting port 315 in the electric support member 36, and the game ball can be received. A long time can be secured until reaching the second starting port 315 . As a result, similarly to the case where the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay guide 364, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the second starting port 315 in a short period of time up to , it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36 in the case of performing an unrecommended hitting method. In the game machine 10, since a large number of nails are driven into the game board 31, it is possible to provide the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394 when driving these nails. Become. Therefore, when the electric support member 36 operates for a short period of time, it is possible to suppress the complication of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide portions (the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394). It is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36 .

Instead of the retraction guide pegs 393 and 394, a block-shaped member or the like formed by resin molding, metal processing, or a combination thereof may be used as the retraction guide portion.

On the other hand, when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gates 318 and 319 in mode D and mode E is a win, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). For example, when a game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 has a short distance from the first through gate 318 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36 and the electric support member 36 is operated for a short period of time as in mode C However, since it is possible to win the second start port 315, the second start port 315 is also won in mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time. On the other hand, a game ball that has passed through the second through gate 319 or a game ball that has been launched before or after the game ball has a long distance from the second through gate 319 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, but the electric support Due to the long actuation time of the member 36, the second start port 315 is won even if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay portion 364. FIG. When the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time in this way, not only the game balls that pass through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and fall, but also the game balls that flow down the right side area of the distribution device 35 A game ball dropped onto the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b can be guided to the second starting opening 315 by the electric support member 36. However, since the game balls introduced into the distribution device 35 are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 as described above, the electric support member 36 is in a game state in which it operates for a long time. Left-handed hitting in Modes D and E cannot fully benefit from the support of the electric support member 36 . Therefore, in mode D and mode E, which are game states in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long period of time, the player passes the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the game board 31 so that the electric support member To activate 36, it is recommended that the firing handle 22 be manipulated to play right-handed.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 10 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main controller 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of main control means of the present invention. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. MPU41 performs a process according to the control program memorize|stored in ROM411 grade|etc.,. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to the incoming ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the main display section 37, and the like. Then, based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a, the MPU 41 selects the general winning opening 313, the first left starting opening 314L, the first right starting opening 314R, the second starting opening, and the second starting opening. Whether or not the ball enters the opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the through gates 318 and 319 is determined. Moreover, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command and a shift command to the sound ramp control device 5 .

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is the special figure variation start processing of FIG. is set in step S1808. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N decreases, the shift command is voice lamp control that the special figure success/failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 has shifted. This is a command to notify the device 5 . The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the MPU 41 operates a main timer (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Assume that interrupt processing is started and executed. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the main control units in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412 and the counter information stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b to set the big hit lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a is used to set the initial value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as the normal electric accessory, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. An initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 738, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Incidentally, the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the counter value (random value) at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number) is acquired, the counter value of the big hit random number initial value counter CIN1 is set as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined by the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411, and the low probability mode (mode A, mode B, and mode D described later) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot is low. (see FIG. 13(B))), and two types are set corresponding to a high probability mode (mode C and mode E (see FIG. 13(B)) which will be described later). Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B), in the low probability modes (mode A, mode B, and mode D), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is three (0 to 2), and the jackpot probability is 3/739 (=about 1/246.3). On the other hand, in the high-probability modes (mode C and mode E), the number of counter values (random numbers) that result in a big win in the jackpot lottery is 30 (0 to 29), and the jackpot probability is 10 in the low-probability mode. It is 30/739 (=about 1/24.6) which is double. Here, the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table share three random numbers (0 to 3) with which the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, but they may not be common. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot do not have to be continuous values, and may be partially or wholly discrete values. If the counter value (random value) of the big win random number counter C1 is other than the counter value (random value) at which the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, the lottery result in the big win lottery is lost.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. In the game machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is set individually for each jackpot of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. ing. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a jackpot (first special figure jackpot) when a game ball enters the first start port 314 and a jackpot (second special figure jackpot) when a game ball enters the second start port 315 (second special figure jackpot) ) and the distribution of jackpot types are different. Here, FIGS. 12(C) and 12(D) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot classification table. In the example shown in FIG. 12(C), in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first start port 314, it is distributed to either 2R probability variable jackpot or 2R normal jackpot as jackpot types. The number of random numbers for the 2R variable jackpot is 15 from 0 to 14, the number of random numbers for the 2R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19, and the random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R variable jackpot, and the 16R variable jackpot. does not exist. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 12 (D), in the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol game triggered by the winning of the second start port 315, either the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot distributed. And the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. There is no random number that becomes a 2R normal jackpot and a 2R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of the definite variable jackpot (2R definite variable jackpot) in the first special symbol game is 75% (15/20), and the definite variable jackpot in the second special symbol game (5R definite variable jackpot and 16R definite variable jackpot). is 75% (15/20). That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of the variable variable jackpot is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, although the jackpot types are distributed differently between the first special jackpot and the second special jackpot, the number of round games in the jackpot game is greater for the second special jackpot than the first special jackpot. In terms of the number of round games played, the second special figure jackpot is more advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 314 which is the trigger to execute the first special symbol game, the game ball to the second start port 315 which is the trigger to execute the second special symbol game A separate jackpot type distribution table is set for each of the winnings, and the jackpot type distribution probability differs depending on whether the game ball wins in the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable rate machine, but may be configured as a gaming machine with specs different from loop variable rate machines such as so-called limit machines, ST machines, V-ST machines, and one-two type mixture machines. . Examples in which the game machine 10 is applied to a limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a one-two-kind mixed machine will be described later as third to sixth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 28 to 50. .

Then, the MPU 41, based on the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, It is determined whether it is a 5R normal jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a loss. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a loss for the winning of the first start port 314 , and the second start port 315 . , it is determined whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R variable variable jackpot, a 16R variable variable jackpot, or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable prize winning opening 316b is opened is repeated twice. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning opening 316b is opened is repeated five times. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the mode (game state) corresponding to the jackpot type is shifted from the jackpot game state. Here, FIG. 13(A) is a mode transition table that defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 13(A), when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to mode B after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode C after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the mode is shifted to D after the jackpot game is finished. When the result of the lottery is 5R probability variable big win and 16R probability variable big win, mode E is shifted to after the big win game is finished. That is, since the jackpot type in the case of winning a prize for the first starting ports 314L, 314R is the 2R normal jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 12(C)), the winning for the first starting ports 314L, 314R In the case of a big win, the mode shifts to mode B or mode C after the end of the big win game. On the other hand, since the jackpot type in the case of winning a prize for the second start port 315 is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 12 (D)), the winning for the second start port 315 In the case of a big win, the mode shifts to mode D or mode E after the end of the big win game.

Here, FIG. 13(B) shows the mode types (mode A to mode E) in the special symbol gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuates due to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 314L, 314R, and 315 in the gaming machine 10. It is a mode data table that defines the contents.

Mode A is a mode that shifts when the upper limit number of special game games ends in mode B or mode D, which is a limited time saving mode described later, that is, when the time saving ends, and it is clear from the description below. However, it is the most disadvantageous game state for the player among the modes A to E. Also, in the game machine 10, the game state becomes mode A when the contents of the RAM 412 are cleared when the main power is turned on. The game state in the case where the contents of the RAM 412 are not cleared when the main power is turned on is the game state stored in the RAM 412 when the main power is turned off.

Mode A (first gaming state) is a jackpot low-probability mode in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). will be Mode A is a non-time-saving mode in which the variable display time of normal symbols is not shortened (time saving), and the variable display time of normal symbols is the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 passes the position of the electric support member 36, the normal pattern is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery becomes a win. Even if the electric support member 36 operates, it cannot be expected that the second starting port 315 will be won by the support of the electric support member 36 . Furthermore, the mode A is a normal pattern winning low probability mode in which a normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on a normal symbol low probability success/failure table in which the probability of winning the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is low. Therefore, in mode A, the first special game is executed except for irregular cases such as the game ball accidentally passing through the second passage 352 at the operation timing of the electric support member 36, and the second special game is executed. is effectively not executed.

Here, FIG. 13(C) shows an example of a normal symbol low-probability table. In the normal symbol low probability propriety table shown in FIG. 13 (C), one counter value ( 199) corresponds to the win of the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery, and the remaining 199 counter values (0 to 198) correspond to the loss of the lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol low probability success/failure table, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will win is set to 0.5% (1/200). Therefore, in the mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery wins is low, and the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery wins the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. low expectations for the winning of game balls. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal design low probability success or failure table is a probability that the lottery result based on the normal design high probability success or failure table described later is a probability and a clear probability, especially if there is a difference. There is no limit, and the probability of winning the lottery result may be 0%. In mode A, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol lottery is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the normal symbol lottery is not performed. It is also conceivable to make

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, in mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is winning. As described above, above the electric support member 36, there is a retraction guide nail 393 for guiding the game balls flowing down from above the electric support member 36 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35 (second starting port 315). 394 (see FIGS. 4 and 5A) is provided. Therefore, in mode A, even if the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win as described above, the operation time of the electric support member 36 for the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 31 by hitting to the right is is short, it is difficult for the electric support member 36 to support the winning of the second starting hole 315 in the case of right-handed hitting. In addition to this, the probability that the lottery results in the above-mentioned normal symbol winning lottery will win is low, so in mode A, the game ball is awarded to the second start port 315 that is distributed to the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. can hardly be expected. Further, in a right-handed player, not only the support of the electric support member 36 cannot be expected, but also the introduction of game balls to the sorting device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode A, a game ball is caused to flow down on the left side of the game board 31 by hitting to the left, the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35, and the game ball enters the first start ports 314L, 314R to receive a jackpot lottery. is encouraged.

In this way, in the mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, the probability of winning the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is low, and the operation timing of the electric support member 36 is deviated from the passage timing of the game ball. Therefore, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 can hardly be expected. Therefore, in mode A, most of the jackpot lottery is performed for the winning of game balls into the first start ports 314L and 314R, and most of the jackpot types in mode A are 2R normal jackpots or 2R variable variable jackpots. As a result, it is very easy to shift from mode A to mode B or mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and to mode D and mode E is not substantially shifted.

Mode B (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A. be.

Mode B is a jackpot low-probability mode in which the probability that the jackpot lottery will result in a jackpot is low as in mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). . In addition, unlike mode A, mode B is a time-saving mode that is a shortened variable display time in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shorter than the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) of the non-time-saving mode. The mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). In other words, mode B is a limited time reduction mode in which an upper limit is set for the number of times of time reduction, but is more advantageous than mode A because it is a time reduction mode. Here, the shortened variable display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can enter the second start opening 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, and the first through gate 318 and the electric support member 36 and the operating time of the electric support member 36, for example, about 0.004 to 0.2 seconds. In addition, in the present embodiment, an effect that clearly indicates that it is mode B (time saving mode) may be executed in the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341 . In this case, an effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of being a definite variable. In mode B, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot and the upper limit number of special figure games are performed, the mode is shifted to mode A.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in mode B, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on a normal symbol high probability success/failure table with a high probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery will win, and in this point as well, the mode is more advantageous than mode A. be. Here, FIG. 13D shows an example of a normal symbol high probability right/wrong table. In the normal symbol high probability success/failure table shown in FIG. 13(D), 199 (0 to 198) of the counter values (random numbers) of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) are normally per symbol lottery. The remaining one (199) corresponds to the loss of the lottery result. In other words, in the normal symbol high probability success/failure table, the counter value (random number) of winning and losing is opposite to the normal symbol low probability success/failure table, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will win is 99.5. % (199/200). Therefore, in mode B, it can be expected that the game ball will enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 due to the winning result of the normal symbol winning lottery. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table does not need to be 99.5%, and may be another percentage. In addition, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol lottery is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the normal symbol lottery is not performed. It is also conceivable to make In addition, in mode B, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol may be selected. The electric support member 36 may operate for a short period of time without performing the winning lottery. In this case, in mode B, game balls are alternately distributed to the first path 351 and the second path 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first start port 314L and the second start port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13(B), in mode B, similarly to mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) in the case of winning the lottery for the normal symbol, and the right-handed player has a short operation time. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode B, as in mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged.

In this way, in mode B, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short, so left-handed hitting is encouraged instead of right-handed hitting. Therefore, the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be expected to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 to win a prize. Specifically, when game balls are introduced into the sorting device 35 as described above, the game balls are alternately sorted to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 . The game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, game balls distributed to the second passage 352 pass through the first through gate 318 . At this time, in mode B, with the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 318 as a trigger, the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table per normal symbol. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 and passed through the first through gate 318 is supported by the electric support member 36 with a high probability (99.5% in the present embodiment) to the second start port 315. Win a prize. In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is lost, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins the right first start port 314R.

In mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning a game ball into the first left starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning a game ball into the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is performed with respect to the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R with a probability of 0.25%. As a result, about half (50.25%) of the jackpots in mode B become 2R normal jackpots or 2R variable variable jackpots, and after the jackpot games for these jackpots are completed, the mode shifts to mode B or mode C. In addition, about half (49.75%) of the jackpot in mode B becomes the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R variable variable jackpot or the 16R variable variable jackpot, and after the jackpot game for the 5R normal jackpot is completed, the mode is shifted to D, and the 5R variable jackpot and After the jackpot game for the 16R probability variable jackpot ends, the mode is shifted to mode E (see FIG. 13(A)). That is, in mode B, since the jackpot lottery for winning the game ball to the second starting port 315 can be received in about half of the special game with the support of the electric support member 36, the 5R normal jackpot with a large number of expected wins, Winning the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot can be expected, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the mode shifts to mode D and mode E in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time, as will be described later. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, there is a possibility of winning an advantageous jackpot for the player, and after the jackpot game for the advantageous jackpot ends, the mode shifts to a mode more advantageous than mode B. This mode (game state) is more advantageous to the player than Mode A in terms of points.

Mode C is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R probability variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than modes A and B. Mode C is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is high, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 12 (B)). , is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than modes A and B in this respect. Further, mode C is a time saving mode like mode B, but unlike mode B, the time saving mode continues until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. In other words, the mode C is a jackpot guaranteed time-saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and is a mode (game state) more advantageous than the mode B in this respect as well. In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode C (high probability mode) is not clearly indicated in the effect of the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341 for the special symbol game or the big hit game. That is, mode C is a so-called latent probability variable mode. Of course, in mode C, it may be specified in the production means that it is a high probability mode, and in the same way as in mode B, it is specified in the production means that it is a time saving mode, suggesting the possibility of being a probability change. An effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone.

Furthermore, in mode C, as in mode B, normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table, but as in mode A and mode B, electric support is provided when the normal symbol lottery is won. Since the operation time of the member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds), winning of the game ball to the second start hole 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 in right-handed hitting cannot be expected. Therefore, even in mode C, left-handed hitting is encouraged. In mode C, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol lottery is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the normal symbol lottery is not performed. It is also conceivable to make In addition, in mode C, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol is selected. The electric support member 36 may operate for a short period of time without performing the winning lottery. In this case, in mode C, game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50. %become.

Thus, in mode C, as in mode A and mode B, left-handed hitting is encouraged because the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short. Since it is high, game balls passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 can be expected to enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. This is an advantageous mode (game state). And, in mode C, as in mode B, the jackpot lottery goes to the second starting port 315 with a probability of 49.75% with respect to the winning of the game ball to the left first starting port 314L with a probability of 50%. , with a probability of 0.25% for winning a game ball into the right first start port 314R. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode C and the mode to be shifted to after the jackpot game is finished are the same as those in mode B. That is, in mode C, as in mode B, in about half of the special game, a jackpot lottery for winning a game ball to the second start port 315 can be received, so 5R normal jackpot, 5R with a large number of expected wins. Winning a variable probability jackpot and a 16R variable probability jackpot can be expected, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is finished, as will be described later, mode D and mode E in which the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long are shifted. Therefore, in mode C, unlike mode A and similar to mode B, there is a possibility that the player wins an advantageous jackpot.

Mode D is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than modes A and B. Mode D is a jackpot low probability mode with a low probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot like mode A and mode B, and the jackpot lottery is based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. is done. Also, mode D is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times similar to mode B, and shifts to mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games are performed. Furthermore, the mode D is performed based on a high-probability success/failure table with a high probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery will win, and is the same as the mode C in this point as well. In addition, in mode D, it is specified that it is a time saving mode in the production by the production means such as the pattern display unit 341 . In this case, an effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of being a definite variable.

However, unlike mode A to mode C, mode D has a longer operation time of the electric support member 36 (for example, 6 seconds) when winning a lottery with normal symbols, and is more advantageous than mode A to mode C in this respect. It is a mode (game state). In mode D, since the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long, the game balls flowing down the right side area of the sorting device 35 and the game balls falling on the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b as described above are electrically operated. It can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the support member 36 . Therefore, right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to operate the electric support member 36 by allowing the game ball to pass through the second through gate 319 arranged on the right side of the game board 31 . In addition, in mode D, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly enters the first start ports 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). , a game ball enters the second start port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the jackpot in mode D is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R variable variable jackpot, or a 16R variable variable jackpot with a high probability (approximately 100%). Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game for this jackpot is completed, the mode is shifted to mode D, and when the jackpot type is the 5R variable variable jackpot or the 16R variable variable jackpot, the mode is performed after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed. E (see FIG. 13A). That is, in mode D, unlike modes A to C, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer in mode D, and a jackpot lottery can be received exclusively for the winning of a game ball into the second start port 315. can. Therefore, in mode D, the type of jackpot when the lottery results in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is any of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 16R probability variable jackpot with a large number of expected game balls to be acquired, and these After the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer, and the mode shifts to mode D or mode E. In these respects, this mode (game state) is more advantageous than modes A to C.

Mode E is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot game or the 16R probability variable jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is the most advantageous mode for the player among modes A to E. be. Mode E, like mode C, is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is high, and the jackpot lottery is a high probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 12 (B) ), and it is also a jackpot guaranteed time-saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in mode E, it is clearly shown that the game is in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) in the performance of the performance means such as the symbol display unit 341 .

However, in mode E, unlike mode C, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds) when winning the normal symbol lottery as in mode D. Therefore, in Mode E, as in Mode D, right-handed hitting is encouraged. In mode E, since it is difficult for the game ball to be introduced into the sorting device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly enters the first start openings 314L and 314R, with a high probability (approximately 100%). , a game ball enters the second start port 315 and a jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, the type of jackpot expected in the jackpot in mode E and the mode to be shifted to after the jackpot game is finished are the same as those in mode D. That is, in mode E, since the jackpot lottery can be received exclusively for the winning of the game ball to the second start port 315, there is a high probability of winning any of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 16R probability variable jackpot with a large number of expected acquisitions. (approximately 100%) will be elected.

It is also conceivable that the electric support member 36 is operated a plurality of times for one normal symbol winning lottery. For example, in mode D and mode E, it is conceivable to operate the electric support member 36 for 1.2 seconds five times so that the total operating time of the electric support member 36 is 6 seconds. However, the one-time operation time and the number of times of operation of the electric accessory 36 described above are examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode D and mode E is not limited to 6 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when a normal jackpot such as a 5R normal jackpot is won in mode E, instead of mode D, the mode is shifted to mode A, which is a non-time-saving mode, or mode B, in which the operation time of the electric accessory 36 is short. may In these cases mode D is omitted.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is a short-time mode in which normal electric accessories such as electric support members operate frequently and for a long time, so that it is easy to win the second start opening, and normal electric accessories operate in a low frequency and short time. Some have a non-time-saving mode. In this type of game machine, a non-time-saving mode is set in a normal game state with a low jackpot lottery probability, and a time-saving mode is set in a probability variable game state with a high jackpot lottery probability.

However, in the conventional game machine, the theoretical probability of being able to receive support from the normal electric accessory in the time saving mode is constant, and the game playability in the time saving mode is poor, making it difficult to create new game play. .

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, mode A, mode C and mode E are included as special figure gaming states. These modes A, C, and E have different expected values of the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion. Specifically, in mode A, the ball entry ratio with respect to the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and in mode C, the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is approximately 50%:50%. , and in mode E, the ball entry ratio with respect to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, based on the three modes A, C, and E in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is different, a novel game with improved game playability is provided. It becomes possible to create playability.

For example, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a loop variable machine, but in the conventional loop variable machine, the ball entry ratio for the first start port 314 is approximately 100%, and the ball for the second start port 315 Although there was a mode in which the ratio is approximately 100%, the ball entry ratio between the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 as in mode C of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is approximately 50%:50. % mode. On the other hand, in mode E, which is most advantageous to a player who wins a jackpot with a large amount of game value, the mode is typically shifted to mode C, which is a high-probability mode, based on the first win in mode A. It is necessary to obtain a big win by a big win lottery triggered by winning the second starting port 315 with a probability of approximately 50%. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to go through a step of obtaining a jackpot at the second starting port 315 in mode C before shifting to mode E, and there are obstacles to overcome in order to shift to mode E, which is the most advantageous. A new game property of having is given to the loop probability variable machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to improve the playability and interest.

In addition, since the game machine 10 further includes mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited in number of times, as special game states, it becomes easier to create new game features with improved game features. Specifically, mode E is typically shifted from mode C, which is the high-probability mode, as described above, but is also shifted from mode B and mode D, which are low-probability modes. That is, there is a possibility that mode E is shifted from mode B and mode D, which are shifted when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot. Since mode B and mode D are low-probability modes, the probability that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is lower than mode C, so mode B and mode D are shifted to mode E. has to overcome a higher barrier than when transitioning from mode C to mode E. In addition, in mode D, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, while in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short. Therefore, the height of the barrier to be overcome to shift to mode E differs between mode B and mode. Thus, by having the mode B and the mode D as the special game state, the game property having a plurality of barriers (three types of barriers in this embodiment) with different difficulties to be overcome in order to shift to the mode E is enhanced. It is given to the loop variable machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to further improve the playability and interest.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

In the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the stop result type of the variable display on the symbol display section 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops, and the same reach occurs. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of the three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss without the occurrence of the ready-to-win. Here, "ready-to-win" refers to a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation presentation process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. as a special game effect. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the MPU 41 executes the main process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 refers to a low-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, a high-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, or an outlier fluctuation table pre-stored in the fluctuation table storage area of the ROM 411 according to the lottery result. Identify the type. These variation tables may be provided depending on whether the current game state is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, or may be provided individually for each mode A to E.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display device 371, the second special symbol display device 372 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the result of the lottery is input to the sound lamp control device 5 . Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in . Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. , turn off the light.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display section 341. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

The normal symbol random number counter C4 is used for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 for a predetermined period of time. A loop counter that is reset to 0 after The random number counter C4 per normal symbol is periodically updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Then, based on this counter value (random value), a lottery per normal symbol is performed. In the normal symbol winning lottery, at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319, the normal symbol is not variably displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), and the jackpot game is performed. It is performed each time a game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319 on condition that it is not executed and the electric support member 36 is not operated. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the big winning lottery. On the other hand, when the count value (random value) of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4 is obtained for the normal winning lottery, the counter value of the normal per-symbol random number initial value counter CIN2 is set as the initial value of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4. .

The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes a first special figure reservation area RE1, a second special figure reservation area RE2, a third special figure reservation area RE3, a fourth special figure reservation area RE4, a fifth special figure reservation area RE5, and a sixth special figure reservation area RE5. Includes a special figure reservation area RE6, a seventh special figure reservation area RE7, an eighth special figure reservation area RE8, a special figure reservation number storage area NA, and a special figure execution area AE.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, the special figure propriety information is either the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8, the second Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 314 and winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 are stored in the winning order without discrimination. The special figure success/failure information is numerical information that is the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 that are acquired when the game ball wins to the start ports 314 and 315, It is for the winning of the first starting port 314, the starting port information (special figure information) that can distinguish whether it is for the winning of the second starting port 315, and the mode when acquiring the special figure success or failure information and mode information for each type (mode A to mode E).

In addition, corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 314 and the winning of the second starting port 315, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 etc.) may be provided separately.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is any of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 stored in In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed based on the special figure success/failure information stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8, it is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. It is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the starting ports 314 and 315, the special figure success/failure information includes the first special figure reservation area RE1, the second special figure reservation area RE2, the third special figure reservation area RE3, the fourth It is stored in a vacant area in order of priority of the special figure reservation area RE4, the 5th special figure reservation area RE5, the 6th special figure reservation area RE6, the 7th special figure reservation area RE7, and the 8th special figure reservation area RE8. In the special figure reservation number storage area NA, the number of the special figure propriety information stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is stored as the number N of reservations. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 are used as the winning history of the game balls to the start ports 314 and 315. It is possible to reserve up to eight special figure right or wrong information in the winning order.

The special figure execution area AE is a memory used for moving the special figure validity information stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 when the symbol variation display in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. area. Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery on the basis of numerical information and mode information stored as special symbol win/loss information in the special symbol execution area AE at the start of one first special symbol game or second special symbol game. , When the lottery result is a jackpot, a distribution lottery for the jackpot type is performed based on the starting opening information (special figure information) stored as the special figure win/loss information. Also, when the special figure validity information of the first special figure reservation area RE1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure validity information of the second special figure reservation area RE2 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is prioritized respectively. Shift to the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 7th special figure reservation area RE7, which is higher by one. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure win/loss information is stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 in order of winning without distinction between the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 314 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315. ~ While being stored in the eighth special figure reservation area RE8, the special figure success/failure information in the order of winning without distinction between the winning of the game ball to the first start port 314 and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 315 is the special figure execution area By being shifted to AE, the special figure game for the special figure propriety information is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is so-called MAX8 with respect to holding and canceling the holding of the special-figure information (execution of the special-figure game).

Normal pattern random number storage area 412c, when the game ball passes through the through gates 318, 319, normal pattern per random number counter C4 obtained by MPU41 at the timing when the passage of the game ball is detected by the entrance ball sensor 318a, 319a. is a storage area in which the counter value (random value) of is stored. The normal pattern random number storage area 412c does not store the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern, and the normal pattern changes at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. The through gate 318 is not displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), the jackpot game is not being executed, and the electric support member 36 is not operating. , 319, the counter value (random number) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is stored. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the normal symbol winning lottery is not suspended like the big winning lottery. Further, when the count value (random value) of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the counter value of the normal per-symbol random number initial value counter CIN2 is set as the initial value of the normal per-symbol random number counter C4.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-control unit 332 includes a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and Execute the presentation display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp flashing patterns used in special game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, thereby issuing a command to the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (control signal) to control the display of the pattern display section 341 . In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the flashing mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the pattern display section 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing the game effect.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Also, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the motor driver 39c. In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the audio output from the speaker 26, the flickering mode of the illumination part 27, etc. based on commands input from the main control device 4. FIG. Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected with the operation switch 20a. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27 can be controlled.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines, for example, a variation pattern and effect type based on the variation pattern command, and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6. Then, the variable display of the main symbol in the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, when the variation pattern command indicates that the lottery result indicates a loss in a jackpot lottery, the symbol display section 341 displays a combination of main symbols corresponding to the loss. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is a jackpot lottery and the lottery result indicates a jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information about the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information about the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and stores the information about the jackpot type in the RAM 512 when determining the jackpot game effect when the jackpot game start command is received. Refer to the information about the stored jackpot type.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5, thereby executing the variable display of the main symbols and the effect display. .

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 and the like, and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. MPU61 performs a process according to the control program memorize|stored in ROM611 grade|etc.,. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, the main symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, the notice effect image, the reach effect image, the big hit effect image, the off effect image, the opening used in the big hit game effect A plurality of types of images such as effect images, opening/closing execution effect images, and ending effect images are stored. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing variable display and effect display of the main symbol.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various types of information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

The payout device 132, as described above, pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be paid out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b.

The ball lending device 100 is installed on an island facility together with the game machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a driving signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. As described above, the shooting interval of the game ball may be different between the special figure gaming state and the jackpot gaming state.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . Further, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, driving units, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V, in a power failure state judge there is. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 24. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, description of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S<b>1001 , the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors or switches connected to the main controller 4 . For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the passage of the game ball is detected by any of the entering ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a.

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal per symbol random number initial value counter CIN2, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. do.

<Step S1003>
In step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number counter C4 per normal symbol. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number counter C4 per normal symbol, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, set the counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
The MPU 41 executes start winning processing associated with winning to the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and the game ball is shot on condition that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. is a process to enable On the other hand, in the shooting control process, when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated, shooting of the game ball is disabled. It is a process to The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes through gate processing. In the through gate process, the MPU 41 monitors whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, it stores the Update stored information. Details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Start winning process]
Here, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting ports 314, 315 based on the detection results of the entering ball sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the start ports 314 and 315 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102 and determines that the game ball has not entered the start ports 314 and 315. Then (step S1101: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, MPU41 determines whether or not the number of reservations N stored in the special figure reservation number storage area NA of RAM412 is the maximum number of reservations (8 in this embodiment). Here, if the number N of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process, and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the special figure propriety information in a high-priority empty reservation area among the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 14, and a variation type counter updated in step S1302 in the main process of FIG. Acquire the counter value with CS1, and transfer those counter values (numerical information) to the vacant reservation area with the highest priority among the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 8th special figure reservation area RE8 in RAM 412 Special figure right or wrong information store as Also, the MPU 41 determines which of the left first start opening 314L, the right first start opening 314R and the second start opening 315 the current starting prize is for, based on the detection results of the ball entering sensors 314La, 314Ra, and 315a. Along with identifying whether there is, the starting opening information for the identified starting openings 314, 315 is stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 as special figure propriety information. Further, the MPU 41 turns on the game state (mode A to mode E) in the pending game for which the numerical information is acquired in steps S1912, S1919, S1923, S1928 and S1931 of the game state transition processing in FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. The mode is specified based on the set mode type flag (mode A flag to mode E flag), and the mode information for the specified mode is used as special figure propriety information in the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 8th special figure Store in the reserved area RE8.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, MPU41, before the special figure validity information acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for judging the validity of the jackpot in S1802 or S1803 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 described later, the contents of the special figure validity information After confirmation, a pending command setting process is executed to set a pending command based on the result of this confirmation. It should be noted that, when the processing in step S1105 is completed, the start winning processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

[Through gate processing]
Here, the through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. In the through gate process, it is monitored whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, a normal pattern hit is stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The counter value (random value) of the random number counter C4 is stored.

<Step S1201>
First, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318, 319 based on the detection results of the entering ball sensors 317a, 318a. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 (step S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1202, and determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gates 318 and 319. (Step S1201: No), the through gate process is terminated.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41, based on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag that is set to ON in step S1412 of the normal pattern control processing of FIG. pair is blinking). When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner (step S1202: Yes), the through gate process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery during the variable display of the normal symbols, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36 . On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the symbols are not displayed in a variable manner (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1203.

<Step S1203>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is in operation based on the electric role product operating flag set to ON in step S1508 of the normal electric role product control process in FIG. 19 to be described later. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is in operation (step S1203: Yes), the through gate process ends. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery while the electric support member 36 is in operation. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is not in operation (step S1203: No), the process proceeds to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. Whether or not the game is in the jackpot game is determined, for example, based on whether or not the jackpot game state flag, which is set to ON in step S1907 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 23, is set to ON. When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is in progress (S1204: Yes), it ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery during the jackpot game, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the process proceeds to step S1205.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 are stopped during the big winning game, but the normal symbol winning lottery and the electric support member 36 are activated only in the open/close execution mode of the big winning game. The operation may be stopped, and the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be stopped in the opening and opening/closing execution modes. That is, in the ending, the normal symbol winning lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be performed.

<Steps S1205 and S1206>
When the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), and the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the MPU 41 controls the normal symbol per random number counter C4. counter value (random number) is obtained (step S1205), this counter value (random number) is stored in the general pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1206), and the through gate process ends. In other words, on the condition that the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the electric support member 36 is not in operation, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the normal symbol winning lottery for determining whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 is performed. , and store the random value.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 are executed as regular processes, for example, at a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update process of steps S1309 to S1311 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 to the next cycle. be.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Execute the process. For example, when a command such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, etc. is set in the RAM 412 , the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 to be described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7 .

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316b, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁Further, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412 when determining that the variable winning opening 316b has won a prize based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 . This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the main process. As a result, the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display section 341 to display the number of game balls to be paid out (distributed ball display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 normally executes symbol control processing. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. A lottery will be held. Details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes normal electric accessory control processing. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes the process of operating the electric support member 36 only for the operating time corresponding to the mode type (mode A to mode E) of the special figure gaming state. Details of the normal electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, MPU41 executes special figure game control processing for controlling the game in the variation game. Although the details of the special figure game control process will be described later, in the special figure game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variation pattern command required for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, MPU41, the big hit random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Based on each value, while setting the variation pattern command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the RAM 412, the variation display of the first special symbol display device 371 and the second special symbol display device 372 of the main display section 37. and control the stop display.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, an opening/closing execution mode for controlling opening/closing of the opening/closing door 316c is executed. In this open/close execution mode, a round game in which a game ball can be entered into the variable winning opening 316b is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. As a result, the player can acquire many game balls in the jackpot game. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening), at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending), at the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the ending) ), etc., to set various flags and commands. For example, the MPU 41 sets commands such as a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, and an opening/closing execution mode end command in the RAM 412 according to the progress of the jackpot game. It controls ON/OFF of flags such as an end flag, an opening/closing execution mode start flag, and an opening/closing execution mode end flag.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the determination result of the jackpot lottery in step S1804 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state and mode A to mode E when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that it is time to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and the processes after S1301 described above are executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that it is not the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time, steps S1309 to S1311 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that it is time to execute the next main process (step S1309: Yes).

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal per symbol random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. to

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is set to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1309.

[Normal symbol control process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal symbol control processing executed in step S1304 in the main processing of FIG. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric accessory 36 based on the counter value (random value) of the normal random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. To perform a lottery and control variable display of normal symbols.

<Steps S1401 and S1402>
First, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value (random value) of the normal per random number counter C4 is stored in the general pattern random number storage area 412c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to perform a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 . When the MPU 41 stores the counter value (random value) of the normal per random number counter C4 in the general pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes), the counter value (random value) stored in the general pattern random number storage area 412c ) is erased (step S1402), and the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1413, when the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 hits normally is not memorize|stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode type is mode A, that is, whether or not the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)). When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), that is, when it determines that the normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the normal symbol low probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(C)), The process proceeds to step S1404. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, it is one of mode B to mode E, the normal symbol winning lottery is normal symbol high probability success or failure table (Fig. 13 (D )), the process proceeds to step S1407.

<Steps S1404 to S1406>
When it is determined that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 normally sets the counter value of the non-time saving mode to the symbol variation display counter (step S1404). This counter value defines the variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time saving mode, and is set as a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability propriety table (see FIG. 13C) (step S1405), and determines whether or not the lottery result is winning (step S1406). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a hit depending on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the general/universal pattern random number storage area 412c is 199.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is winning (step S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out (step S1406 : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Steps S1407 to S1409>
When it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, when it is determined that the game state is one of mode B to mode E, the MPU 41 puts the counter value of the time saving mode in the normal symbol variation display counter. is set (step S1407). This counter value defines the variable display time of normal symbols in the time saving mode, and the time during which the game ball passing through the first through gate 318 can enter the second start port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36, For example, it is set to about 0.004 to 0.2 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol winning lottery based on the normal symbol high probability success/failure table (see FIG. 13(D)) (step S1408), and determines whether or not the lottery result is winning (step S1409). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win depending on whether the counter value (random number) stored in the general/universal pattern random number storage area 412c is 0-198.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a hit (step S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out (step S1409 : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Step S1410>
When it is determined that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win (Yes in step S1406 or step S1409), the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern hit flag indicating that the lottery result is a win (step S1410 ). The normal figure hit flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1503 of the normal electric accessory control process in FIG. 19 described later.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 starts variable display of the normal design (flashing of the pair of LED lamps of the normal design display 373), further sets the flag during normal design fluctuation display to ON (step S1412), and controls the normal design. End the process. The normal design variation display started here is when the counter value of the normal design variation display time counter set in step S1404 or step S1407 becomes 0, that is, the normal design variation set according to the mode type. After the display time has passed, it is stopped and displayed in step S1415, which will be described later.

<Step S1413>
When the counter value (random value) of the normal per random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal pattern random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 is normally set in step S1404 or step S1407 during the fluctuation display time of the design. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S1413). If the value of the variable display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1414, and if the value of the variable display time counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), the process proceeds to step S1418. .

<Step S1414>
When it is determined that the counter value of the variation display time counter for normal symbols is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation display flag is set to ON (step S1414). . The normal pattern fluctuation displaying flag indicates whether or not the normal pattern is fluctuating, and is set to ON in step S1412. In other words, the MPU 41, when the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1414: Yes), determines whether the flag during the normal pattern fluctuation display is set to ON. , It is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the normal symbols. MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to on (step S1414: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1415, when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to off (step S1414: No), the normal symbol control process ends.

<Steps S1415 to S1417>
When the counter value of the normal symbol variation counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes) and the normal symbol variation display flag is set to ON (step S1414: Yes), it is normal symbol stop display timing, so the MPU 41 , the normal symbol is stopped and displayed by lighting or extinguishing the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 (step S1415). That is, the MPU 41 indicates the lottery result of the normal symbol winning lottery in step S1405 or S1408 by means of the stop display symbol of the normal symbol. In addition, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is fluctuating to OFF (step S1416), and sets the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag to ON (step S1417). The normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal pattern has been stopped, and in step S1501 of the normal electric accessory control process described later, it is determined whether or not it is time to operate the electric support member 36. Referred to for decision making.

<Step S1418>
When the counter value of the variation counter of the normal design is not 0 (step S1413: No), it is not the stop display timing of the normal design, so the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the variation display time counter of the normal design, and the normal design. End the control process.

[Normal electric accessory control process]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal electric accessary product control processing executed in step S1305 in the main processing of FIG. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes the process of operating the electric support member 36 as the normal electric accessory for the operating time corresponding to the mode type (modes A to E).

<Step S1501>
First, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag, which is set to ON in step S1417 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. determine whether there is When the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and shifts the processing to step S1503. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1509, when the normal figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 and S1503>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and whether the normal pattern per flag is set to ON is determined (step S1503). The normal pattern hit flag indicates that the lottery result in the normal pattern per lottery is a hit, and is set to ON in step S1410 of the normal pattern control process in FIG. MPU41, when the normal pattern per flag is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1504, when the normal pattern per flag is set to off (step S1503: Yes), the End the normal electric accessories control process.

<Steps S1504 to S1506>
When the normal figure hit flag is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the mode type is one of mode A to mode C. When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is one of the modes A to C (step S1504: Yes), the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is set to the electric support member 36 for short operation. A value is set (step S1505), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value for short operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode type is neither mode A to mode C (step S1504: No), that is, if it is mode D or mode E, as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter, the electric support A value for long operation of the member 36 is set (step S1506), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value for long operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds.

<Steps S1507 and S1508>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the electric support member 36, and further sets the electric accessory operating flag to ON (step S1508). The electric accessory in operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation. Referenced.

Here, when the operation of the electric support member 36 is started, the electric support member 36 moves to the operating position protruding from the game board 31, and the electric support member 36 covers the right first start opening 314R (see FIG. 9 ( B)). In this state, game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 are restricted from entering the right first starting port 314R. On the other hand, game balls released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36 . When the game ball released from the second passage 352 is received by the electric support member 36 , the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36 . Also, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36 .

<Steps S1509 and S1510>
MPU41, when the normal figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No), whether the counter value of the electric accessary product operation counter whose initial value is set in step S1505 or S1506 is 0 It judges (step S1509). The electric accessory actuation counter indicates the remaining time for the electric support member 36 to operate. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric support member 36 is not operating and is in the standby position. When the counter value of the electric accessary product operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the counter value of the electric auditors product operation counter is not 0 (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the electric auditors product operation counter (step S1510), and ends the normal electric auditors product control process. do.

<Step S1511>
When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the electric support member 36 which is a normal electric accessory is not operating, the MPU 41 turns on the electric accessory operating flag. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S1511). The electric accessary product in operation flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is in operation, and is set to ON in step S1508. In other words, when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is time to end the operation of the support member 36, that is, whether or not it is time to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position. MPU41, if the electric auditors product in operation flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1512, if the electric auditors product in operation flag is set to OFF (step S1511: No), the normal electric accessary product control process ends.

<Steps S1512 and S1513>
When the electric accessary product in operation flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position (step S1512). That is, the MPU 41 restricts the game ball from entering the second starting port 315 . Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory operating flag indicating that the electric support member 36 is operating to OFF (step S1513), and terminates the normal symbol control process.

Here, the electric support member 36 is returned to the standby position, so that the electric support member 36 opens the right first starting port 314R (see FIG. 8(C)). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is permitted to enter the right first start port 314R, but cannot be received by the electric support member 36. Therefore, the game ball released from the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the second starting port 315 . Also, game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 cannot be received by the electric support member 36, and entry into the second start port 315 is restricted.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a first starting section capable of entering a game ball without receiving the support of an ordinary electric accessory, as a starting section that triggers a jackpot lottery for shifting to a jackpot game; There is also a second starting section that allows a game ball to be entered with the support of an ordinary electric accessory. In some game machines, a sorting device alternately sorts game balls between the first starting section and the second starting section.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35. If it is, depending on whether the electric support member 36 is operated or not, the entrance of the game ball to the right first start port 314R and the second start port 315 is permitted or restricted. Specifically, when the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is in the standby position without the electric support member 36 operating (see FIG. 8(C)), the game ball to the right first start port 314R is permitted, the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 is restricted. In addition, when the electric support member 36 operates and is in the operating position (see FIG. 9B), the entry of the game ball to the right first start port 314R is restricted, while the second start port 315 Entry of game balls is permitted. Further, when the electric support member 36 is at the operating position, the electric support member 36 guides the game balls released from the sorting device 35 to the second starting port 315 in addition to the game balls hit to the right side area of the game board 31. be able to. In this way, the game machine 10 is different from the one in which game balls are distributed to the first start opening and the second start opening by a conventional distribution device. In addition, the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 not only permits or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting port 315 but also distributes them to the second passage 352, unlike conventional ordinary electric accessories. Entry of the game ball into the right first starting hole 314R is permitted or restricted at the same time. Also, the game ball in the second passage 352 and the game ball hit to the right can be guided to the second starting port 315 by one electric support member 36 . The game machine 10 can vary the ball entry ratio between the right first start hole 314R and the second start hole 315 by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36. FIG. As a result, the game machine 10 can reduce the monotony of the game, and provide a game machine with new playability and improved interest according to the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36 . For example, while the electric support member 36 is operated short in modes A to C, it is operated long in modes D and E (see FIG. 13(B)). , the game machine 10 can be provided with a plurality of barriers with different difficulties. Further, the electric support member 36 is a plate-like member and can be easily formed by resin molding or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above effects can be achieved at low cost with a simple configuration.

[Special game control process]
Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure game control processing executed by the MPU 41 at step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 17 will be described. In the special figure game control process, the control of the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 371 or the second special symbol display device 372, the setting of the data of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, the management of the number of time reduction etc. is executed.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the middle of the big hit game, and if it is in the middle of the big hit game (step S1601: Yes), ends the variation game control process, and is not in the middle of the big hit game. If so (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. For example, whether or not the big win game is executed is determined based on the big win game execution flag which the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the big win game and turns OFF at the end of the big win game.

<Step S1602>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and if the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1603. If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1607. For example, whether or not the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is set to ON in step S1810 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. It is determined based on whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag set to off in step S1605 is set to on.

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbols has passed the variable display time determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, and displays the variable display. If it is determined that the time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1604, and if it is determined that the fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1603: No), the special figure game control process exit.

<Steps S1604 to S1606>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the MPU 41 is the special symbol display device 371, 372 that is in the process of variable display of the first special symbol display device 371 and the second special symbol display device 372. Symbols according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special game are stopped and displayed (step S1604). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation displaying flag to OFF (step S1605), and sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to ON indicating that the special symbol fluctuation has been stopped (step S1606).

<Step S1607>
If the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number N of reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area NA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b is 0. (Step S1607). Here, when the number N of reservations is 0 (step S1607: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1608, when the number N of reservations is not 0 (step S1607: No).

<Step S1608>
In step S1608, MPU41 performs a data setting process about the special figure propriety information memorize|stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1608 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1609. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1609>
In step S1609, the MPU 41 causes the special symbol display devices 371 and 372 to execute the variation display based on the special figure validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the variation display based on the special figure validity information to the symbol display unit 341. A variation start process for setting a variation pattern command is executed for execution, and the special figure game control process is terminated. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1608 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. In the data setting process, the process is executed by updating the data in the special figure reservation storage area 412b of the RAM412.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
First, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area NA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (step S1701), and further the first special figure reservation area of the special figure reservation storage area 412b. The special figure propriety information is moved from RE1 to the special figure execution area AE (step S1702).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second special figure reservation area RE2 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 one by one. Specifically, in step S1703, the special figure validity information in the second special figure reservation area RE2 is moved to the first special figure reservation area RE1, and the special figure validity information in the third special figure reservation area RE3 is moved to the second special figure reservation. Move to the area RE2, move the special figure validity information in the fourth special figure reservation area RE4 to the third special figure reservation area RE3, move the special figure validity information in the fifth special figure reservation area RE5 to the fourth special figure reservation area RE4 , move the special figure validity information in the 6th special figure reservation area RE6 to the 5th special figure reservation area RE5, and move the special figure validity information in the 7th special figure reservation area RE7 to the 6th special figure reservation area RE6 and move the special figure propriety information in the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 to the seventh special figure reservation area RE7.

<Step S1704>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special figure propriety information of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1704 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed. When the process of step S1704 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S1609 in FIG.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Here, an example of the special figure fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1609 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
First, the MPU 41 is based on the mode information in the special figure validity information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b of the RAM 412, and the game state at the time of acquisition of the validity information is mode C or mode E (step S1801). Here, in mode C and mode E, based on the high probability mode success/failure table, the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the special figure success/failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE is the jackpot winning. This is a mode for judging whether or not there are corresponding values (see FIGS. 12(B) and 13(B)). That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the mode is a mode in which the success/failure determination is performed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12B). MPU41, when the special figure gaming state is mode C or mode E (step S1801: Yes), based on the high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 12 (B)), performs the propriety determination (step S1802). On the other hand, if the game state is not mode C or mode E (step S1801: No), that is, if the game state is mode A, mode B or mode D, based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)) Then, a decision is made as to whether or not it is appropriate (step S1803).

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
In step S1804, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit. MPU41, when the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot (step S1804: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 included as numerical information in the special figure success/failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the special figure Based on the starting opening information (special figure information) included in the success or failure information, the big hit type is distributed, and the process proceeds to step S1806. For example, if the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the first starting opening (first special figure), depending on the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, either the 2R normal jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot Distribute jackpot types. In addition, when the starting opening information (special figure information) indicates the second starting opening (second special figure), according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot Distribute the jackpot type to any one of. On the other hand, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1806 without distributing the jackpot type (step S1805) when the result of the success/failure determination is not a big hit (step S1804: No), that is, when the lottery result is out.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 performs a lottery result flag setting process for setting a lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, the success/failure determination in step S1802 or S1803, and the jackpot type distribution result in step S1805. Run. In this lottery result flag setting process, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, the 2R normal jackpot flag is set, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is set, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set, and when the 5R normal jackpot is a 5R jackpot. When the normal jackpot flag is the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set, when the 16R probability variable jackpot is set, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set, and when the jackpot is off, the loss flag is set. Here, the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag are flags indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot and the jackpot type, and are shown in FIGS. In the game state transition processing, it is referred to when the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to mode B to mode E after the jackpot game is finished, and is set to OFF when the game state is shifted to the target mode after the jackpot game is finished. be. Also, the loss flag indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and is set to OFF in step S1813, which will be described later. Then, in this step S1806, when the lottery result flag is set, the stop display patterns of the special figure indicators 371 and 372 of the main display section 37 are also set according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41, according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, sets the variation pattern indicating the variation display time of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 371 and 372 to the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter. Determined based on the counter value of CS1. And MPU41 sets a variation pattern command to RAM412 based on the variation pattern determined by step S1807 (step S1808). This variation pattern command may include the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special game. Of course, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery may be set as a command separate from the variation pattern command without being included in the variation pattern command. The variation pattern command set in step S1808 is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 5 in step S1301 (see FIG. 17) of the next main process executed by the MPU 41. FIG. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 5 executes the symbol variation display by the symbol display section 341 based on the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1809 and S1810>
When the variation pattern is set, the MPU 41 starts the variation display of the special symbols on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 (step S1809), and sets the special symbol variation display flag to ON (step S1810). Here, the special symbol whose variable display is started is stopped after the variable display time (variation pattern) set in step S1807 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 20 (step S1603 of FIG. 20: Yes and S1604). At this time, the special symbol is stopped at the stop display symbol set in step S1806 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

<Step S1811>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag set to on at S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition processing of FIGS. When set (step S1811: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1812, and when the time saving flag is set to off (step S1811: No), the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Step S1812>
When the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the out flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813 when the out flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), that is, when the result of the right/wrong determination in step S1802 or S1803 is out. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817 when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the result of the win/loss determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit.

<Steps S1813 to S1816>
When the out flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the out flag to OFF (step S1813), and S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the time saving counter that is set when the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1814), and it is determined whether the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is 0. (Step S1815). In addition, the counter value of the time-saving counter indicates the number of remaining time-savings. MPU41, when the counter value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when the remaining time saving number of times is 0 and it is necessary to end the time saving mode, the time saving end flag is set to ON. (Step S1816), the process proceeds to step S1817. The time saving end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1909 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 23 in order to determine whether the time saving mode is ended. On the other hand, when the counter value of the time saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Step S1817>
MPU41, when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or when the time saving end flag is set to on (step S1816), the time saving flag is set to off (step S1817), and the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, the game state transition processing executed by the MPU 41 at step S1308 in the main processing of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. In the game state transition processing, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game state is shifted from a special game state consisting of modes A to E to a jackpot game state including an opening/closing execution mode, and the game state is changed to a jackpot game state. After the end of the jackpot game, according to the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state, execute processing to shift from the jackpot game state to any of the special game state modes B to E ( See FIG. 13(A)). In addition, in the game state transition processing, in the mode B or mode D of the special figure game state, after executing the special figure game of the upper limit number of times, the process of shifting to the mode A is executed (see FIG. 13 (A)). Since the details of Modes A to E have already been explained, the explanation of Modes A to E will be omitted here.

<Steps S1901 and S1902>
First, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag, which is set to on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is time to shift the game state to another game state. MPU41, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1902), and shifts the process to step S1903. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1914.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery that triggered the variable display of the special symbols whose variable display has been stopped is a big win. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the game state to the jackpot game state. Whether or not the lottery result is a big hit, 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag, 5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable set to ON in step S1806 of special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. It is determined by whether or not any one of the jackpot flags is set to ON.

When the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is a big hit (step S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1904, and when it determines that the lottery result is not a big hit (step S1903: No), The process moves to step S1909.

<Steps S1904 and S1905>
In step S1904, MPU41 judges whether the time saving flag set to ON by below-mentioned step S1917 or S1926 is set to ON. The time-saving flag indicates that the time-saving mode is limited to the number of times. If the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1904: Yes), that is, if it is a jackpot in mode B or mode D, the time saving flag is turned off to end the limited time saving mode (step S1905), and the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to off (step S1904: No), that is, when the jackpot in mode A, mode C or mode E, the process proceeds to step S1906.

<Steps S1906 and S1907>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state, and further sets the jackpot game state flag to ON (step S1907). The jackpot game state flag indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and is referred to, for example, in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. 16 to determine whether a jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908), and sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908). The mode type flag indicates which mode the mode type in the special game state is mode A to mode E, and in this step S1908, it is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot game state. set the mode type flag to off.

The mode type flags are a mode A flag that is set to on in step S1912 and indicates mode A, a mode B flag that is set to on in step S1919 and indicates mode B, and a mode B flag that is set to on in step S1923. A mode C flag that is set to ON and indicates that the mode is C, a mode D flag that is set to ON in step S1928 and indicates that the mode is D (see FIG. 24), and a flag that is set to ON in step S1931. and includes a mode E flag (see FIG. 24) indicating that it is mode E.

<Step S1909>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out (step S1903: No), the MPU41 is set to ON in step S1816 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 Whether the time saving end flag is set to ON is determined (step S1909). The time-saving end flag indicates that the upper limit number of special symbol games has been executed in the time-saving mode with a limited number of times (the number of remaining time-savings is 0), and is a flag for ending the time-saving mode.

MPU41 transfers a process to step S1910, when it is judged that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to off (step S1909: No), it ends the game state transition processing without shifting to the mode A.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When it is determined that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to OFF (step S1910). And MPU41 changes mode classification from mode B or mode D which is time saving mode to mode A (Step S1911). At this time, the MPU 41 sets the mode A flag to ON (step S1912), sets the mode B flag or mode D flag indicating the mode before shifting to mode A to OFF (step S1913), and sets the game state End the migration process.

<Steps S1914 and S1915>
In step S1914, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), it is set to ON in the jackpot game control process of step S1307 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game end flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is time to shift to any one of modes B to E upon completion of the jackpot game.

When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes), it sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S1915), and shifts the process to step S1916. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1914: No), it ends the game state transition process without performing the transition to the modes B to E.

<Step S1916>
In step S1916, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is the 2R normal jackpot. When the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1916: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1917, and when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1916: No), the process to step S1921.

<Steps S1917 to S1920>
In step S1917, the MPU 41 turns on a time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving mode limited to the number of times. At this time, MPU41 sets the upper limit of the number of times of time saving as a time saving counter. The number of times of time saving is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as a time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode B (step S1918) and sets the mode B flag to ON (step S1919). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1920), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S1921>
In step S1921, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is the 2R probability variable jackpot. When the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1921: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1922, and when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1921: No), the process to step S1925 in FIG.

<Steps S1922 to S1924>
At step S1922, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode C, and further sets the mode C flag to ON (step S1923). Then, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S1924), and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S1925>
In step S1925 shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is the 5R normal jackpot. When the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S1925: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926, and when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S1925: No), the process to step S1930.

<Steps S1926 to S1929>
In step S1926, the MPU 41 turns on a time saving flag indicating that it is a limited time saving mode. At this time, MPU41 sets the upper limit of the number of times of time saving as a time saving counter. The number of times of time saving is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as a time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode D (step S1927) and sets the mode D flag to ON (step S1928). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1929), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S1930 to S1932>
At step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode E and sets the mode E flag to ON. That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes) and all of the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag and 5R normal jackpot flag are set to OFF (steps S1916, S1921 and S1925 No), it can be determined that either the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON. Therefore, in step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E, which is the destination mode after the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot game and the 16R probability variable jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable big hit flag or the 16R probability variable big hit flag set to ON to OFF (step S1932), and ends the game state transition processing.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the secondary timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1951), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1952), counter update processing (step S1953), command determination processing (step S1954), special figure game production processing (step S1955), and jackpot game production processing (step S1956) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
In the operation detection process of step S1951, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the operation button 20, and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times, for example. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
In the operation detection pattern determination process of step S1952, the MPU 51 sets an operation pattern flag corresponding to the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the past three times, for example. The operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined from this operation pattern flag. The operation state includes a start state of operation on the operation button 20, a continuation state of operation on the operation button 20, an end state of operation on the operation button 20, and a non-operation state in which the operation button 20 is not operated.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process of step S1953, the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter becomes 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, the fact that the decoration pattern is being changed, the completion of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of step S1954, the MPU 51 determines the command received from the main controller 4 and executes the process corresponding to the command. For example, commands received from the main controller 4 include a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, and the like. Commands other than these commands may be output from the main controller 4 to the sound lamp controller 5, but the description of those commands will be omitted.

The variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command, when starting the variation display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 371 and 372, based on the information stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b, in the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. It is set in step S1808. When receiving the variation pattern command, the MPU 51 determines the special figure game effect and the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like according to the contents specified by the variation pattern command.

The pending command is a command indicating the lottery result, variation pattern, and pending number N in the jackpot lottery for the increased pending when the pending number N stored in the special figure pending storage area 412b increases. The pending command is set in step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. 15 based on the information stored in the special figure pending storage area 412b when the number of pending N increases.

The shift command is a command indicating that when the number of reservations N decreases, the special figure success or failure information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the 1st special figure reservation area RE1 to the 8th special figure reservation area RE8 has been shifted. be. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

[Special game effect processing]
In the special figure game production process of step S1955, in the special figure game, for example, the special figure game production determined when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc. let it run.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing of step S1956, the pattern display unit 341 displays the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect and ending effect) determined when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process, for example, in the jackpot game. The speaker 26, the electric decoration part 27, etc. are made to perform.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a conventional game equipped with a distribution device that distributes game balls to the first starter and the second starter having a different function from the first starter. Unlike the machine, the first starting port 314 having the same function is arranged below the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . In addition, although the game machine 10 is provided with a normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) as in the conventional game machine, the electric support member 36 is located downstream of the stage 310 where game balls are collected when hit right. It extends continuously between the side and the bottom of the game ball exit of the second passage 352 (above the right first starting port 314R), and is formed in a plate shape having a delay portion 364. As shown in FIG. As a result, the electric support member 36 enables the game balls introduced into the distribution device 35 and distributed to the second passage 352 to enter the second starting port 315 when hitting the left side, and the stage when hitting the right side. The game balls collected in 310 can be made to enter the second start port 315. - 特許庁In other words, the electric support member 36 allows or restricts the winning of game balls to the second starting port 315, and at the same time restricts or restricts the winning of game balls to the right first starting port 314R, depending on whether or not it is operated. allow. In other words, the electric support member 36 restricts the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, unlike the ordinary electric accessory of the conventional game machine, thereby preventing the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R. While permitting, by permitting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. In addition, the game machine 10 includes a normal mode (mode A), a latent probability variable mode (mode C) and a time reduction probability variable mode (mode E) that are employed in conventional gaming machines as special game states. By cooperating with the device 35 and the electric support member 36, the playability in the latent probability variable mode (mode C) is improved.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, left-handed hitting is encouraged in mode A and mode C, and game balls enter the distribution device 35 when left-handed hitting is performed, and those game balls are distributed to the first passage 351. and the second passage 352 alternately. On the other hand, in mode E, right-handed hitting is encouraged, and by performing right-handed hitting, it is possible to receive support from the electric support member 36 for a long time and at high frequency. Only special figure games are executed. In other words, in mode E, the rate of ball entry into the second start port 315 is 100%, similar to the time-saving variable mode of a conventional game machine in which the high probability mode is executed by hitting to the right without using the sorting device 35. is.

Then, in mode A, the game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins the left first starting port 314L. In addition, since the mode A is not the time saving mode, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins the right first start port 314R before the electric support member 36 operates. In other words, in mode A, game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, but the game balls introduced to the distribution device 35 are first start port 314 (left First starting port 314L or right first starting port 314R). Therefore, in mode A, substantially the same as the normal mode of the conventional gaming machine, the percentage of balls entering the first starting port 314 is 100%.

On the other hand, in mode C, similarly to mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, and game balls enter the sorting device 35 when left-handed hitting is performed, and those game balls enter the first passage 351. The game balls are alternately distributed to the second passages 352, and when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351, the game balls win the left first start port 314L. In addition, since mode C is a time-saving mode unlike mode A, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the right first start port 314R by the operation of the electric support member 36. Thus, the second starting port 315 is won. That is, in mode C, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 by the distribution device 35 by hitting left. Therefore, in mode C, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315, while the latency probability variable mode is the first starting port (left first starting port 314L). The ball entry ratio between the starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 is 50%:50% as long as the result of the lottery per normal pattern is not lost.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is different in mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode C (expected value is 50%). It has three game states of mode E (expected value is 100%). Therefore, based on the three game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first start hole 314 and the second start hole 315 are different, it is possible to create new game properties with improved game properties. In particular, since the game machine 10 is configured as MAX8, the hold is digested in the order of winning, so in mode C, the jackpot lottery at the first start port 314 and the jackpot lottery at the second start port 315 are alternately performed. , and with a probability of 1/2, it is possible to receive the distribution of the jackpot type by winning to the second start port 315, and the distribution of the jackpot type by winning to the first start port 314 with a probability of 1/2. can receive

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 enters the right first start hole 314R in mode A, and enters the second start hole 315 in mode C. to ball This is because the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is allowed to enter the right first start port 314R when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position where the electric support member 36 is not operated, Entry of a game ball into the second start port 315 is restricted, and when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position where the electric support member 36 operates, entry of a game ball into the right first start port 314R is restricted, while the second start is performed. This is realized by arranging the electric support member 36 so that the game ball can enter the mouth 315 and by differentiating the operation time of the electric support member 36 between the mode A and the mode C. . In this way, the electric support member 36 not only allows or restricts the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 315, but also allows the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 to enter the right first starting hole 314R. Entry of game balls is allowed or restricted at the same time. That is, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 work together to vary the ball entry ratio between the right first starting hole 314R and the second starting hole 315 in the mode A and the mode C. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, and to provide a highly interesting game machine with new game features depending on the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36 .

In the gaming machine 10, the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 315, so that the player can Even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 by hitting to the right, the delay guide 364 can secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second start port 315.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the electric support member 36 from reaching the second start port 315 from the start of the operation of the electric support member 36 to the return to the standby position, so that the left-handed hitting is encouraged. By eliminating the advantage of hitting to the right in the state, it is possible to make the player positively hit to the left.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are assigned to the same configurations and processing steps as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment. The description below is omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing procedure of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second to Sixth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the game machine 10 is configured as a loop variable machine, and the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in the second to sixth embodiments, the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment. The second to sixth embodiments will be individually described below.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been explained. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a special symbol game is executed in one of the three game states of mode A, mode C and mode E. That is, the game machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes with a limited number of times, are not included as special game states. In addition, since the special figure gaming state is composed of three modes A to C, mode transition is also different from the above-described first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 26(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot classification table, FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 26(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. 26D is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 26(A) is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment. That is, also in this embodiment, the jackpot in the first special game by winning the first starting port 314 is distributed to either the 2R variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, and the winning to the second starting port 315 The jackpot in the 2 special game is distributed to one of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, and the 5R normal jackpot. Of course, the allocation of the jackpot types may be different from that in the above-described first embodiment, and for example, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 26(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C and mode E are the same as those of the first embodiment. Mode E, Mode C and Mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 26(C) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are 2R normal jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, mode A is shifted to after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot and a 16R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. That is, after the end of the jackpot game executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, in the case of the normal jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode A, and in the case of the probability variable jackpot by winning the first start ports 314L, 314R. The mode is shifted to the mode C, and in the case of winning a prize for the second starting port 315, the mode is shifted to the mode E. - 特許庁

FIG. 26D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the first special game is 25% for 2R normal jackpots, and 2R probability variable jackpots. 75%. Therefore, after the jackpot game is over, the game is basically shifted from mode A to mode A or mode C, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25%, and the probability of shifting to mode C is 75%.

In mode C, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. In addition, as described above, the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special game is 25% for the 2R normal jackpot and 75% for the 2R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, the distribution of the jackpot types in the second special game is 25% for the 5R probability variable jackpot, 50% for the 16R probability variable jackpot, and 25% for the 5R normal jackpot. Therefore, from mode C, it is possible to shift to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25%, and the probability of shifting to mode C is 37.5%. , the probability of transition to mode E is 37.5%.

In mode E, the second special game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the second special game is 25% for 5R variable variable jackpot, 50% for 16R variable jackpot, and 25% for 5R normal jackpot. %. Therefore, after the jackpot game is finished, mode C is basically shifted to mode A or mode E, and the probability of shifting to mode A is 25%, and the probability of shifting to mode E is 75%.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, since the game machine 10 does not execute the mode B and the mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of times, in the game state transition processing of the present embodiment shown in FIG. If the special figure fluctuation stop flag that is set to ON is set to ON (step S1900: Yes), steps S1903 and S1904 (see FIG. 23) regarding the time saving flag in the game state transition processing of the first embodiment described above ) is omitted, and if the lottery result is a loss, the game state transition processing is terminated without mode transition.

On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), when the jackpot game end flag set to on in step S1307 of the main processing of FIG. 17 is set to on ( Step S1914: Yes), the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1915), and according to the jackpot type, the process of shifting from the jackpot game state to mode A, mode C or mode E is executed (step S2001 to S2009). Steps S2001 to S2009 will be described below.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
When the MPU 41 turns off the jackpot game flag when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) (step S2001). Whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 22 is set to ON. .

When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode A of the special game state (step S2002), and sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2003 ), and the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the process proceeds to step S2004.

<Steps S2004 to S2006>
When the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004). ). Whether or not the lottery result is the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined by whether or not the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start processing in FIG. 22, is set to ON.

MPU41, when the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: Yes), shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode C of the special figure game state (step S2005), and sets the mode C flag to ON (step S2006), and the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not the 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: No), the process proceeds to step S2007.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
When the lottery result is neither a normal jackpot (step S2001: No) nor a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode E of the special game state (step S2007), sets the mode E flag to ON (step S2008), and shifts the process to step S2009.

<Step S2009>
When the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to ON (steps S2003, S2006 and S2008), it sets the jackpot type flag to OFF (step S2009). That is, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot type flags set to ON among the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag. When the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to OFF, the game state transition processing is terminated.

Thus, in this embodiment, the special game state consists of three modes of mode A, mode B and mode E, and there is no time saving mode limited to the number of times (mode B, mode D) as the time saving mode. In addition, when the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the game shifts to mode A, which is a non-time-saving mode, after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, compared with the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, the staying ratio of time saving mode becomes low. On the other hand, the time-saving mode is a mode in which it is possible to expect the winning of game balls to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, so the 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot that triggers the shift to mode E is expected. can. As a result, the rate of staying in the time saving mode is low, so that it is difficult to shift to the mode E, which is the time saving mode, and the game has a game property that makes it easy to fall to the mode A. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of mode transitions and a variety of prize balls that the player can obtain.

In this embodiment, three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E are described. Three modes of mode E, or three modes of mode A, mode C and mode D may be used. Also, the special game state may be 4 modes or 6 or more modes. As an example of the special game state having 4 modes, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode D, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode E, mode A, mode B, mode There are four modes, D and E.

Also, the special figure gaming state may include modes other than mode A to mode E. For example, the special game state, in addition to mode A and mode E, the number of times of time saving is limited to a small number, for example, the number of times of time saving is about 1/40 to 1/10 of the jackpot probability. good too. The slight time reduction mode may include a difficult support slight time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is difficult to receive and an easy support slight time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is easily received. It shifts to the difficult support slight time reduction mode after the big win game for the big win in the mode A, and shifts to the easy support slight time reduction mode after the big win game for the big win in the difficult support slight time reduction mode. In addition, mode A is shifted to mode A after a predetermined number of special games are completed in a short time mode, and mode E is a jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball to the second start port 315, and the lottery result is a jackpot. In that case, it shifts after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. The gaming machine 10 with 4 modes of special game states including such a difficult support slight time saving mode and an easy support slight time saving mode can fall from mode E to mode A, for example. It is preferable to construct ST or V-ST having an upper limit on the number of times a big winning lottery is performed based on the table.

<Third Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the special figure gaming state consists of 5 modes of mode A to mode E, and the case where the number of continuations of the probability variable jackpot has no upper limit has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the special game state is mode A, mode C and mode E, and the low probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 12 (A)) It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of jackpots from the first hit, which is a jackpot, continues up to a predetermined upper limit number. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a limit machine in which the special figure gaming state is configured as three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 28(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot classification table, FIG. 28(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 28(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, Figure 28 (D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in step S1609 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20, FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process performed by step S1308 of main processing.

The jackpot classification table shown in FIG. 28A defines the jackpot classification when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the jackpot types of this embodiment are three types of 2R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, and all jackpots are probability variable jackpots. However, when the number of jackpots from the first hit reaches the upper limit, the jackpot is treated as a normal jackpot, and after the jackpot game ends, a jackpot lottery based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12A). is forced to mode A in which

In addition, the jackpot in the first special game by winning the first start port 314 is distributed to either the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 2R probability variable jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot is 75:25. be. That is, in the jackpot in the first special game, there is no distribution of the 16R probability variable jackpot where acquisition of a large amount of game balls can be expected, and the distribution of the 2R probability variable jackpot where the expected value of the game balls to be acquired is small is large. Acquisition of a large number of game balls cannot be expected. On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special game by winning the prize to the second start port 315 is distributed to either the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot is 50:50. be. That is, in the jackpot in the second special game, there is no sorting of the 2R probability variable jackpot, and acquisition of a large amount of game balls can be expected.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C and mode E, but the contents of these modes A, mode C and mode E are the same as those of the first embodiment. Mode E, Mode C and Mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 28(C) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the player wins a jackpot equal to the number of jackpots set at the time of the first hit, and shifts to mode A after the final jackpot game ends. Until the jackpot equal to the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win is won, mode A is not entered unless the remaining number of jackpots stored in the RAM 412 is erased. In addition, except after the end of the final jackpot game, the mode is shifted to mode C after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the first special game by winning the first start port 314, and by winning the second start port 315. After the jackpot game for the jackpot in the second special game is completed, the mode is shifted to E.

FIG. 28D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, the winning to the second starting port 315 can not be expected as described above, and the first special figure game is executed by winning to the first starting port 314, so from mode A, an irregular case 100% mode C except for . In addition, since the mode A is shifted to after the final jackpot game is finished, the mode is not shifted to the mode A after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot in the mode A is finished.

In mode C, the first special symbol game by winning the first starting port 314 and the second special symbol game by winning the second starting port 315 are alternately executed by hitting to the left. Therefore, except after the end of the last jackpot game, in the case of a jackpot in the first special game, it shifts to mode C after the jackpot game is finished, and in the second special game by winning to the second start port 315 In the case of a jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode E after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in mode C, since the first special game and the second special game are alternately executed, except for irregular cases, the probability of shifting to mode C is 50%, and the probability of shifting to mode E becomes 50%.

In mode E, since the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, mode E shifts to mode E after the jackpot game ends.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a limit machine, the special figure variation start processing differs from the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 29, the special figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment is the special figure fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. Then, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is set to ON (step S1810), the game state transition processing is terminated. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment is the step S1805 for distributing the jackpot type in the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S1807). Between, instead of the lottery result flag setting process (step S1807), if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type flag and the special type that is the target of the jackpot lottery are set. It differs in that the flag is set (steps S2101 and S2102) and the step of monitoring the probability variable jackpot frequency (steps S2103 to S2107) is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since mode B and mode D which is a time saving mode limited to the number of times as a special figure gaming state are not included, in the special figure fluctuation start process of this embodiment, the special figure of the above-mentioned first embodiment Steps S2101 to S2107 in the fluctuation start process will be described below.

<Step S2101>
When the MPU 41 sorts the jackpot types (step S1805), it sets a jackpot type flag (step S2101). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets any one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON according to the jackpot type distributed in step S1805. In addition, in this step S2101, unlike the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. not.

<Step S2102>
MPU41 sets the special figure classification flag which specifies the special figure classification which is the object of big hit pulling out selection (step S2102). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the first special jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot jackpot lottery result is a jackpot in the first special game, and the jackpot jackpot lottery result in the second special game. is a jackpot, the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON.

<Steps S2103 to S2107>
In step S2103, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the remaining set number M is 0 with respect to the jackpot upper limit number (initial set number Mmax) set in the next step S2104. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current big win is the first win. When the remaining set number M is 0 (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial set number Mmax as the remaining set number M (step S2104), and shifts the process to step S1807. The initial number of sets Mmax is a predetermined number of sets, for example, in the range of 3 to 10 times.

On the other hand, when the remaining set number M is not 0 (step S2103: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the remaining set number M (step S2105), and determines whether the remaining set number M after subtraction is 0. (step S2106). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the final jackpot among the initially set jackpots. The MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON when the remaining set number M after subtraction is 0 (step S2106: Yes), that is, when this jackpot is the final jackpot of the initially set jackpots. (Step S2107), the process proceeds to step S1807. The jackpot limit flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot has been won a number of times corresponding to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104, that is, this jackpot is the final jackpot among the jackpots initially set. This jackpot limit flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to shift to mode A at step S2202 in the game state shift processing of FIG. In addition, when the remaining set number M after subtraction is not 0 (step S2106: No), that is, when the current jackpot is not the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S1807.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since mode B and mode D, which are time-saving modes limited to the number of special game states, are not included, in the game state transition processing of the present embodiment shown in FIG. In the game state transition process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, the step relating to the time saving mode is omitted, and the step of transitioning to mode B and mode D is omitted. In addition, in the game state transition processing of the present embodiment, when it is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot, it shifts to mode A, and a special figure type that performs a jackpot lottery that triggers the transition to the jackpot game state. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it shifts to mode C or mode E according to (steps S2201 to S2212). Steps S2201 to S2212 will be described below.

<Step S2201>
MPU41, when the jackpot game end flag is turned off when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), it is set to ON in step S2101 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. The jackpot type flag is set to OFF (step S2201). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to ON among the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF at the end of the jackpot game.

<Steps S2202 to S2205>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot limit flag, which is set to ON in step S2105 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 29, is set to ON (step S2202). That is, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is the final jackpot with respect to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot limit flag for shifting to is set to ON. When the jackpot limit flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to OFF (step S2203), shifts from the jackpot game state to mode A (step S2204), and mode The A flag is set to ON (step S2205), and the game state transition processing ends.

<Steps S2206 to S2209>
MPU41, the jackpot limit flag is set to OFF (step S2202: No), the first special figure jackpot flag set to ON in step S2102 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2206). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is for the first special figure game.

When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to OFF (step S2207), mode C of the special figure gaming state (step S2208), the mode C flag is set to ON (step S2209), and the game state transition processing ends. On the other hand, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2010.

<Steps S2210 to S2212>
When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON, so the second special figure jackpot flag is turned off. Along with setting (step S2210), to shift to mode E of the special game state (step S2211), to set the mode E flag to ON (step S2212), to end the game state transition processing.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has three modes, ie, mode A, mode C, and mode E, which have different advantages for the player in the special game state, and the number of jackpots from the first hit is set in advance. Continue up to the specified upper limit. And, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment differs in the mode transition destination depending on whether the jackpot is in the first special game or the jackpot in the second special game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in mode E in which the acquisition of a large number of game balls can be expected with the remaining number of sets after the first hit (initial number of sets Mmax-1), how many sets of jackpots remain. It is possible to provide the game machine 10 having a game property such as whether to shift to mode E or how many are allocated to the 16R jackpot game after shifting to mode E. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the first special game in mode A, 100% shift to mode C after the jackpot game ends, but in the case of a jackpot in the first special game in mode A It is also possible to shift to mode C at a certain rate, for example, 50%, and loop mode A at the remaining rate. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game feature in which mode A, which is disadvantageous for the player, may loop, and as a result, when shifting to mode C, a large number of sets can be obtained while leaving a large number of jackpots. Not only the game characteristics of whether to shift to mode E in which the acquisition of game balls can be expected, but also the game characteristics of how to shift to mode C in which the transition to mode E can be expected while leaving a large number of sets of jackpots. It is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to mode A, mode C' and mode E', which are high-probability modes with a high probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot and a time-saving mode limited to the number of times, are provided as special game states. 3 modes including In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is an ST machine that has a probability variable jackpot for all jackpot types and shifts to a limited time mode (mode C' or mode E') after the jackpot game ends.

The game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot classification table, FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 31(C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. 31D is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the game state transition processing procedure executed in step S1308 of the main processing of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special game due to the winning to the first starting port 314 is distributed to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and the winning to the second starting port 315 The jackpot in the second special game is distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, all jackpots are probability variation jackpots, and the jackpot types are distributed according to the special figure types. Of course, the number of types of jackpots and the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate for the allocation of jackpot types. It is also conceivable that it is distributed by the ratio of

As shown in FIG. 31(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot classification table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C' and mode E'. The content of mode A is the same as in the first embodiment described above. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are limited time-saving modes. That is, the mode C' and the mode E' are high-probability modes with a high probability that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, and time-saving modes with a limited number of times. Here, the upper limit of the number of times of time saving in mode C' and mode E' is set to the same extent as the upper limit of the number of times of time saving in mode B and mode D in the above-described first embodiment, for example, 50 times. Mode E', mode C' and mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 31(C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E', when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state, the mode shifts to mode A. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger is finished. When the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the mode is shifted to E' after the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot is finished. That is, after the end of the time-saving mode limited to the number of times, it falls from mode C 'or mode E 'to mode A, and in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot in the winning of the first start ports 314L and 314R, it is shifted to mode C ', and the second In the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot in the prize winning for the starting port 315, the mode is shifted to E'.

FIG. 31D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting to the left, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the first special game is 100% for the 2R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, mode A shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger is finished.

In mode C', the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. Also, as described above, 100% is distributed to the 2R probability variable jackpot in the first special pattern game, and 100% is distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special pattern game. Therefore, from mode C', when the lottery result becomes a big win before the time saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to either mode C' or mode E' after the big win game executed with the big win as a trigger. be. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in mode C', the mode is shifted from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, and the jackpot type distribution in the second special game is 100% for the 16R probability variable jackpot, so from mode E', the jackpot After the end of the big win game that is executed as a trigger, the mode is shifted to E'. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in mode E', the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in this embodiment, since it differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the jackpot type is two of the 2R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot, in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. Any one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the loss flag is set as the lottery result flag according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Further, in this embodiment, since the special figure gaming state is three modes of mode A, mode C' and mode E', in the game state transition processing of this embodiment shown in FIGS. The processing for mode transition is different from the game state transition processing (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2301 to S2308). Steps S2301 to S2308 will be described below.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301 shown in FIG. 32, MPU41, when the time-saving mode is completed and transitions from mode C' or mode E' to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the mode C' flag or mode Set the E' flag to off.

<Steps S2302 to S2305>
In step S2302 shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41, when the jackpot game end flag set to ON in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. When the flag is set to OFF (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot flag set in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big winning lottery that triggered the transition to the big winning gaming state is the 2R probability variable big winning.

MPU41, when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2302: Yes), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the shift to the jackpot game state is a 2R probability variable jackpot, The game state is shifted to mode C' (step S2303), and the mode C' flag is set to ON (step S2304). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2305), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S2306 to S2308>
MPU41, when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2302: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variable jackpot, The game state is shifted to mode E' (step S2306), and the mode E' flag is set to ON (step S2307). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF (step S2308), and terminates the game state transition process.

Thus, in this embodiment, it is necessary to go through mode C' in order to shift to mode E', which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to mode E', after shifting to mode C' at the first hit, it is necessary to make a big hit in the second special game before finishing the time saving mode. Since the first hit in mode A and the jackpot in the first special game in mode C' are 2R probability variable jackpots, the number of game balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game is small, and the mode A and mode C' are stayed. In the meantime, we cannot expect an increase in the number of game balls. On the other hand, in mode E' at the time of hitting to the right, since a 100% 16R probability variable jackpot is achieved, acquisition of a large amount of game balls can be expected in the jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, after shifting to mode C' after the first hit, how quickly to get a big hit in the second special game and shift to mode E' where a large amount of game balls can be expected. It is possible to provide a game machine which has game characteristics and furthermore, has game characteristics such as how many jackpots and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in the time-saving mode after shifting to mode E'.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the special figure gaming state is three modes of mode A, mode C' and mode E' as in the above-described fourth embodiment. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to a time-saving mode with a limited number of times after the end of the variable probability jackpot game on the condition that the game ball wins the V winning opening of the special variable winning device in a specific round of the probability variable jackpot game. It is a V-ST machine.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 34 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 35(B) and 35(D) are plan views showing the essential parts of the special variable winning device 82, and FIG. 36(A) is a jackpot classification table. Fig. 36B shows an example of a mode data table; Fig. 36C shows an example of a mode transition table; Fig. 36D shows an example of mode transition; 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in step S1307 of the main processing of FIG. A flow chart showing an example, FIGS. 40 and 41 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 34, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a special variable winning device 82 provided on the gaming board 31 . The special variable winning device 82 is provided below the variable winning opening 316b. As shown in FIGS. 35(A) to 35(D), the special variable winning device 82 includes an inlet 821 for introducing game balls 99 into the special variable winning device 82, and a closing opening for closing the inlet 821. A movable tongue portion 822 is provided to move back and forth with respect to the game board 31 by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31 between a position and an open position for opening the introduction port 821 . As shown in FIGS. 35(A) and 35(B), when the inlet 821 is closed by the movable tongue 822 due to the movable tongue 822 being in the standby position, the game ball 99 is a special variable winning device. It is not introduced inside 82. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(D), when the inlet 821 is opened by the movable tongue 822 being in the open position, the game ball 99 is placed inside the special variable winning device 82. can be introduced into Note that the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822 when the special variable prize winning port 39 is not operated. On the other hand, the introduction port 821 is opened by activating the movable tongue portion 822 in the later-described V winning round in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(E), inside the special variable winning device 82, a movable claw portion 823, a V winning opening 824 and a normal winning opening 825 are provided. The V winning port 824 and the normal winning port 825 are respectively provided with ball entry sensors (not shown), and these ball entry sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning port 824 or the normal winning port 825. be done. The movable claw portion 823 is rotated by a drive means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a left inclined position leading the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 and a right inclined position leading the game ball 99 to the normal winning opening 825. be done. In the state where the special variable winning opening 39 is not operated, the movable claw portion 823 is in a left inclined state and waits in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 . Then, the movable claw portion 823 shifts from the left tilted state to the right tilted state when it is detected that the game ball 99 has won the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round described later in which the special variable winning device 82 is operated. rotated. Further, when the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82 is completed, the movable claw portion 823 returns to the left inclined state and waits in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 .

As shown in FIG. 36(A) as a jackpot type distribution table, jackpots in the first special game by winning the first starting port 314 are distributed to 4R normal jackpots or 5R variable jackpots. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the 1st to 4th round games are executed as games in which game balls are awarded to the variable winning opening 316b, and the V winning round game in which the special variable winning device 82 wins game balls is not executed. . Therefore, in the 4R normal jackpot game, the game ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening 824, and the game does not shift to the time saving mode. On the other hand, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, for example, the 1st to 4th rounds are executed as a game in which a game ball is awarded to the variable winning opening 316b (see FIG. 4), and the 5th round game is a V prize. It is executed as a round game. Therefore, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, the player can enter the game ball 99 in the V winning port 824 of the special variable prize winning device 82 in the fifth round game, and shift to the time saving mode after the jackpot game ends. can. Further, by executing the fifth round game as the V winning round game, it is determined whether the fifth round game, which is the V winning round game, is executed after the fourth round game is completed. It is possible to know whether it is a definite variable jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by executing a promotion effect (including a failure effect) after the 4-round game is finished.

On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special game by winning the second start port 315 is distributed to the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot. In the 10R probability variable jackpot game and the 16R probability variable jackpot game, a specific round game is the V winning round game. There may be at least one specific round game, and there may be two or more. Also, when the jackpot types in mode E' are 10R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, for example, 10 rounds are a specific round game. By doing so, it is possible to know whether or not there are 11 rounds after executing the V winning round game, that is, whether the jackpot type is the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot after the V winning round game is completed. can be done. Therefore, after the 10-round game is executed or ended, the game can be made more interesting by, for example, executing a promotion performance from the 10R probability variable jackpot to the 16R probability variable jackpot. It should be noted that, regarding the distribution of the jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 36(B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot classification table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C' and mode E'. The content of mode A is the same as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, in mode A, since the first special game is executed by hitting left, the probability variation expectation is 50% when the lottery result is a big hit in mode A. Mode C' and mode E' are the same as mode C and mode E of the first embodiment described above, and are the same as the fourth embodiment described above, except that mode C' and mode E' are limited time-saving modes. . In addition, in mode C', since the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 by hitting left, the probability variation expectation when the lottery result becomes a big hit in mode C' 75%. In mode E', since the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, the probability variation expectation is 100% when the lottery result is a big hit in mode E'. As described above, in the present embodiment, there are three modes with different probability variation expectations, and mode E', mode C' and mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 36(C) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E', when the upper limit number of special game is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state, when the jackpot game ends when the lottery result is a 4R probability variable jackpot, and when the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot. When the jackpot game ends without the game ball 99 entering the V winning hole 824, the mode is shifted to mode A. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot, the mode shifts to mode C' after the jackpot game is finished on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V prize winning opening 824 in the V prize winning round game of the jackpot game. When the lottery result is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, the game shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game ends on the condition that the game ball 99 wins a prize in a V winning prize round game of the jackpot game.

FIG. 36D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot types in the first special game is 50% for 4R normal jackpots and 5R probability variable jackpots. 50%. Therefore, from the mode A, after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to the mode A at a rate of 50% and to the mode C' at a rate of 50%.

In mode C', the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. Also, as described above, in the first special game, it is distributed at a rate of 50% to the 4R normal jackpot and 50% to the 5R variable jackpot, and in the second special game, 25% to the 10R variable jackpot and 75% to the 16R variable jackpot. distributed at a ratio of Therefore, from the mode C', when the lottery result is a big win before the time saving mode ends, the mode shifts to any one of the mode A, the mode C' and the mode E' after the big win game ends. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode shifts from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E ', the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special game is 25% for the 10R probability variation jackpot and 75% for the 16R probability variation jackpot, so the mode From E', on the condition that the game ball 99 wins the V prize opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, the mode shifts to mode E' after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special symbols games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', and the game ball 99 wins the V prize opening 824 in the V prize round game of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game is finished without any player, the mode is shifted from the mode E' to the mode A.例文帳に追加

[Jackpot game control process]
Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are 4R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot and 16R probability variable jackpot, and are different from the above-described first embodiment, so the special figure fluctuation of FIG. In the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the start process, according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, 4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag and out flag as lottery result flags. is set. Then, in the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game ball can enter the variable winning port 316b or the special variable winning device 82 according to the jackpot type. A control for performing a jackpot game in which a round game is performed a plurality of times is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag, which is set to ON in step S2600 of the game state transition process in FIG. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that it is time to start a jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402, and when it is determined that it is not time to start a jackpot game (step S2401: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S2407.

<Steps S2402 to S2404>
When it is time to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 specifies the jackpot type (step S2402), and determines whether the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step S2403). The jackpot type is the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 flag) is set to ON.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (step S2403: Yes), according to the number of rounds of the probability variable jackpot, sets the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82 (step S2404 ), and the process proceeds to step S2405. For example, the MPU 41 sets 5 rounds as the V winning rounds in the case of the 5R high probability variable jackpot, and sets 10 rounds as the V winning rounds in the case of the 10R high probability variable jackpot and the 16R high probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (step S2403: No), the process proceeds to step S2405 without setting the V prize round for operating the special variable prize winning device .

<Steps S2405 and S2406>
In step S2405, the MPU 41 is based on the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable big hit flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. Then, the number of round games R to be executed in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game is set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round game number R to "4" when the 4R normal jackpot flag is on, sets the round game number R to "5" when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on, and sets the 10R probability variable The number of round games R is set to "10" when the jackpot flag is on, and the number of round games R is set to "16" when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is on, and is stored in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加As a result, the MPU 41 executes a round game of the round game number R corresponding to the jackpot type in the opening/closing execution mode control process of step S2416 described later. Then, MPU41 sets an opening flag to ON (step S2406), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game control processing. The opening flag is referred to in step S2407, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start timing the opening time.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag, which is set to ON in step S2406, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether opening has started. When the opening flag is set to ON (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2408, and when the opening flag is set to OFF (step S2407: No), the process proceeds to step S2415. Transition.

<Step S2408>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time is being measured (step S2408). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2410 when the opening time is being measured (step S2408: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2409 when the opening time is not being measured (step S2408: No).

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 starts timing the execution time of the opening, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time at which timing is started in step S2409 is referred to by the MPU 41 when it is determined in step S2410 to be described later whether to end the opening and shift to the opening/closing execution mode.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time for which clocking is started in step S2409 has reached a predetermined time necessary for execution of the opening. When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2411, and when the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2410: No), the jackpot game control process. exit.

<Steps S2411 to S2414>
When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 finishes measuring the opening time (step S2411) and sets the opening flag to OFF (step S2412). Next, the MPU 41 sets the open/close execution mode flag to ON (step S2413), and sets the 1 round start flag to ON (step S2214). The opening/closing execution mode flag is referred to when determining whether or not to shift to the opening/closing execution mode process in step S2415, which will be described later. Further, the first round start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the first round of the opening/closing execution mode in step S2501 of the opening/closing execution mode processing in FIG. 38, which will be described later.

<Step S2415>
In step S2415, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag, which is set to ON in step S2413, is set to ON. When the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to ON (step S2415: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2416, and when the opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2415: No), the process proceeds to step S2416. to step S2417.

<Step S2416>
In step S2416, the MPU 41 executes opening/closing execution mode control processing. In the opening/closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. The details of the opening/closing execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

<Step S2417>
In step S2417, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag, which is set to ON in step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 to be described later, is set to ON. MPU41, when the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2418, when the ending flag is set to OFF (step S2417: No), the jackpot game control process exit.

<Step S2418>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time is being measured (step S2418). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2420 when the ending time is being measured (step S2418: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2419 when the ending time is not being measured (step S2418: No).

<Step S2419>
In step S2419, the MPU 41 starts counting the ending time after starting the ending, and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time clocked in step S2419 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the ending (jackpot game) is to be ended in step S2420, which will be described later.

<Step S2420>
In step S2420, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time for which the clocking is started in step S2419 has reached a predetermined time necessary for execution of the ending. When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2421, and when the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2420: No), the jackpot game control process. exit.

<Steps S2421 to S2423>
When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 turns off the ending flag that is set to on at step S2524 in the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 (step S2421). ). Furthermore, the MPU 41 finishes timing the ending time (step S2422), sets the jackpot game end flag to ON (step S2423), and finishes the jackpot game control process. Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. In addition, the jackpot game end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1914 in the game state transition process of FIG. , the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to any one of mode A, mode C' and mode E'.

[Opening/closing execution mode control process]
In the open/close execution mode control process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type as described above.

<Steps S2501 and S2502>
In step S2501, MPU41 judges whether the 1 round start flag set to ON by step S2414 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to start the opening/closing execution mode (whether to start the first round in the round game). When the 1st round start flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 1st round start flag to OFF (step S2502), and then shifts the process to step S2506. On the other hand, when the 1st round start flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2503.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening open flag, which is set to ON in step S2510 of the opening/closing execution mode control process, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316b of the variable winning device 316 is open. If the variable winning opening open flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2511 in FIG. : No), the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device operation flag, which is set to ON in step S2508 of the opening/closing execution mode control process, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is in operation. If the special variable winning device operation flag is set to ON (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2514 in FIG. S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2505.

<Step S2505>
When the variable winning opening open flag is set to OFF (step S2503: No) and the special variable winning device operation flag is set to OFF (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 starts timing in step S2522 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the interval time to be set has exceeded a predetermined time (step S2505). Here, the interval time is the pause time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game. That is, in this step S2505, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to end the interval and start the round game. If the MPU 41 determines that the interval time has exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2506, and if it determines that the interval time has not exceeded the predetermined time (step S2505: No), the interval , the open/close execution mode control process is ended.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
When the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the round game to be started is the V winning round set in step S2404 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 ( step S2506). When the MPU 41 determines that it is the V winning round (step S2506: Yes), it operates the special variable winning device 82 (step S2507). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable tongue portion 822 of the special variable winning device 82 from the standby position for closing the inlet 821 to the open position for opening the inlet 821 . Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to ON (step S2508), and terminates the opening/closing execution mode control process. It should be noted that the special variable winning device operation flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is operating in step S2504 described above.

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
If the round game scheduled to start is not the V winning round (step S2506: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game scheduled to start is a round game that opens the variable winning opening 316b. 316c is operated to open the variable winning opening 316b (step S2509). Further, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening open flag to ON (step S2510), and terminates the opening/closing execution mode control process. The variable winning opening open flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the variable winning device 316 is operating (whether or not the variable winning opening 316b is open) in step S2503 described above.

<Step S2511>
When the variable winning opening open flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), in step S2511 of FIG. 39, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is established. . Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning opening 316b was opened, or whether the number of game balls winning the variable winning opening 316b has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9). determine whether or not If the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S2512, and if the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are not satisfied (Step S2511: No), the open/close execution mode control process is terminated in order to maintain the open state of the variable winning opening 316b.

<Steps S2512 and S2513>
When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is established (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316b by restoring the opening/closing door 316c (step S2512), and furthermore, closes the variable winning opening. The open flag is set to off (step S2513).

<Steps S2514 to S2516>
If the special variable winning device operation flag is set to ON (step S2504 in FIG. 38: Yes), in step S2514, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won the V winning port 824 of the special variable winning device 82. to judge. Whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 824 is determined based on the detection result of a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 824 . In the special variable winning device 82, since the variable claw portion 393 is tilted to the left at the start of operation, the game ball first introduced into the special variable winning device 82 is the variable claw portion 393 tilted to the left. It is guided to the V winning opening 824 by. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: Yes), it sets the V winning flag to ON (step S2515), and tilts the variable claw portion 393 of the special variable winning device 82 to the left. It is rotated from the state to the right tilted state (step S2516). That is, when the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 is confirmed, the MPU 41 guides the game ball introduced into the special variable winning device 82 to the normal winning opening 825 by the right-inclined variable claw portion 393. .

<Step S2517>
When the game ball has not won the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: No), or when the game ball has won the V winning opening 824, the V winning flag is set to ON and the movable claw part 823 is tilted to the right. When the state is activated (step S2514: Yes and steps S2515 and S2516), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the conditions for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 are satisfied (step S2517). Specifically, the MPU 41 waits for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is started (after the introduction port 821 is opened by the operation of the movable tongue 822 being started). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls introduced into the special variable prize winning device 82 (the total number of game balls winning in the V prize opening 824 and the normal prize winning opening 825) has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9). . When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is established (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2518, and determines the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82. is not established (step S2517: No), the opening/closing execution mode control process is terminated in order to continue the operation of the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2518 to S2520>
When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the operation of the special variable winning device 82 (step S2518). Specifically, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821 by returning the movable tongue portion 822, returns the movable claw portion 823 to the left inclined state, and when the next special variable winning device 82 starts operating, the game The ball is guided to the V winning opening 824. - 特許庁Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to OFF (step S2519), and shifts the process to step S2520.

<Steps S2520 and S2521>
When the variable winning opening open flag is set to OFF (step S2513), or when the special variable winning device operation flag is set to OFF (step S2519), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round game number R stored in the RAM 412. After that (step S2520), it is determined whether or not the number R of round games after subtraction is "0" (step S2521). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the previously finished round game is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. When the number R of round games after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2523, and when the number R of round games after subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No ), and the process proceeds to step S2522.

<Step S2522>
When the round game number R after the subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No), the MPU 41 starts measuring the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S2522), and performs the opening/closing execution mode control process. exit. The interval time at which timing is started in step S2522 is referred to by MPU 41 in step S2505 of FIG.

<Steps S2523 and S2524>
When the round game number R after the subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game ended earlier is the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode flag is set to OFF to end the mode (step S2523), and the ending flag is set to ON (step S2524), thereby ending the opening/closing execution mode control process. This ending flag is referenced by the MPU 41 in step S2417 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 in order to determine whether to start the ending.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in this embodiment, since the jackpot type is two of 2R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. Any one of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, and the out flag is set as the result flag. In addition, in this embodiment, the flowchart regarding the procedure of special figure fluctuation|variation start processing is abbreviate|omitted. Also, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, after the big win game state flag is set to ON in step S1906, the big win game start flag is set to ON (step S2600 in FIG. 40). The jackpot game start flag indicates that a jackpot game is started, and is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2401 of the jackpot game control process shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the special figure gaming state is mode A, mode C 'and mode E 'three modes, in the game state transition processing of this embodiment shown in FIGS. The processing for mode transition is different from the game state transition processing (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2601 to S2610). Steps S2601 to S2610 will be described below.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601 shown in FIG. 40, MPU41, when the time-saving mode is completed and transitions from mode C' or mode E' to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the mode C' flag or mode Set the E' flag to off.

<Steps S2602 to S2604>
In step S2602 shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41, when ending the jackpot game (step S1914: Yes and steps S1915 and S1917), the V winning flag set to ON in step S2515 of the opening/closing execution mode control process of FIG. is set to ON (step S2602). When the V winning flag is not set to ON (step S2602: No), the MPU 41 shifts to mode A of the special figure gaming state (step S2603), and further sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2604 ), and the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, in the case of the 4R normal jackpot, or when there is no winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round in the probability variable jackpot game, the MPU 41 is neither the time saving mode nor the high probability mode after the jackpot game is finished. move to

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
MPU41, when the V winning flag is on (step S2602: Yes), the 5R probability variable jackpot flag set to on by the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2605). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big winning lottery that triggered the transition to the big winning gaming state is the 5R probability variable big winning. MPU41, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2605: Yes), to shift to mode C 'of the special figure gaming state (step S2606), further set the mode C 'flag to ON (Step S2607), the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot and there is a game ball winning to the V prize opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 switches to the time-saving mode and high probability after the jackpot game ends. The mode is shifted to mode C'.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the V winning flag is on and the 5R probability variation big hit flag is off (step S2602: Yes and step S2605: No), the MPU 41 turns on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. Since it can be determined that one of the 10R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable jackpot flag set to is set to ON, it is made to shift from the jackpot game state to the mode E 'of the special figure game state (step S2608), Furthermore, the mode E' flag is set to ON (step S2609), and the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, and there is a winning of a game ball to the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shortens the time after the end of the jackpot game. mode and high-probability mode, mode E'.

<Step S2610>
MPU41 is a jackpot type flag that is set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. The flag is set to OFF (step S2610), and the game state transition processing ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, in order to shift to the most advantageous mode E 'for the player, after shifting to the mode C 'distributed with a probability of 50% in the first hit, the time saving mode in the mode C ' It is necessary to obtain a big win in the second special pattern game distributed by the distribution device 35 with a probability of 50% before the game ends. That is, in this embodiment, except when the mode falls due to the end of the time saving mode, the probability of the probability variable jackpot is 50% in mode A, 75% in mode C', and 100% in mode E'. It is possible to provide a game machine having a probability variable ratio.

In the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 82 having the V winning opening 824 is provided separately from the variable winning device 316, but the V winning opening 824 that can be opened and closed is provided in the variable winning device 316, The V winning opening 824 may be opened in the V winning round of the game.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the special figure gaming state is three modes of mode A, mode C' and mode E' as in the above-described second embodiment. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a 1 type 2 type mixing machine that performs a 1 type game that is a special game by the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 and a 2 type game by the feather accessory device is.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50, focusing on differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 42 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 43 and 44 are cross-sectional views showing main parts of the feather accessory device 83 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. Fig. 45(A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot correctness table, Fig. 45(B) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table at the time of a 1st kind jackpot, Fig. 45(C) is a diagram at the time of a 2nd kind jackpot A diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 45(D) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 45(E) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46, and FIG. 48 is a special figure game control process of FIG. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42 , the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a feather accessory device 83 provided on the gaming board 31 . The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the pattern display section 341 . As shown in FIG. 43, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (solid line position in FIG. 43) for closing the introduction port 831. ) and an open position (position indicated by a phantom line in FIG. 43) for opening the introduction port 831 by a drive means such as a solenoid (not shown). The game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83 when the inlet 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 because the movable wing portion 832 is at the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44(A) and 44(B), when the inlet 831 is opened by the movable feather 832 being in the open position, the game ball can be received by the movable feather 832. is. A game ball received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 through the inlet 831 . The movable feather portion 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result of the big win lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 315 is a small win (see FIG. 45(A)), and the introduction port 831 is opened for a predetermined time. , for example, it is opened only for a time (about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds) for 1 to 3 game balls to enter the feather accessory device 83 . Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of the small win may be appropriately set, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834 and a V winning opening opening/closing section 835 are provided. The V winning port 833 and the normal winning port 834 are respectively provided with ball entry sensors (not shown), and these ball entry sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning port 833 or the normal winning port 834. be done. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 operates a solenoid ( not shown) or the like. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is normally on standby at the closed position to close the V winning opening 833, and for example, when the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a small winning, the movable feather 832 is operated to the open position. Synchronizing with the timing, when the feather accessory device 83 is operated for a predetermined time shorter than the operation time of the movable feather part 832, for example, in the E mode, the same number of times as the number of times of time saving, the V winning opening 824 has a probability of 50% to 80%. The V prize opening 833 is opened only during the time when the game ball wins.

As shown in FIG. 45(A) as a jackpot right/wrong table, the jackpot right/wrong table of this embodiment is not classified into a high probability mode and a low probability mode as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45(A)). 12 (A) and FIG. 12 (B)), classified into the first special symbol game by winning the first start port 314 and the second special symbol game by winning the second start port 315. In the first special pattern game, 0 to 2 of the counter value (random number) of the 0 to 738 jackpot random number counter is a jackpot, and the remaining 736 pieces of 3 to 738 are out, and the first special The jackpot probability in the figure game is 3/739 (=approximately 1/246.3) as in the low probability mode in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the second special game, as in the first special game, three counter values (random numbers) of 0 to 2 out of the counter values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter of 0 to 738 are jackpots. There is a jackpot probability of 3/739 (=about 1/246.3). That is, regardless of the first special game and the second special game, the big win in the big win lottery becomes the big win in the first game. Also, 723 pieces from 3 to 735 are small hits, and 3 pieces from 736 to 738 are out. Here, a small win is a win for executing a two-game game in which the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Then, when the wing accessory device 83 is activated by the small win and the game ball wins the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83, it becomes a big win in the second game. That is, in the 2nd special game, the big hit in the 2nd game is the main, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the 1st game is low as in the 2nd special game. Hereinafter, the jackpot in the first game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is "first jackpot", and the jackpot due to the game ball entering the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is "second jackpot". is sometimes called.

As shown in FIG. 45(B) as a jackpot type distribution table, the 1 type jackpot is distributed to the 4R short-time jackpot or the 8R short-time jackpot. Also, as shown in the jackpot type distribution table in FIG. 45(C), the two types of jackpots are distributed to the 4R short-time jackpot, 8R short-time jackpot, or 16R short-time jackpot. Here, the number of time reductions in each time reduction jackpot is set according to the lottery probability in the jackpot lottery, the small winning probability, the operating time of the feather accessory device 83 at the time of the small winning, the operating time of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835, etc. , and in the present embodiment, for example, 50 times. In addition, in this embodiment, all the jackpots are time-saving jackpots for both the first type jackpot and the two-type jackpot, but the jackpot types are sorted so that they become non-time-saving jackpots at a certain rate (for example, 20% to 50%). may In this case, the probability that the game ball wins in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the time the time saving mode ends in mode E′ is right-handed without special hitting such as stop hitting or twisting. , the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 may be operated so as to achieve 90% or more, preferably substantially 100%. In addition, in mode E', the probability that the game ball wins in the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the time the time saving mode ends is substantially 100%, and the upper limit is set for the number of big wins from the first win. may That is, the gaming machine 10 as a one-kind-two-mixer machine according to the present embodiment may combine the specs of the limit machine according to the above-described third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 45(D), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot classification table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C' and mode E'. The contents of Mode A, Mode C' and Mode E' are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, and Mode E', Mode C' and Mode A are advantageous game states for the player in that order.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 45(E) prescribes the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In mode C' and mode E' which are time saving modes, the mode is shifted to mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to the mode C' after the jackpot game is finished, and in the case of the type 2 jackpot, the mode is shifted to the mode E' after the jackpot game is finished.

Here, in mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special game is executed by hitting to the left, and the jackpot in the first special game is a one-type jackpot, so from mode A After the jackpot game ends, the mode is shifted to C'.

In mode C', the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are alternately executed by hitting left. That is, in mode C', the first special game with 100% jackpot of the first kind and the second special game with the main jackpot of the second kind are alternately executed. Therefore, from mode C ', on the condition that the time saving mode does not end, the mode C 'with a probability of approximately 50% after the end of the jackpot game (probability slightly exceeding 50%). (more precisely, the probability is slightly less than 50%). In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in mode C', the mode shifts from mode C' to mode A.

In mode E', the second special game is executed by hitting to the right, the main type 2 jackpot, and the type 1 jackpot with a low probability (approximately 1/246.3 in this embodiment). Therefore, from mode E', after the jackpot game is over, the mode generally shifts to mode E' and falls to mode C' with a low probability. In addition, as described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in mode E', the mode shifts from mode E' to mode A. Also, in the case of a big hit in mode E', mode E' may be looped without falling to mode C'.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a jackpot success/failure table different from that of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 45(A)), and is capable of executing two types of games in which the feather accessory device 83 is operated. , Part of the main processing is different from the above-described first embodiment, and the special figure variation start processing and the game state transition processing in the special figure game control processing executed as the main processing are different.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the main process of this embodiment, between the special figure game control process of step S1306 and the jackpot game control process of step S1307, the feather accessory device control process is executed (step S2701). Details of the feather accessory device control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Feather accessory device control process]
<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the feather role device control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special figure fluctuation stop flag set to ON in step S1606 of the special figure game control process in FIG. 20 is set to ON. is determined (step S2801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to execute the second game because the special game has ended. MPU41, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2802, it is determined that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to OFF If so (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2802>
When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the feather accessory device operation set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 48 described later It is determined whether the flag is set to ON (step S2802). When the MPU 41 determines that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), it can be determined that it is time to operate the feather accessory device 83, so the process proceeds to step S2803. . On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), it can be determined that it is not time to operate the feather accessory device 83, so the feather accessory device control process exit.

<Steps S2803 to S2808>
When the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to OFF (step S2803), and the movable feather portion of the feather accessory device 83 The operation of 832 is started (step S2804), and the movable blade portion operating flag is set to ON (step S2805). As a result, in the wing accessory device 83 , the introduction port 831 is opened, and the game ball can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 by the movable wing portion 832 . Next, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 (step S2806), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing section operating flag to ON (step S2807). As a result, the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball introduced into the wing accessory device 83 through the introduction port 831 can win the V winning opening 833 . Furthermore, the MPU 41 starts measuring the operating time (step S2808). The timing in step S2808 is used to determine whether or not it is time to return the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 to the standby state in step S2810 to be described later to close the V winning opening 833, or in step S2814. This is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not it is time to return the movable vane 832 and close the introduction port 831 .

<Step S2809>
MPU41, if the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), that is, if it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, the V winning opening opening and closing unit that is set to ON in step S2807 It is determined whether or not the operating flag is set to ON (step S2809). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2810, and when the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to OFF. (Step S2809: No), the process proceeds to step S2815.

<Step S2810>
When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the clocking time at which clocking is started in step S2808 is within a predetermined first predetermined time. is determined (step S2810). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to return the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 to the standby position and close the V winning opening 833 . If the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2813, and if it determines that the measured time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), it determines whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 (step S2811). Whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 is determined by whether or not the game ball has been detected by a ball entering sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 833, for example. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: Yes), it sets the type 2 jackpot flag to ON (step S2812), and terminates the feather accessory device control process. Here, the two-type jackpot flag indicates whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on the winning of the game ball to the V winning prize port 833, and the jackpot game state is executed in step S3005 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 49 described later. is referred by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not to shift to . On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the V winning hole 833 (step S2811: No), it ends the feather accessory device control process without setting the second type jackpot flag to ON.

<Steps S2813 and S2814>
When the MPU 41 determines that the clocked time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), that is, when it determines that it is time to close the V winning opening 833, the MPU 41 moves the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 to the standby position. (step S2813), set the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating flag to OFF (step S2814), and terminate the feather accessory device control process.

<Step S2815>
When the V winning opening opening/closing section operating flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), the MPU 41 checks whether the movable feather section operating flag set to ON in step S2805 is set to ON. It judges (step S2815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2816 when the movable wing portion in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes), and when the movable wing portion in-operation flag is set to OFF (step S2815: No), the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Step S2816>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the clocked time for starting clocking in step S2808 has reached a predetermined second predetermined time when the movable wing portion in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes). (Step S2816). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to return the movable blade portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831 . When the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2817, and when it determines that the measured time has not reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: No), in order to maintain the open state of the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83, the wing accessory device control process is terminated.

<Steps S2817 to S2820>
When the counted time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing portion 832 to the standby position, closes the introduction port 831 (step S2817), and sets the movable wing portion operating flag. is turned off (step S2818). As a result, the second type game is ended when the lottery result in the big winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 is a small winning. Furthermore, the MPU 41 ends the timing of the operation time of the wing accessory device 83 started in step S2808 (step S2819), sets the wing accessory device operation end flag to ON (step S2820), Terminate the physical device control process. The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that the operation of the feather accessory device 83 has ended, that is, the two-type game has ended. After the end of the game, the MPU 41 refers to it to determine whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a one-type two-type mixing machine, the special figure fluctuation start processing is different from the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. have a point. As shown in FIG. 48, the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment differs from the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above until the lottery result flag is set. (Steps S2901 to S2908). Also, in the present embodiment, as a lottery result other than the big hit lottery in the big hit lottery in the second special game, there is a small hit in addition to the off, so in the special figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned first Steps S1811 and S1817 (see FIG. 22) related to the deviation in the special figure fluctuation start processing of the embodiment are considered to be small hits (steps S2909 and S2910). Steps S2901 to S2910 will be described below.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
In the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment, first, when starting the fluctuation of the special figure, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S2901). When the MPU 41 determines to start the first special figure game (step S2901: Yes), the first special figure big hit success/failure table (see FIG. 45(A)) performs the success/failure determination (step S2902), and the process is performed. The process moves to step S2904. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines not to start the first special symbol game (step S2901: No), that is, when it determines to start the second special symbol game, the second special symbol jackpot success or failure table (FIG. 45 (A) (see step S2903), and the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. If the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2905, and if the lottery result is not a jackpot (step S2904: No), that is, if the lottery result is a small hit or a loss, The process moves to step S2906.

<Step S2905>
When the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 distributes the jackpot type based on the special figure jackpot table (see FIG. 45(B)) (step S2905), and shifts the process to step S2908. . Specifically, the MPU 41 distributes the jackpot type to either the 4R short-time jackpot or the 8R short-time jackpot according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter.

<Steps S2906 and S2907>
When the lottery result is not a big win (step S2904: No), that is, when the lottery result is a small win or a loss, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a small win (step S2906). When the lottery result is a small hit (step S2906: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to ON (step S2907), and shifts the process to step S2908. The feather accessory device operation flag is a flag for operating the feather accessory device 83, and in step S2802 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to operate the feather accessory device 83. is referred to by the MPU 41 for this purpose. On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit (step S2906: No), that is, when the lottery result is out, the process proceeds to step S2908 without setting the feather accessory device operation flag to ON.

<Step S2908>
When the MPU 41 executes processing according to the lottery result (steps S2904 to S2907), it sets the lottery result flag to ON. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 4R short time jackpot or the 8R short time jackpot, and sets the small win flag to ON when the jackpot lottery is a small win. , set the out flag to on if it is out.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
When the lottery result flag is set to ON (step S2908), the MPU 41 performs the predetermined processing (steps S1807 to S1811) in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then the out flag set to ON in step S2908. Or it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2809). MPU41, when the off flag or the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2909: Yes), sets the off flag or the small hit flag to off (step S2810), and shifts the process to step S1815. On the other hand, when the off flag or the small hit flag is set to OFF (step S2909: No), the process proceeds to step S1818. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1815 to S1818 of the special figure variation start processing (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the special figure variation start processing ends.

[Game state transition processing]
Since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probability variable machine, in the game state transition process of the first embodiment described above, at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the type 1 game ), it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode ends, and after the time-saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to mode A (see steps S1909 to S1913 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, the operation of the feather accessory device is performed not only at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the 1 type game) At the end (at the end of the second game), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode ends, and after the time saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to mode A (steps S3001 and S3002 in FIG. 49). It is different from the game state transition processing of the embodiment. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the special game jackpot (1 type jackpot) is used as a trigger to shift to the jackpot game state, but in this embodiment, not only the 1st jackpot, but also the feather accessory device It is different from the first embodiment described above in that it shifts to a jackpot game state by a second jackpot based on the winning of a game ball into the V prize opening 833 of 83 (steps S3003 to S3005 in FIG. 49). Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the transition destination of the mode was determined according to the jackpot type (see steps S1914 to S1932 in FIG. 13 (A) and FIG. 23), but in this embodiment, one type It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the mode transition destination is determined depending on whether it is a jackpot or a double jackpot (FIG. 45(E), steps S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50). Steps S3001 to S3012 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG.

<Step S3001>
In step S3001 shown in FIG. 49, MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1900: Yes and step S1901), the special figure of FIG. It is determined whether or not the one-type jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S2908 of the figure fluctuation start process, is set to ON (step S3001). The type 1 jackpot flag indicates that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The MPU 41, when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), executes processing to shift to the jackpot game state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002 when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small win or a loss.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the feather accessory device operation flag, which is set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 48, is set to ON. The feather accessory device operation flag indicates that the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a small hit, that is, the feather accessory device 83 is to be operated. When the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to shift the game state because it is necessary to operate the feather accessory device 83. The game state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 executes processing as to whether to shift to any of mode A, mode C', or mode E'. (Steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Steps S3003 to S3004>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), the MPU 41 turns on the feather accessory device operation end flag set to on in step S2820 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. is set (step S3003). The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates the timing to terminate the operation of the feather accessory device 83, that is, the timing to return the movable feather portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. be. When the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to OFF (step S3004), and shifts the process to step S3005. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the process proceeds to step S1914 in FIG.

<Step S3005>
When it is time to end the operation of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3003: Yes and step S3004), the MPU 41 sets the two types of jackpot flags to be turned on in step S2812 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S3005). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state after the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is completed. MPU41, when it is determined that the 2 types of jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3005: Yes), when the 1 type of per flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the jackpot gaming state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the two-type jackpot flag is set to off (step S3005: No), similarly to when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off (step S3002: No) , mode A, mode C' or mode E' (steps S1908-S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006-S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Step S3006>
In step S3006 shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game state when the jackpot game end flag set to ON in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to ON. When the process is executed (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the 1 type jackpot flag set to ON in step S2908 of the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG. 48 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game is any of mode C' and mode E' of the special figure gaming states. MPU41 transfers a process to step S3007, when the 1st kind jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes). On the other hand, when the type 1 jackpot flag is not set to ON (step S3002: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
MPU41, when the 1 type jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), to shift to mode C 'of the special figure gaming state (step S3007), further sets the mode C 'flag to ON (Step S3008). That is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 is in the short-time mode and the high-probability mode after the jackpot game ends, and alternately switches to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315. The mode is shifted to mode C' in which a game ball can enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to OFF (step S3009), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
MPU41, when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3006: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to ON, the mode E 'of the special figure game state is shifted to ( Step S3010), and the mode E' flag is set to ON (step S3011). That is, the MPU 41 is in the time-saving mode and the high-probability mode after the end of the jackpot game in the case of a two-type jackpot by winning the game ball into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, and is supported by the electric support member 36. The game ball is shifted to a mode E' in which the second starting port 315 is likely to win. Then, the MPU 41 sets the second jackpot flag to OFF (step S3012), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3013>
In addition, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode C' after the jackpot game ends, and the mode C' flag is set to ON (steps S3007 and S3008), and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, mode E' after the jackpot game ends. Since the mode E' flag is set to ON (steps S3010 and S3011), when the mode is shifted to mode A due to the end of the time saving mode (steps S1908 to S1910 in FIG. 49), ON in step S3008 , or the mode E' flag, which is set to ON in step S3010, is set to OFF.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special game state, from mode A to mode C', from mode C' to mode A, mode C' and mode E', from mode E' Transition to either mode A or mode E'. That is, after the first hit in mode A, before falling to mode A due to the end of time saving, how to continue the time saving mode with one type of jackpot or two types of jackpots in mode 'C and mode E', which are time saving modes. It has gameplay. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 which is a one-type/two-type mixed machine but has game characteristics similar to those of an ST machine. Also, in mode C', the first special game and the second special game can be alternately executed by hitting to the left, while in mode E', the second special game is basically executed by hitting to the right. At the same time, compared to the probability of becoming a 1st kind of jackpot in the 1st special game and the 2nd special game, the degree of expectation of becoming a 2nd kind of jackpot due to the operation of the feather accessory device due to the small hit in the 2nd special game is high. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in mode E', compared to mode C', the possibility of falling to mode A due to the end of the time saving mode is low, and as a result, the expectation of a big win and the player are advantageous. Since the mode C' and the mode E' continue to have two types of modes with different expectations, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Seventh to Twelfth Embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38 that is alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by the game balls. The gaming machine 10 having the sorting device 35 has been described. On the other hand, the seventh to twelfth embodiments differ from the first embodiment in the configuration of the sorting section of the sorting device. The seventh to twelfth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. FIG.

<Seventh embodiment>
The sorting device of this embodiment is common to the above-described first embodiment in that it includes a sorting unit that alternately rotates clockwise and counterclockwise, but the sorting unit is a solenoid or the like. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise by driving means (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the sorting device 35A of the present embodiment includes a sorting member 38A (sorting portion) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. . The distribution member 38A is formed in a claw shape, and is rotated by a drive means (not shown) between a right tilted position shown in FIG. 51(A) and a left tilted position shown in FIG. 51(B). dynamically driven. When the distribution member 38A is located at the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51A, the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is guided to the first passage 351 by the distribution member 38A. As a result, the game ball 99 enters the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38A is positioned at the left inclined position shown in FIG. Induced. Thereby, the game ball 99 wins the second start opening 315 when receiving the support of the electric support member 36, and wins the right first starting opening 314R when not receiving the support of the electric support member 36. - 特許庁In addition, in the distribution device 35A of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the game ball from being hit so that the game ball enters the second passage 352, the distribution device 35A is made opaque, for example. It is preferable to make the distribution member 38A invisible from the outside.

Also, the distribution member 38A may be driven by the driving means so as to rotate alternately between the left tilted position and the right tilted position every predetermined time (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Conceivable. Of course, the distribution member 38A does not necessarily need to be rotated in a constant cycle, and may be driven to perform patterned and irregular rotation, and may be rotated in a plurality of different rotation patterns for a constant period of time or indefinitely. It may be operated by changing every hour. For example, the rotation pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the first passage 351 and the rotation pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the second passage 352 may be changed at fixed or irregular intervals. As a rotation pattern in which the ball is likely to enter the first passage 351, a pattern in which the distribution member 38A stops at the right tilted position longer than the left tilted position, and a pattern in which the distribution member 38A stops at the right tilted position to the left A pattern in which the speed (time) of turning to the tilted position is slower (longer) than the speed (time) of turning from the left tilted position to the right tilted position is conceivable. When a plurality of rotation patterns are used together, the distribution member 38A is rotationally driven so that the game balls 99 are finally distributed to the first path 351 and the second path 352 with a theoretical value of 1:1. is preferred. However, the distribution member 38A may be rotationally driven so that the theoretical game ball distribution ratio between the first path 351 and the second path 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, compared to mode B, mode C can be configured so that game balls are more likely to be guided to the second path 352, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by this ball entry sensor, distribution is performed when the distribution member 38A is at the left inclined position. It is conceivable to rotate the member 38A to the right tilt position while rotating the distribution member 38A to the left tilt position when the distribution member 38A is at the right tilt position.

Thus, in this embodiment, since the distribution member 38A is rotated at a predetermined timing by the drive means, the ratio of distribution of the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is temporarily can be accidentally or intentionally biased. Thereby, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 is guided to either the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, that is, the game ball 99 is supported by the electric support member 36 Since the player can enjoy the game while being happy and sad about whether or not he/she wins at the second starting port 315, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Eighth embodiment>
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the distribution portion is rotated between the right tilt position and the left tilt position by driving means such as a solenoid. This is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Further, the game machine according to this embodiment differs from the game machine according to the above-described seventh embodiment in the shape of the distribution section.

As shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B) , the sorting device 35B of the present embodiment includes a sorting member 38B (sorting portion) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. . The distributing member 38B is formed in a substantially T-shape or anchor shape having an arc portion 382B and a shaft portion 383B, and has a right tilt position shown in FIG. 52(A) and a left tilt position shown in FIG. It is rotationally driven between positions by a driving means (not shown). Note that the distribution member 38B of the present embodiment differs from the distribution member 38A of the above-described seventh embodiment only in shape, and is otherwise similar to the distribution member 38A of the above-described seventh embodiment. It has the same function and effect as the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. Moreover, the distribution member 38B of this embodiment can be changed in design similarly to the distribution member 38A of the above-described seventh embodiment.

Furthermore, the shape and the like of the distributing portion that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by being rotated by the driving means are similar to those of the distributing member 38A of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. It is not limited to the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment shown in 52, and various design changes are possible. For example, it may have the same or similar shape as the distribution member 38 of the first embodiment described above, and in the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment, a flat plate portion or a bent portion is provided instead of the arc portion 382B. It may be a configuration.

<Ninth and Tenth Embodiments>
The sorting device 35 of the ninth and tenth embodiments, as a sorting unit, rotates the game ball 99 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by interfering with the game ball 99 to move the game ball 99 to the first passage 351. or the second passage 352 in that a rotating body is provided.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the sorting portion of the sorting device 35C is a cylindrical shape that can freely rotate in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. It is configured as a roller 38</b>C (rotating body) and arranged directly below the introduction port 350 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53(B), in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the sorting unit of the sorting device 35D is a windmill that can rotate freely in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. 38D and located directly below the inlet 350. As shown in FIG. The windmill 38D has a rotating body 382D fixed by a nail 381D (fixing part) so as to be freely rotatable. The nail 381D has an end driven into the game board 31, the end being a fixed end, and the end opposite to the end being a free end. Also, the nail 381D is made of metal, for example, and is plastically deformable. Therefore, since the nail 381D of the windmill 38D is plastically changeable, when the position of the nail 381D deviates from the initial set position, and in turn the position of the rotating body 382D deviates from the initial set position, the nail 381D is moved to the initial set position. It is possible to return to This makes it possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 381D.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth and tenth embodiments, the game balls 99 interfere with each other, so that rotating bodies such as the roller 38C and the windmill 38D that freely rotate clockwise or counterclockwise are distributed. Since it is adopted as a part, the ratio of the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment and eighth embodiment, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 moves from the first passage 351 and the second Since it is possible to enjoy the game while wondering whether the game ball 99 will be guided to the second path 352, that is, whether the game ball 99 will enter the second start hole 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. Interest can be improved. In addition, when the distribution section is a rotating body such as the roller 38C or the windmill 38D, the player can easily determine the tendency of the rotating body as the distribution section to distribute the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individuals between game machines). difference) can also be read. As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting strength (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding a shooting stroke that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

The configuration of the rotating body as the distribution section is not limited to the cylindrical roller 38C shown in FIG. 53A or the windmill 38D shown in FIG. 53B, and design changes are possible. For example, the rotating body may be a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular prism or a square prism, a member with a flat cross section such as an elliptical cylindrical member or a flat plate-shaped member, a rotating body having unevenness on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, or a rotating body having a plurality of blades. A propeller-shaped member or the like may be used.

Further, the rotating body such as the cylindrical roller 38C and the windmill 38D may be configured to be rotatable clockwise and counterclockwise by driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating body. In this case, it is conceivable that the rotation of the rotating body is alternately switched between the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, for example, at regular time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotating body does not necessarily have to switch the direction of rotation at regular time intervals, and may switch the direction of rotation at patterned irregular time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the direction of rotation of the rotor so that the game balls 99 are distributed between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical ratio of 1:1. The direction of rotation of the rotating body may be switched so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls to 352 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, the rotating body can be driven so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second path 352 in mode C than in mode B, and vice versa. In addition, a ball entry sensor is provided near the inlet 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the inlet 350 is detected by the ball entry sensor, the rotating body is rotated in a direction opposite to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible.

<Eleventh and twelfth embodiments>
The sorting device of the eleventh and twelfth embodiments distributes the game balls 99 to the first path 351 or the second path 352 by an immovable and unrotatable sorting portion (fixed sorting portion) regardless of rotation or rotation. is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is distributed to either one of

As shown in FIG. 54A, the sorting device 35E of the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has a top portion 389E directly below the introduction port 350, and sorts as a symmetrical mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E. part is formed. Since the game balls 99 interfering with the top portion 389E or its vicinity are distributed to the left and right in the mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E, the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(B), in the sorting device 35F of the gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the vertex nail 389F (fixed portion) is positioned directly below the introduction port 350 and is a symmetrical triangular shape. A distribution portion is formed by the nails 38F. In this triangular nail 38F, game balls 99 interfering with the vertex nail 389F are distributed to the left and right, so the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. The ends of the triangular nails 38F are driven into the game board 31, the ends being fixed ends and the ends opposite to the ends being free ends. Also, the triangular nail 38F is made of metal, for example, and is plastically deformable. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 38F is plastically changeable, it is possible to return the triangular nails 38F to the initial setting positions when the positions of the triangular nails 38F are deviated from the initial setting positions. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular peg 38F.

Also in the game machine 10 according to the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, since the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as the mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E and the triangular nail 38F, the game balls 99 The ratio distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment and eighth embodiment, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 moves from the first passage 351 and the second Since it is possible to enjoy the game while wondering whether the game ball 99 will be guided to the second path 352, that is, whether the game ball 99 will enter the second start hole 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. Interest can be improved. In addition, when the distribution section is a stationary and non-rotatable distribution section such as the mountain-shaped fixed section 38E or the triangular nail 38F, the player distributes the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the fixed distribution section. It is also possible to read the tendency of (individual difference between game machines). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting strength (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding a shooting stroke that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

In addition, the configuration of the distributing portion for distributing the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E shown in FIG. 54(A) and the triangular peg 38F shown in FIG. 54(B). The design can be changed without For example, the distributing portion may have other bilaterally symmetrical shapes such as a dome-shaped mountain portion, or four or more nails such as a square nail (rhombic nail) whose top nail is positioned directly below the inlet 350. It may consist of a nail or a single nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical, the distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be biased.

[Thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory is provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 extending from the wall portion 361 in a slanting manner with the distal end portion located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. , and by arranging these delay guides 364 in a staggered manner, it is possible to ensure a long residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric accessory 36 . On the other hand, in the thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments, a longer residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is ensured by a structure different from that of the first embodiment. The thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63. FIG.

<Thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments>
In the above-described first embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36, which is a normal electric accessory, extends in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and the tip portion is positioned on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. By providing a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 to move the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the game ball 99 stays on the electric support member 36 for a long time. On the other hand, in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, as in the first embodiment, the electric support member is configured to move the game ball 99 along a meandering path by means of the delay section. However, the configuration of the delay section is different from that of the first embodiment.

The thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55(A) to 55(C). Here, FIG. 55(A) is a plan view of the electric support member 36A of the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 55(B) is the electric support member 36B of the game machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. A plan view, FIG. 55C, is a plan view of the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), in the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364A as the delay section is an equilateral triangle in plan view, and the right side ( The inclined side is located on the upstream side), and they are arranged in a zigzag pattern as a whole. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(B), in the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364B as the delay section is semicircular in plan view, They are arranged in a staggered pattern. In the plurality of delay guides 364A and 364B shown in FIGS. 55(A) and 55(B), the game ball 99 interferes with the respective delay guides 364A and 364B in the electric support members 36A and 36B. It moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering.

It should be noted that the plurality of delay guides serving as the delay portions are not limited to having an equilateral triangle or a semicircular shape in plan view, and are not particularly limited as long as they have a shape that allows the game ball 99 to meander. For example, the plurality of delay guides are each formed into a polygonal shape such as an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a trapezoid, or a parallelogram, and arranged in a staggered manner so that the inclined side is located on the right side (upstream side). is formed into a shape having a parabolic or arc-shaped outer circumference such as a quadrant, semi-ellipse, or quadrant-ellipse, and staggered so that the parabolic or arc-shaped outer circumference is located on the right side (upstream side) Arranged things etc. may be used.

As shown in FIG. 55(C), in the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the delay portion is formed as a meandering groove 364C. With such a meandering groove 364C as well, the game ball 99 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering in the electric support member 36C. In addition, the shape of the meandering groove 364C as the delay portion can be variously formed as long as the shape of the groove allows the game ball 99 to meander.

As described above, in the electric support members 36A to 36C of the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, similarly to the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment, while the game ball 99 is meandering in the electric support members 36A to 36C, By moving the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side), it is possible to secure a long retention time of the game ball 99 in the electric support members 36A to 36C. As a result, in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, as in the first embodiment described above, when the player hits right when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the electric power It becomes difficult to receive support from the support members 36A-36C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal profit in excess of the expected profit from the gaming machine 10 when hitting the right side in a situation where hitting the left side is encouraged.

<Sixteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments>
In the above-described first embodiment, as the delay portion of the electric support member 36, a plurality of slanted portions extending in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361 and having the tip portion positioned on the left side (downstream side) of the base portion. By providing a delay guide 364 and moving the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the moving distance of the game ball on the electric support member 36 is increased and the residence time of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 is increased. has long been secured. On the other hand, in the 16th to 29th embodiments, as a delay part of the electric support member, while the game ball is linearly moved in the electric support member, the residence time of the game ball in the electric support member is is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is configured to ensure a long period of time.

56 to 63, 16th to 29th embodiments will be specifically described below. Since the electric support members of these embodiments can also ensure a long residence time of the game ball, There exists an effect similar to 1st Embodiment. That is, when the special game state is mode B or mode C, when the player hits to the right, it becomes difficult to receive support from the electric support member. It is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the profit expected in the game machine 10 from being obtained when the game machine 10 hits.

(16th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 56(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36D of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 56(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A1-A1 of FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B, in the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear protrusions 364D extending continuously between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36D. It is The plurality of linear protrusions 364D extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear projection 364D has a horizontal surface 365D and a vertical surface 366D, and has a triangular uniform cross section. In the electric support member 36D of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal surface 365D by providing the horizontal surface 365D.

The horizontal surface 365D may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface with a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes, in addition to a satin surface by embossing, a surface having unevenness by embossing or the like. Also, the movement resistance of the game ball may be increased by arranging an elastic member on the horizontal surface or by forming the horizontal surface with an elastic material.

Instead of the horizontal surface 365D, the linear convex portion 364D may have a slightly inclined surface in which the left side (downstream side) is slightly lower or higher than the right side (upstream side). In this case, if the angle of inclination of the slightly inclined surface with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal of the electric support member 36D, the retarding function is achieved. preferable. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear protrusions as delay portions, and one may be provided.

(17th to 19th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 57(A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36E of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 57(C) is a cross-sectional view showing essential parts of the support member 36F, and FIG. 57C is a cross-sectional view showing essential parts of the electric support member 36G of the gaming machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment.

The electric support members 36E to 36G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments are different from the electric support members of the sixteenth embodiment in that a plurality of linear projections 364E to 364G having horizontal surfaces 365E to 365G are provided. Common with 36D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the linear projection 364E of the seventeenth embodiment is provided with an inclined surface 366E instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 57(B), the linear projection 364F of the eighteenth embodiment has a horizontal surface 365F, but instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment, a circular arc surface 366F is provided. This is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above. It should be noted that the surface that can substitute for the vertical surface 366D of the electric support member 36D of the sixteenth embodiment is not limited to the inclined surface 366E and the arc surface 366F, and may be surfaces of other shapes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(C), in the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear protrusions 364G are provided adjacent to each other, and horizontal surfaces 365G and vertical surfaces 366G are alternately continuous. It is different from the linear projection 364D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. Of course, also in the eighteenth embodiment, instead of the vertical surface 366G, a surface having another shape such as an inclined surface or an arcuate surface may be employed.

The linear protrusions 364E, 364F, and 364G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments can be modified in the same manner as in the sixteenth embodiment.

(Twentieth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 58(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36H of the game machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 58(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A2-A2 of FIG. 58(A). .

The electric support member 36H of the twentieth embodiment shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B is different from the first embodiment in that it is provided as a plurality of linear recesses.

As shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 56(B), in the twentieth embodiment, a plurality of linear recesses 364H extending continuously between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36H. ing. The plurality of linear recesses 364H extend parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear recess 364H has a horizontal surface 365H and a vertical surface 366H and has a triangular uniform cross-section. In the electric support member 36H of this embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal surface 365H by providing the horizontal surface 365H. It should be noted that the linear concave portion 364H may employ surfaces of other shapes in place of the horizontal surface 365H and the vertical surface 366H, as in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments described above. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear concave portions as delay portions, and one linear concave portion may be provided.

(Twenty-first to twenty-sixth embodiments)
Here, FIG. 59A is a perspective view of the electric support member 36I of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 59B is a perspective view of the electric support member 36J of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 60(A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 61(A) is a perspective view showing essential parts of the electric support member 36M of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, FIG. 61(B) is a perspective view showing the essential part of the support member 36L Fig. 10 is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member 36N of the game machine 10 according to the embodiment;

The electric support members 36I to 36N of the twenty-first to twenty-sixth embodiments shown in FIGS. It differs from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59A, in the twenty-first embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36I is formed as a plurality of projections 364I, and these projections 364I are arranged in a rectangular lattice. Each convex portion 364I has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36I, which is a cross-sectional shape (A1-A1 It has a shape similar to the cross-sectional shape along the cutting line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 59(B), in the twenty-second embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 364J having the same shape as in the twenty-first embodiment is arranged in an orthorhombic lattice (rhombic lattice, triangular lattice, arranged in an isosceles grid).

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in the twenty-third embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364K are formed in the shape of a quadrangular prism, and these convex portions 364K are arranged in a rectangular grid. The plurality of protrusions 364K may be formed in a polygonal prism shape other than a square prism shape such as a triangular prism shape or a pentagonal prism shape, or may be formed in a staggered shape (orthorhombic lattice shape (rhombic lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape)). may be placed.

As shown in FIG. 60B, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, a plurality of projections 364L are formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape, and these projections 364L are arranged in a rectangular grid. The plurality of protrusions 364L may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape other than a square pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape and a pentagonal pyramid shape, and may be formed in a rhombic lattice shape (rhombus lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape). may be placed.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of projections 364M are formed in a cylindrical shape, and these projections 364M are arranged in a rectangular grid.

As shown in FIG. 61B, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364N are formed in a hemispherical shape, and these convex portions 364N are arranged in a rectangular lattice.

The plurality of protrusions 364M of the twenty-fifth embodiment and the plurality of protrusions 364N of the twenty-sixth embodiment may be arranged in an orthorhombic lattice (rhombic lattice, triangular lattice, isosceles lattice). Also, instead of the plurality of protrusions 364M and the plurality of protrusions 364N, a plurality of protrusions having a circular bottom surface such as a conical shape or a truncated cone shape may be discretely arranged.

It should be noted that the plurality of projections as the delay portion need not all have the same shape, and may be arranged by combining a plurality of projections of different shapes. may be placed. Moreover, the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or may be randomly arranged without regularity.

(27th and 28th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 62(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36O of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 62(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36P of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a perspective view.

Electric support members 36O and 36P of the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B) are provided as a plurality of recesses 364O and 364P in which delay portions are discretely arranged. This is different from the above-described first embodiment in this respect.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), in the electric support member 36O of the twenty-seventh embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364O are formed as delay portions, and these recesses 364O are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each concave portion 364O has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36O, which is a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment (A1-A1 section in FIG. 56A). It has the same shape as the cross-sectional shape along the line (see FIG. 56(B)).

As shown in FIG. 62(B), in the electric support member 36P of the twenty-eighth embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364P having the same shape as the recesses 364O of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above are formed as delay portions at an oblique angle. They are arranged in a square grid (rhombic grid, triangular grid, isosceles grid).

The shape of the plurality of concave portions as the delay portion can be changed variously, for example, a polygonal prism shape such as a quadrangular prism shape, a polygonal pyramid shape such as a quadrangular pyramid shape, a cylindrical shape, a hemispherical shape, a conical shape, a truncated cone shape, and the like. may have a circular bottom surface.

Further, the plurality of recesses serving as the delay portions need not all have the same shape, and may be arranged by combining a plurality of recesses having different shapes. may be placed in combination with Furthermore, the plurality of concave portions as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged in a regular pattern other than a grid pattern, or in a random arrangement without regularity.

(29th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 63(A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36Q of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 63(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 of FIG. be.

The electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B) is different from the first embodiment described above in that the delay portion is provided as a plurality of rollers 364Q that are rotationally driven. different from the form.

As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment includes a plurality of rollers 364Q (five in this embodiment) as delay portions. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of rollers 364Q, and at least one roller 364Q is sufficient. Each roller 364Q is rotatably supported so that its rotation axis extends along the lateral direction of the electric support member 36Q (the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball 99). Further, each roller 364Q is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction, which is the opposite direction to the moving direction of the game ball, by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Therefore, the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q interferes with a plurality of rollers 364Q, and a load is applied toward the right side (upstream side). As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) is reduced, so that a long residence time of the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q is ensured.

The roller 364Q may have a smooth outer surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes, in addition to a satin surface due to embossing, a surface having unevenness due to embossing or the like. Also, an elastic member may be arranged on the outer surface of the roller 364Q, or the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be made of an elastic material to increase the movement resistance of the game ball.

Further, when the delay portion is configured as a roller, it may be configured to apply a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to the game ball 99 via the roller. As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 can be reduced by attracting the game ball 99 to the roller. In this case, the rollers may be rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction as in the twenty-ninth embodiment, but may be freely rotatable without being rotationally driven by the driving means.

Further, the roller 364Q includes linear protrusions 364D to 364G, a linear recess 364H, and a plurality of protrusions arranged in a grid like the electric support members 36D to 36P of the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments described above. It is also conceivable to use them in addition to the configuration in which 364I to 364N and recesses 364O and 364P are provided.

[Thirtyth to thirty-eighth embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. A right first starting port 314R is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and a second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is connected to the first left starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314L. The case where it is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391, which is the area directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the 1 starting port 314R, has been described. On the other hand, the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments are different from the first embodiment in that each of the first start opening and the second start opening is provided one by one. The thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to the drawings.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped electric support member 36 supports the winning of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 has been described. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member is formed in an upside down shape. In addition, since the electric support member is formed in an upside-down shape, the configurations of the first start opening and the second start opening are also different from those of the above-described first embodiment.

The thirtieth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. Here, FIG. 64(A) is a view showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 65(A) is a view of FIG. 64(A) when the electric support member 36R is in a standby state, FIG. 65(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A3-A3 of FIG. 65(A), FIG. 66(A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 66(B) is a sectional view along the A4-A4 section line in FIG. 66(A).

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. As shown in FIG. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 having a different function from the first starting port 314 is located between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region immediately below the inlet 350 . Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the electric support member 36 is located on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 and below the exit of the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 (the second starting port 315 above), and between a standby position that restricts the entry of game balls into the second start port 315 and an operating position that allows the entry of game balls into the second start port 315. It is possible to move back and forth on the game board 31 between them.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is provided in the center of a certain ball receiving portion 391 . That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game ball 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351 All of the distributed game balls 99 can win the same first starting port 314 . In addition, the second starting port 315 of the present embodiment is provided at a position offset to the right from directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 described later, and the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 The ball is not directly entered into the second starting hole 315 .

As shown in FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B), the electric support member 36R has an inverted V-shape having a left guiding portion 361R (first portion) and a right guiding portion 362R (second portion). . The left guiding portion 361R is positioned below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and to the left of the second starting port 315 and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315 . Therefore, the left guide portion 361R can guide the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 to the right side. The right guide portion 362R extends continuously between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 and the right side of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. . Therefore, the right guide section 362R can guide the game ball moving from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 . In addition, it is preferable to provide a delay section in the right guidance section 362R, as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, in a game state in which the electric support member 36R is operated for a short period of time, when a hitting method (right hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left hitting) is performed, the game ball wins the second start port 315. become difficult to be That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of playing right-handed in a game state in which left-handed is encouraged, the player can be encouraged to actively play left-handed.

A penetrating portion 363R is provided between the left guide portion 361R and the right guide portion 362R so as to be positioned above the second starting port 315. As shown in FIG. The through portion 363R has a notch shape that opens forward, and is formed in a form that allows the game ball 99 to pass therethrough. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided from the left guidance portion 361R can pass through the penetration portion 363R and enter the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 guided from the right guidance portion 362R can pass through the penetration portion 363R. It is possible to enter the second starting port 315 by passing through. In addition, the electric support member 36R moves between a standby position that restricts the entry of game balls into the second start port 315 and an operating position that allows the entry of game balls into the second start port 315. can be moved to The movement of the electric support member 36R in the front-rear direction is realized by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Also, although the electric support member 36R has a different shape from the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the operating conditions, the operating pattern, etc. are the same as those of the first embodiment. Specifically, in mode A to mode C, when the lottery result in the normal drawing lottery is a hit, the game ball 99 passing through the first through gate 318 can enter the second start port 315 for a short time. In mode D and mode E, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is driven for a long time so that it can enter the second starting port 315 when the lottery result in the normal figure winning lottery is a win. . In addition, the electric support member 36R is operated on the condition that the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is detected at the first through gate 318 without performing the lottery for the normal figure. may

As shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, when the electric support member 36R is in the standby position, the electric support member 36R does not protrude from the game board 31, and the whole is inside the game board 31. Located in Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is entered into the first starting hole 314 without being guided to the second starting hole 315 by the left guiding portion 361R. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 falls along the game board 31 on the left side of the stage 310 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guide portion 362R, and is dropped from the out port 317. Ejected. That is, the electric support member 36R, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, allows the game ball 99 to enter the first start opening 314 when in the standby position, Entry of the game ball 99 into the 2 starting port 315 is restricted.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, the electric support member 36R protrudes from the game board 31 when the electric support member 36R is at the operating position. Therefore, the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the left guide portion 361R, and the electric support member 36R operates until the game ball 99 reaches the penetrating portion 363R. When it is in the position, the ball passes through the penetrating portion 363R and is entered into the second starting hole 315. As shown in FIG. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the right guiding portion 362R. , passes through the penetrating portion 363R and is struck into the second starting hole 315. As shown in FIG. That is, the electric support member 36R, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, permits restriction of the game ball 99 to the first starting port 314 when in the operating position, while allowing the second Entry of the game ball 99 into the starting port 315 is permitted. Further, when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 hit to the right side area of the game board 31 are the second Allows the ball to enter the starting port 315.

Also in this embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide portions) are provided on the right side of the sorting device 35 . The retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36R in the direction of retracting from the sorting device 35 . That is, the retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315, so that the electric support member 36R is opened for a short time. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36R.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when supported by the electric support member 36R by operating the electric support member 36R, and is driven by the electric support member 36R. If the support cannot be received, the ball is entered into the first starting hole 314 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, a state in which the game ball is entered into the first starting port 314 through the first passage 351, a state in which the game ball 99 is entered into the first starting port 314 through the second passage 352, It can take three states: a state in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 or the electric support member 36R. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36R is operated. The operating time and operating frequency of depends on the mode type of the special game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R, game balls distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the second start hole 315 of 99 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the electric support member 36R of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, not only restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second start port 315, The presence or absence of the restriction on the entry of the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 into the first starting port 314 is switched at the same time. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R cooperate with each other so that the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 It is possible to change the entrance ball ratio with. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), reduce the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, and control the operation of the electric support member 36R to create a new game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of interest.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, a game ball hits to the right like the electric support member 36 passes above the first starting hole 314R and enters the second starting hole 315. FIG. In this case, if the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position at the timing when the game ball passes above the first starting hole 314R, there is a possibility that the game ball hits to the right will enter the first starting hole 314. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball hit to the right is guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guiding portion 362R of the electric support member 36R, the game ball hit to the right is guided to the first starting port 314 not pass over the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first start hole 314 when hit to the right.

Note that the through-hole of the electric support member 36R is not limited to a cut-out shape that opens forward, and may be a through-hole that opens only upward and downward without opening in the horizontal direction.

<Thirty-first Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped electric support member 36 supports the winning of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the normal electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip. In addition, since the normal electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip, the configurations of the first start port and the second start port are also different from those of the above-described first embodiment.

The thirty-first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B). Here, FIGS. 67(A) and 67(B) are diagrams showing essential parts of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. 67(A) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is closed, and FIG. 67(B) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is opened.

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. , the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. As shown in FIG. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 having a different function from the first starting port 314 is located between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the area immediately below the inlet 350 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B, there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 introduces the sorting device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region immediately below the mouth 350 . That is, the first starting port 314 of this embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351 Any of the game balls 99 distributed to can win the same first starting port 314 . Further, the second starting port 315 of this embodiment is provided inside the electric tulip accessory device 36S, which will be described later.

The electric tulip accessory device 36S is provided at a position offset to the right from the area directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and includes a housing 367S fixed to the game board 31, and rotatable left and right feather members 3681S, 3682S.

The housing 367S has an upper opening 369S that allows the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S to rotate and the game ball 99 to enter. The upper opening 369S is a portion for introducing the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and is provided at a position offset to the right from the region immediately below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. That is, the game ball guided to the second passage 352 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 369S. A second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 369S. The second starting port 315 is offset to the right with respect to the second passage 352, similar to the upper opening 369S.

A triangular peg 31S composed of three pegs is provided above the upper opening 369S. This triangular peg 31S restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S are closed (see FIG. 67(A)). In place of the triangular nail 31S, a single nail may be used to limit the entry of the game ball 99, or a non-nail may be used to limit the entry of the game ball. In addition, by reducing the distance between the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S in the closed state, the game ball 99 is delivered to the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed. The triangular nail 31S may be omitted if the ball entry can be restricted.

On the right side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, a road peg 31M' (induction part) made up of a plurality of pegs is provided through a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. The road nail 31M' is provided so as to incline downward to the left, and guides the game ball 99 that is struck to the right side area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side area toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Therefore, in a state where the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are opened (see FIG. 67(B)), the game ball 99 is guided by the road nail 31M', and the electric tulip accessory is driven through the upper opening 369S. It is introduced inside the device 36S, and the game ball 99 is entered into the second starting port 315. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are closed (see FIG. 67(A)), the game ball 99 guided by the road nail 31M' enters the upper opening 369S by the right wing member 3682S. is limited, passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M', and is discharged from the out port 317. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are rotatable by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the driving means causes the tip portions of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S to approach each other. A state (see FIG. 67(A)) and an open state (see FIG. 67(B)) in which the tip portions of the left and right blade members 3681S and 3682S are separated are switched. The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment. That is, in the normal electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) causes the opening of the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment. Correspondingly, the return of the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to the closing of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment.

In the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(A), the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. can't ball That is, in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, the entry of the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 into the second starting port 315 is blocked by the left wing member 3681S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collided with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S is repelled to the left and falls into the ball receiving portion 391, and is guided to the first starting port 314 by the ball receiving portion 391, thereby leading to the first starting port. Win 314. In addition, the game ball 99 struck in the right area of the game board 31 and guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M' collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and the electric tulip accessory. The ball cannot enter inside the device 36S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M' as described above, and is discharged from the out port 317. .

In the open state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67(B), the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is picked up by the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Then, the second starting port 315 is won. In addition, the game ball 99 that flows down the right side area of the game board 31 and is guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road peg 31M' bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road peg 31M'. The ball is picked up by the right wing member 3682S, enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and wins the second starting port 315. That is, the electric tulip accessory device 36S hits the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the right side area of the game board 31 when the left and right feather members 3681S and 3682S are in the closed state. Any of the game balls 99 that have been used are allowed to enter the second starting port 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

In this way, the electric tulip accessory device 36S of this embodiment, as in the above-described first embodiment, not only restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second start port 315, but also distributes the game ball 99. At the same time, whether or not the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the device 35 is restricted from entering the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right feather members 3681S, 3682S) cooperate with each other to The ball entry ratio between the first starting hole 314 and the second starting hole 315 can be varied. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 100%), reduce the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, It is possible to provide a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics depending on the control mode of the operation. In particular, when configured as an electric tulip accessory device 36S, for example, in a game state (for example, mode A or mode C) in which left-handed hitting that hits a game ball to the left side area of the game board 31 is encouraged, the right side area of the game board 31 In order to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the electric tulip accessory device 36S when the game ball is hit to the right, a delay unit (the delay guide 364 of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above) is provided. ) is not required, and a known electric tulip accessory device 36S can be adopted. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the advantage of being easier to design than the first embodiment described above. In addition, in this embodiment, since only one first starting port 314 is required, compared to the first embodiment described above, one first starting port and one incoming ball sensor can be omitted. The design is easier than the first embodiment, and the manufacturing cost is advantageous.

<Thirty-Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a general winning opening having a different function from the first starting opening is provided directly under the second passage of the sorting device. .

The thirty-second embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(A). Here, FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(A), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that there is one first starting port 314, but this first starting port 314 It is common to the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided immediately below the first passage 351 of . A second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 which is a region immediately below the introduction port 350 as in the first embodiment. In addition, the electric support member 36 is arranged in series between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 and the outlet below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, as in the first embodiment described above. It extends and is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Further, below the second passage 352, a general winning opening 313' having a function different from that of the first starting opening 314 and the second starting opening 315 is provided instead of the first starting opening. That is, the electric support member 36 opens the general winning opening 313' at the standby position, and closes the general winning opening 313' at the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36 restricts entry of the game ball to the second starting port 315 in the state where the general winning opening 313' is opened at the standby position, and the state where the general winning opening 313' is closed at the operating position. Then guides to the second starting port 315 and allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 .

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are The ball is entered at the starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when supported by the electric support member 36 by operating the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 If the player cannot receive the support from the player, the ball is put into the general winning hole 313'.

Here, the sorting device of the conventional game machine sorts the game balls between the first starting section and the second starting section, and has the disadvantage that the game becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the state in which the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the state in which the game ball enters the second passage A state in which the game ball 352 is entered into the general winning hole 313′ and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting hole 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. can take two states. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the general winning hole 313' or the second starting hole 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and operating frequency of depends on the mode type of the special game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the general winning hole 313', thereby providing the game machine 10 with novel game characteristics that cannot be realized in conventional game machines. be. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the first starting port 314 and The ball is entered into the general prize winning opening 313' without being entered into any of the second starting openings 315. - 特許庁On the other hand, in mode C as latent probability variation, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second start port 315. do. That is, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314) and half enter the general winning port 313' in mode A, In mode C, all the game balls 99 are entered into the starting holes (half the first starting hole 314, half the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not performed in mode A is performed, but also if the number of game balls entered in the sorting device 35 is used as a reference, the special figure is double that of mode A. A game is executed. In other words, in mode C (variable latent probability), the chance of receiving a big winning lottery is doubled compared to mode A. As described above, the present embodiment provides the gaming machine 10 which is a new gaming machine that could not be realized by conventional gaming machines.

Also, if the number of prize balls is different between the first start port 314 and the general winning port 313', the increase and decrease of the game balls in the special game can be different from the above-described first embodiment. can also For example, by making the number of prize balls for the general prize winning opening 313' larger than the number of prize balls for the first start opening 314, it is possible to impart a gradual decrease in the number of game balls in the special game. On the other hand, by making the number of prize balls for the general prize winning opening 313' smaller than the number of prize balls for the first start opening 314, it is possible to impart a game property in which the number of game balls in the special game is drastically reduced. In this case, by increasing the number of game balls obtained in the jackpot game, it is possible to make the gaming machine 10 in which the number of game balls increases and decreases rapidly.

<Thirty-third embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. Also, in the thirty-second embodiment described above, the case where the general prize winning opening 313' is provided directly below the second passage 352 has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, neither the first start opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly under the second passage of the sorting device, which is the difference between the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment described above. different from the form. In addition, in this embodiment, the 2nd starting port is not provided directly under the 2nd path|passage of a sorting apparatus, either.

The thirty-third embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 68(B). Here, FIG. 68(B) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that there is one first starting port 314, but this first starting port 314 is provided immediately below the first passage 351, which is common with the above-described first embodiment, and further common with the 32nd embodiment. In addition, the second starting port 315 and the electric support member 36 of this embodiment are also common to the above-described first and thirty-second embodiments. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, neither the first starting opening nor the general winning opening is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, there is not provided a second starting opening having a different function from the first starting opening and the general winning opening, nor a winning opening such as a through gate. In this embodiment, the game ball 99 is guided to the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315. As in the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 in the second path 352 falls along the game board 31, It is different from the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment described above in that it is discharged from the out port 317 without winning a prize.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are A ball is entered into the mouth 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when supported by the electric support member 36 by operating the electric support member 36, and is driven by the electric support member 36. When the support cannot be received, it is discharged from the out port 317 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the state in which the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the game ball in the second passage 352 is ejected from the out port 317, and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. Whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is ejected from the out port 317 or entered into the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. The operating time and operating frequency of depends on the mode type of the special game state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, game distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state Since the ease with which the ball 99 enters the second starting hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest in the game is improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the game ball 99 in the second path 352 is not entered into either the first starting hole 314 or the second starting hole 315, it has a new game property that cannot be achieved in conventional game machines. A gaming machine 10 is provided. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are discharged from the out port 317. be. On the other hand, in mode C, which is a latent probability variable, game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first starting port 314, and game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second starting port 315. be done. That is, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the sorting device 35 enter the starting port (first starting port 314) in mode A and half are discharged from the out port 317, while in mode C All the game balls 99 are entered into the starting holes (half the first starting hole 314, half the second starting hole 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not performed in mode A is performed, but also if the number of game balls entered in the sorting device 35 is used as a reference, the special figure is double that of mode A. A game is executed. In other words, in mode C (variable latent probability), the chance of receiving a big winning lottery is doubled compared to mode A. As described above, the present embodiment provides the gaming machine 10 which is a new gaming machine that could not be realized by conventional gaming machines.

In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317 when there is no support by the electric support member 36. A winning hole may be provided at a distant position so that a game ball passing through the second passage 352 can enter the winning hole.

<Thirty-fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the electric support member is slid along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fourth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. Here, FIG. 69(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36T in the standby state of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 69(B) is a diagram. 69(A) is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 70(A) is a view showing the main part when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position in FIG. 69(A), and FIG. ) is a perspective view showing a main part of the device.

In the above-described first embodiment, it has two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is located between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R, and is the area directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35. It is provided in the center of the receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, a road peg 31M' is provided, and on the left side of the peg 31M', an electric support member 36T is provided. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36T. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36T has a plate-like shape that is slightly inclined downward to the left, and is movable along the game board 31 along the moving direction of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36T. Specifically, the electric support member 36T is positioned between a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M'. You can move between them. That is, the electric support member 36T is operable between a standby position that closes the second starting port 315 and an operating position that closes the gap between the second starting port 315 and the leading nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 69(A) and 69(B), when the electric support member 36T is at the standby position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is positioned directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and at the second starting port 315 , the electric support member 36T closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36T is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36T and discharged from the out port 317. As shown in FIG. Further, the electric support member 36T forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36T and the road nail 31M' when it is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the road nail 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36T (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and the out port 317 discharged from

As shown in FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B), when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is positioned adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M', the electric support The member 36T opens the second starting hole 315 to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and allows the entry of the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M' to the left into the second starting hole 315. bridge between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the road nail 31M' to the left is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . In addition, a plurality of guard nails 31B (two in this embodiment) are arranged as a guard portion on the upper left of the second starting port 315. As shown in FIG. The plurality of nails 31B prevent the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T to the second start opening 315 from jumping over the second start opening 315 when the electric support member 36T is at the operating position. be. That is, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T to the second starting port 315 collides with the plurality of guard nails 31B without entering the second starting port 315 directly when the movement speed is high. After that, the ball is entered into the second starting port 315 .

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393, 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 located in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is at the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the lead nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36T is at the standby position, the lead nail 31M ' and the second starting port 315 and discharged from the out port 317 . On the other hand, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the electric support member 36T bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second start opening 315 opened. A game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and a game ball 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball of 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enters the second start port 315 or is discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36T, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36T depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36T, but also the second passage 352 and the second stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the starting hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

<Thirty-Fifth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the electric support member can be rotated in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position. different from the form. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 71(A) is a view showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36U of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 71(B) is FIG. 71(A). It is a figure which shows the principal part of.

In the above-described first embodiment, it has two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, a road peg 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36U is provided on the left side of the peg 31M'. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36U. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the electric support member 36U has a plate-like shape having a pair of wall portions 361U projecting upward from the edges in the width direction, and is slightly inclined downward to the left. are placed. The pair of wall portions 361U function as guides for guiding the game ball 99 from the right (upstream) end 362 to the left (downstream) end 363 . The electric support member 36U is provided with a rotation shaft 362U, and when a rotational force is input to the rotation shaft 362U from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36U rotates in a plane view as shown in FIG. (B) are rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the electric support member 36U is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane that is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

In addition, the electric support member 36U is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the standby position ( 71(A) and 71(B)) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the lead nail 31M' (position indicated by two-dot chain lines in FIGS. 71(A) and 71(B)). You can move between them. That is, the electric support member 36U can operate between a standby position that closes the second starting port 315 and an operating position that closes the gap between the second starting port 315 and the leading nail 31M'.

When the electric support member 36U is in the standby position indicated by solid lines in FIGS. When positioned directly above, the electric support member 36U closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is not entered into the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36U is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36U and discharged from the out port 317 . Further, the electric support member 36U forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36U and the road nail 31M' when it is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the road nail 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36U (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and the out port 317 discharged from

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is at the operating position indicated by the two-dot chain lines in FIGS. The support member 36U allows the game ball 99 to enter by opening the second starting port 315, and allows the game ball 99 moving the trailing nail 31M' to the left to enter the second starting port 315. bridge between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the road nail 31M' to the left is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393, 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 located in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 moves the lead nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36U is at the standby position, the lead nail 31M ' and the second starting port 315 and discharged from the out port 317 . On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position, the electric support member 36U bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' in a state where the second start opening 315 is opened. A game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and a game ball 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball of 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enters the second start port 315 or is discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36U, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36T depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U, depending on the mode type of the special figure gaming state, the second passage 352 and stage 310 Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

Note that the electric support member 36U may be arranged horizontally without being tilted with respect to the horizontal plane, and configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, the surface of the electric support member 36U may be provided with a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left to promote the movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in the vertical plane along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, which is different from the above-described first embodiment. . Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-sixth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 72 is a view showing the main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. In the standby position, FIG. 72(B) shows the electric support member 36V in the intermediate position between the standby position and the operating position, and FIG. 72(C) shows the electric support member 36V in the operating position. .

In the above-described first embodiment, it has two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, there is one first starting port 314 as in the thirty-fourth and thirty-fifth embodiments described above. A starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Also in this embodiment, a road nail 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 (not shown) below the variable winning device 316. An electric support member 36V is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the upper side. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36V. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36V is provided with a rotation shaft 362V, and a rotational force is input to the rotation shaft 362V from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, so that the electric support member 36V moves along the game board 31. The vertical plane is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in FIGS. 72(A) to 72(C). In addition, the electric support member 36V is rotated in the vertical plane by controlling the drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the standby position ( 72(A)) and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M' (solid line position in FIG. 72(C)). That is, the electric support member 36V closes the gap between the standby position (solid line position in FIG. 72A) in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. It is operable between the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 72(C)). The electric support member 36V is inclined slightly leftward and downward at the standby position and the operating position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 36V. However, the electric support member 36V may be arranged horizontally. In this case, the surface of the electric support member 36V is provided with a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left so that the game ball 99 can be moved toward the second starting port 315 side. may promote movement to

When the electric support member 36V is at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 36V closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36V is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36V and discharged from the out port 317 . Further, the electric support member 36V forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36V and the road nail 31M' when it is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the road nail 31M' passes through the gap between the electric support member 36V (the second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and the out port 317 discharged from

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIG. The opening 315 is opened to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and the opening 31M' and the second start opening 31M' are opened so that the opening 31M' of the game ball 99 moving to the left side can enter the second starting opening 315. 2 bridges between the starting port 315 . Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving leftward on the road nail 31M' is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36V. It moves toward the second starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the lead nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36V is at the standby position, the lead nail 31M ' and the second starting port 315 and discharged from the out port 317 . On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the operating position, the electric support member 36V bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second start opening 315 opened. A game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and a game ball 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit to the left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit to the right and moves on the stage 310 enters the second start port 315 or is discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36V, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36V depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure game state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the electric support member 36V is stopped at two positions above the second starting port 315 and to the left of the lead nail 31M'. The position where the electric support member 36V stands up shown in B) may be set as the operating position and stopped. At the position where the electric support member 36V stands up, both the second starting opening 315 and the gap between the second starting opening 315 and the trailing nail 31M' are opened at the same time. Therefore, while the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the second starting port 315, the game ball 99 flowing down the right side of the distribution device 35 and the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M' entry into the second starting port 315 is restricted by the upright electric support member 36V. As a result, in the game state (mode A to mode C) in which the electric support member 36V is opened for a short period of time, the area to the right of the sorting device 35 is displayed without providing the retraction guide parts such as the retraction guide nails 393 and 394. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36V.

<Thirty-seventh embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric support member is rotatable in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) between the standby position and the operating position. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it has a length dimension extending to the left of the road nail 31M'. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-seventh embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. Here, FIG. 73(A) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36W at the standby position of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 73(B) is a diagram. 73(A) is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 74(A) is a view showing the case where the electric support member 36W is in the operating position in FIG. 73(B), and FIG. 74(B) is an electric support member in this embodiment. It is a top view which shows the modification of 36W.

In the above-described first embodiment, it has two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, a road peg 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36W is provided on the left side of the peg 31M'. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36W. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B), the electric support member 36W is an elliptical plate material in plan view, and has an elliptical through hole 363W and a closing portion 364W. The electric support member 36W has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a state of being inclined slightly downward to the left. As a result, the electric support member 36W can properly move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36W may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that is inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W, and the game ball 99 is guided toward the second starting port 315 side. may facilitate the movement of

The through-hole 363W has a minor diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and allows the game ball 99 to pass through. Further, the through hole 363W is located between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position, and is located between the second start opening when the electric support member 36W is at the operating position. It is formed at a location where it can be positioned directly above 315 . The shapes of the electric support member 36W and the through hole 363W are not limited to elliptical, and may be other shapes such as circular, oval, and oblong. The closing portion 364W is positioned above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position, and is positioned between the second starting port 315 and the trailing nail 31M' when the electric support member 36W is at the operating position. located in between.

The electric support member 36W is provided with a rotating shaft 362W, and when a rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 362W from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36W intersects the game board 31. 73(B) in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction in FIG. 73(B). In addition, the electric support member 36W is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and blocks the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, while the through hole 363W becomes the second starting port 315. and the lead nail 31M' (see FIG. 73(B)), and the through hole 363W is located directly above the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to open the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is movable between the operating position (see FIG. 74(A)) that bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. That is, the electric support member 36W is operable between a standby position that closes the second starting port 315 and an operating position that closes the gap between the second starting port 315 and the leading nail 31M'.

When the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, that is, when the closing portion 364W of the electric support member 36W is positioned above the second starting port 315 and the through hole 363W is positioned adjacent to the left side of the trailing nail 31M', The electric support member 36W closes the second starting port 315 with the closing portion 364W to restrict entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is not entered into the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36W is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36W and discharged from the out port 317 . Further, when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W is located at a position through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36W and the road nail 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M' passes through the through hole 363W and is ejected from the out port 317. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, that is, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W is positioned directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second start port 315, and the closing portion 364W is When positioned between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36W opens the second starting port 315 through the through hole 363W to allow the entry of the game ball 99, and The closing part 364W bridges between the road nail 31M' and the second starting hole 315 so that the game ball 99 moving leftward on the 31M' can enter the second starting hole 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving the road nail 31M' to the left is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36W. It moves toward the starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game balls 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T are guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393, 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 located in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 , is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36W is at the standby position, the through hole 363W. and falls from between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315 and is ejected from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is at the operating position, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W bridges between the second start opening 315 and the road nail 31M' with the second start opening 315 opened. Therefore, the game ball 99 distributed to the second path 352 and the game ball 99 moving leftward toward the second starting port 315 from the stage 310 with the road nail 31M' both enter the second starting port 315. be balled. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball of 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a game ball in the second passage 352 does not enter either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and is out. Ejection from port 317 can take three states. In addition, the game ball 99 hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball hit right and moving on the stage 310 enter the second start port 315 or are discharged from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36W, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36W depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36W, but also the second passage 352 and the second passage 310 of the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), the electric support member 36W has a through portion 363W' such as a notch that opens not only vertically but also partially laterally instead of the vertically open through hole 363W. It may be provided.

<Thirty-Eighth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped electric support member 36 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position, thereby leading to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been explained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is rotatable around a rotation axis inclined with respect to the horizontal direction, and has a length dimension from above the second starting port 315 to the left of the road nail 31M'. , is different from the first embodiment described above. Also, the first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It differs from the first embodiment described above.

The thirty-eighth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. Here, FIG. 75(A) is a view showing the main part of the game board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36X of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 76(A) is a cross-sectional view along the A5-A5 cutting line in FIG. 75(B), FIG. 76(B) is a cross-sectional view along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 75(B), FIG. FIG. 77A shows a main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is at the standby position, and FIG. 77B shows the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is at the operating position. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member 36X in this embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, it has two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 . Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first left starting port 314L and the first right starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75(A), there is one first starting port 314 , and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35 . On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352 . Further, a road peg 31M' is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36X is provided on the left side of the peg 31M'. The road nail 31M' guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36X. Also in the present embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide section by increasing the size of the stage 310 instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 75(A), 75(B), 76(A) and 76(B), the electric support member 36X has a first through portion 361X and a second through portion 362X. 2 It has a length dimension from above the starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined downward to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36X can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M' to the second starting port 315 in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36X may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W, and the game ball 99 is guided toward the second starting port 315 side. may facilitate the movement of

The first through portion 361X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 361aX and 361bX facing each other, and opens leftward. The first through portion 361X is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and the game ball 99 enters the second start port 315 by the projecting piece 361aX when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. (see FIG. 77(A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, it penetrates in the vertical direction to allow the game ball 99 to enter the second start port 315 ( See FIG. 77(B)).

The second through portion 362X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 362aX and 362bX facing each other, and is opened rightward. Also, the second through portion 362X penetrates in a direction orthogonal to the first through portion 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X does not necessarily have to penetrate in the direction perpendicular to the first penetrating portion 362X, and may penetrate in the direction intersecting with the first penetrating portion 361X. The second through portion 362X is located in the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M', and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second through portion 362X penetrates in the vertical direction. Passage of the game ball 99 is allowed in the gap between the opening 315 and the road nail 31M' (see FIG. 77(A)), and the second starting opening is opened by the projecting piece 362aX when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position. The passage of the game ball 99 is restricted between 315 and the road nail 31M' (see FIG. 77(B)).

The electric support member 36X is rotatable around a rotation axis extending substantially horizontally and slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41 . In addition, the electric support member 36X is rotated by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the first through portion 361X penetrates in the front-rear direction, blocking the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. On the other hand, the standby position (see FIG. 77A) where the second through portion 363W vertically penetrates between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M′ and the first through portion 361X An operating position in which the second passage 362W of the sorting device 35 penetrates in the vertical direction immediately below the second passage 352, while the second penetration portion 362W penetrates in the front-rear direction to bridge between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. (See FIG. 77(B)). That is, the electric support member 36X is in a standby position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. , and an operating position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 77(A), when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the electric support member 36X closes the second starting port 315 to restrict entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. do. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36X is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36X and discharged from the out port 317. As shown in FIG. Also, when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second through portion 362X vertically penetrates between the electric support member 36X and the road nail 31M' so that the game ball 99 can pass therethrough. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M' passes through the second through portion 362X and is ejected from the out port 317. - 特許庁

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(B), when the electric support member 36X is at the operating position, the electric support member 36X opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the road. It bridges between the road nail 31M' and the second starting hole 315 so that the game ball 99 moving the nail 31M' to the left side can enter the second starting hole 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315, and the game ball moving leftward on the road nail 31M' is moved to the second position by the electric support member 36X. It moves toward the second starting port 315 and is hit by the second starting port 315 . Also in this embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, a game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start opening 315 is placed on the upper left side of the second start opening 315 for the second start. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are provided to prevent jumping over the opening 315. - 特許庁

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction away from the distribution device 35. Retreat guide nails 393 and 394 (retreat guide parts) are provided to guide game balls 99 flowing down the right area of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second start port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right area of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

Thus, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is entered into the first starting port 314 . On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. In addition, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M' to the left toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36X is at the standby position, the second penetration It passes through the portion 362X, drops from between the road nail 31M' and the second starting port 315, and is ejected from the out port 317. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the first through portion 361X of the electric support member 36X opens the second starting opening 315 and the opening between the second starting opening 315 and the trailing nail 31M'. , and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball 99 moving leftward from the stage 310 toward the second starting port 315 both pass through the first through portion 361X. The ball passes through and enters the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by hitting left, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314, and the second passage A state in which the game ball 352 enters the second starting port 315, and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters neither the first starting port 314 nor the second starting port 315, and exits from the out port 317. It can take three states to be discharged. In addition, the game ball 99 hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball hit right and moving on the stage 310 enter the second start port 315 or are ejected from the out port 317. Whether depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36X, the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36X depends on the mode type of the special figure game state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, not only can be a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36X, depending on the mode type of the special figure gaming state, the second passage 352 and the stage 310 Since the easiness of entering the ball into the second start hole 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machine, and the interest of the game is improved.

Instead of the first through-hole 361X and the second through-hole 362X that are partially open not only up and down but also sideways, as shown in FIG. ', 362X' may be provided, and a through-hole that is open not only up and down but also partially sideways and a through-hole that is open only up and down may be used together.

Furthermore, in the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments, one first starting port 314 was provided, but two first starting ports are provided in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The game ball 99 released from the first passage 351 may be entered by the starting port, and the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 may be entered by the other first starting port 314L.

Further, in the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments, the same configuration as in the first embodiment described above can be modified in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and the second to twelfth embodiments described above can be modified. Configurations of the form (see FIGS. 26 to 54) and configurations of modifications thereof can also be employed. For example, in the thirtieth to thirty-seventh embodiments, the rollers 38C of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 53(A)) and the windmills 38D of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 53(B)) are used as the distribution section. Rotating body such as, mountain-shaped fixed part 38E of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 54A), triangular nail 38F of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53A), and the vertex nail of the triangular nail 38F A fixed distribution part such as a single chisel can be preferably employed. When such a rotating body or fixed distribution section is employed as the distribution section, the player can read the tendency of distribution by the distribution section between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individual differences between game machines). is also possible. As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting intensity (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding a shooting stroke that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 352 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

[Thirty-ninth to eighty-fifth embodiments]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the sorting device is provided in the central lower portion of the game board 31 (below the symbol display portion), and the game balls hit to the left side area of the game board are introduced into the sorting device. explained. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the thirty-ninth to eighty-fifth embodiments, the sorting device is provided on the lower right side of the game board 31 (right side of the symbol display section), and the game balls launched to the right side area of the game board are It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is introduced into a sorting device. In addition, in the gaming machines according to the thirty-ninth to eighty-fifth embodiments, the game balls distributed to the first passage cannot enter the first starting port, whereas the game balls distributed to the first passage are normal. It is also different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is possible to enter the second start hole with the support of the electric accessory. The thirty-ninth to eighty-fifth embodiments will be individually described below with reference to the drawings. The 40th to 85th embodiments are modifications of the 39th embodiment.

<Thirty-ninth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the distribution device 35 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31 (below the symbol display portion 341) so that the game ball at the time of left hitting that is hit to the left side area of the game board can be introduced, A variable winning device 316 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 31 (on the right side of the symbol display portion 341) so that the game ball hit to the right side of the game board can enter. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game balls in the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can enter the first start port 314. When the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, both the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the game balls hit to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter. be. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the game ball at the time of hitting left can enter the first moving port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the game ball at the time of hitting right can enter the second starting port. It is possible.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variable winning device and the first starting port are provided below the symbol display portion, and the game ball when hit left can enter the variable winning device and the first starting port. . In addition, in this embodiment, the sorting device and the second starting port are provided on the right side of the pattern display part, and the game ball at the time of hitting to the right is introduced into the sorting device and can enter the second starting port. be. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball hits to the right does not enter the second starting hole, a road nail is provided so that the game ball hits to the right can enter the variable winning device. However, in this embodiment, it is also possible to omit the above-mentioned road spikes or change the arrangement of the above-mentioned road spikes so that the game ball hits to the right does not enter the variable winning device.

79 to 93, the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the sorting device, which is the difference from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and the parts related to the sorting device. will be explained in detail.

Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a game board including the sorting device and the second start port of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting unit of the sorting device of FIG. 80. FIG. 83 and 84 are diagrams showing the operation of the sorting section of the sorting device of FIG. 80. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing an opening/closing door of the variable winning device of FIG. 80. FIG. 86(A) is a cross-sectional view along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 80, FIG. 86(A) is a cross-sectional view along the A6-A6 cutting line in FIG. 80, and FIG. 86(B) is A7-A7 in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view along a cutting line. FIG. 87(A) is a view of FIG. 86(A) when the electric support member is at the operating position, and FIG. 87(B) is a view of FIG. 86(A) when the electric support member is at the operating position. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of lighting timing and lighting timing of the synchronization lamp.

As shown in FIG. 79, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a sorting device 92, a through gate 319′, a first start port 314, a second start port 315, a variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 93. . Among these, the first starting port 314 and the variable winning device 316 are provided below the pattern display portion 341, and the second starting port 315, the sorting device 92 and the electric support member 93 are provided on the right side of the pattern display portion 341. It is

Specifically, the first starting port 314 is provided below the symbol display portion 341, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball to be launched into the left area of the game board 31 can enter. The variable winning device 316 is provided between the first starting port 314 and the out port 317 below the symbol display section 341 . In the variable winning device 316, the opening and closing door 316a is opened, so that the game balls that have not entered the first starting port 314 among the game balls in the left-handed hitting can enter the variable winning port 316b. . In addition, when the game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 with the opening/closing door 316a opened, the game ball that has not entered the second starting hole 315 can enter the variable winning hole 316b. The second starting port 315 is provided between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 below the sorting device 92 and can be opened and closed by the electric support member 93 . The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 provide an opportunity for a big winning lottery on the condition that a game ball is entered.

As shown in FIGS. 86(B) and 87(B), the through gate 319' detects that the game ball 99 has passed through a second passage 922 of the sorting device 92, which will be described later. The through gate 319' includes, for example, a proximity sensor, and detects passage of the game ball 99 by this proximity sensor. When it is detected that the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922 by the through gate 319', a lottery per normal pattern is performed, and when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a win, the electric support member 93 is predetermined. time works. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 , the electric support member 93 operates, and the game ball can enter the second start port 315 . Since the second starting port 315 gives the chance of a big winning lottery on the condition that the game ball 99 is entered, the distribution device 92 distributes the game ball 99 to the first passage 921. It is advantageous for the game balls 99 to be distributed to the second passage 922 as compared with the case where the game balls 99 are distributed.

In addition, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922 by the through gate 319', the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922 by the through gate 319' without performing a lottery per normal pattern. The electric support member 93 may be actuated after a predetermined time has passed since this is detected. In this case, it is preferable to set the timing and operation time for operating the electric support member 93 according to the type of special figure gaming state. For example, in mode A, the electric support member 93 is shorted after passing in front of the electric support member 93 so that the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319 ′ does not enter the second start hole 315 . Also, in mode B, the electric support member 93 is short-operated at the timing when the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319 ′ is supported by the electric support member 93 and can enter the second start opening 315 . Furthermore, in mode E, the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319' is supported by the electric support member 93 and is launched not only at the second starting port 315 but also after the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319'. The electric support member 93 is long-operated so that the ball can be entered into the second starting port 315 even when the number of game balls 99 has passed through the first passage 921.例文帳に追加

The electric support member 93 moves between a standby position shown in FIGS. 86(A) and 86(B) and an operating position shown in FIGS. 87(A) and 87(B). ) to open and close the second starting port 315 . The electric support member 93 restricts the entry of game balls released from the sorting device 92 into the second starting port 315 when in the standby position shown in FIGS. 87(A) and FIG. 87(B) allow game balls released from the sorting device 92 to enter the second starting port 315 when in the operating position shown in FIG. 87(B).

As shown in FIG. 85 , the electric support member 93 has a base 931 , a pair of guard walls 932 and a pair of guides 933 . The base 931 has a pair of mounting portions 934 for rotatably mounting the electric support member 93 to the game board 31. When the electric support member 93 is in the operating position, the base 931 is positioned slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31. It protrudes (see FIGS. 87(A) and 87(B)). Thereby, the electric support member 93 can receive the game ball 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92, which will be described later, when the electric support member 93 is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 932 extend from the left and right edges of the base 931 to prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 931 from falling from the left and right sides of the base 931 . It guides the game ball 99 received by the base 931 to the second starting port 315 . A pair of guides 933 extends from the guard wall 932 to the vicinity of the second starting port 315 and forms a gap in front of the second starting port 315 through which the game ball 99 can pass.

Here, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is defined by the game state as will be described later. (for example, 1 second) (see FIG. 89(B))). In the mode E in which the electric support member 93 operates for a long time, the game ball passing through the second passage 922 when the result of the normal drawing winning lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the second passage 922 is a win. Not only 99 but also the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 can enter the second starting port 315 which is more advantageous than the first starting port 314 . Therefore, in mode E, it is recommended to hit the game ball 99 to the right side of the game board 31 to hit the right side. In addition, in mode B in which the electric support member 93 short-circuits, it is difficult for the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 to enter the second starting port 315, but the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 922 is difficult to enter. can enter the second starting port 315. Even in mode B, since the game ball can enter the second starting port 315, which is more advantageous in distributing the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot than the first starting port 314 (FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D)) , is encouraged to play right-handed. In addition, in mode A, there is no time saving (see FIG. 89 (B))), and since the low probability table is referred to as a per-universal figure per right/fail table (see FIG. 13 (C))), the second passage 922 is passed The played game ball 99 cannot enter the second starting port 315. - 特許庁On the contrary, the first starting port 314 is not provided in the right region of the game board 31, and the first starting port 314 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31 so that the game ball 99 can be entered when hit left. there is Therefore, in mode A, hitting to the right is not a good idea, and hitting to the left is encouraged so as to enter the game ball 99 into the first starting hole 314 .

The sorting device 92 is provided on the right side of the pattern display section 341, and sorts game balls that are hit to the right. As shown in FIG. 80 , the sorting device 92 includes an introduction port 920 , a sorting member 94 , a first passage 921 , a second passage 922 and a synchronization ramp 923 . In this sorting device 92, a game ball 99 entered through an inlet 920 moves leftward (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 4 and 5A) and rightward (FIGS. 4 and 5A) of the sorting member 94. 5 (A) in the clockwise direction), it is distributed to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 . In addition, the introduction port 920 , the distribution member 94 , the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are defined by a housing 924 . This housing 924 accommodates the distribution member 94 inside, and is made of, for example, colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the sorting device 92, the sorting member 94 is visible from the outside. Note that the housing 924 does not necessarily need to be entirely transparent, and at least the sorting member 94 is visible from the outside. good. Further, as in the present embodiment, when a synchronization lamp 923 described later for informing the attitude of the distribution member 94 is provided, it is not necessary to make the distribution member 94 visible, and at least the lighting state of the synchronization lamp 923 should be made visible.

The introduction port 920 is a portion that allows the game ball 99 to enter the sorting device 92 . The introduction port 920 is a portion of the right side area of the game board 31 (to the right of the pattern display portion 341) where a pair of side nails 31Y are driven into the game board 31 in a hakama shape so as to taper off. placed directly below. The pair of side nails 31Y can guide all the game balls 99 hit to the right side area of the game board 31 to the lead-in port 920, and the lowermost nail pair is arranged right above the lead-in port 920. As a result, all the game balls 99 hit to the right are guided to the lead-in port 920 by the side nail 31Y. In other words, all the game balls 99 hit to the right are introduced into the sorting device 92 through the inlet 920 . By introducing all the game balls 99 in the right-hand shot into the distribution device 92, the game balls 99 hit at the timing at which the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 are introduced into the distribution device 92 with high probability. It becomes possible to let Further, instead of the side nail 31Y, the game balls 99 may be introduced into the sorting device 92 by causing all the game balls struck to the right to pass through a prescribed route formed of resin or the like. In this case, it is possible to fix the time from the launch of the game ball 99 until it is introduced into the sorting device 92 by the moving distance and moving speed of the game ball 99 on the specified route. As a result, compared with the case where the game ball 99 at the time of hitting to the right is introduced into the sorting device 92 by the side peg 31Y, the probability of the game ball 99 hitting at the timing at which the game ball 99 is easily sorted to the second passage 922 is higher. can be introduced into the sorting device 92 at . Of course, only some of the game balls 99 may be introduced into the sorting device 92 instead of all of the game balls 99 when hit to the right.

The first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are open downward, and the game balls 99 distributed to the respective passages 921 and 922 are released downward toward the electric support member 93 .

As shown in FIG. 81(A), the distribution member 94 distributes the game balls 99 introduced from the introduction port 920 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922. It has a piece 942 L, a right ball receiving piece 942 R, an eccentric portion 943 and a load generating portion 944 . In the distributing member 94, the rotating shaft 941, the ball receiving guide piece 942, the eccentric portion 943, and the load generating portion 944 are integrally arranged around the rotating shaft 941 extending in the front-rear direction. ) and counterclockwise (second direction).

The ball receiving guide piece 942 includes a left ball receiving guide piece 942L extending upward to the left from the rotating shaft 941 and a right ball receiving guide piece 942R extending to the upper right. It is provided in a line-symmetrical relationship with the guide piece 942R. The ball receiving guide piece 942 distributes the game ball 99 to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 according to the orientation and rotation direction when the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99 . For example, the ball receiving guide piece 942 is positioned such that the axis of symmetry between the left ball receiving guide piece 942L and the right ball receiving guide piece 942R rotates to the left of the vertical axis, and the distribution member 94 rotates counterclockwise. When the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 by the left ball receiving guide piece 942L, the axis of symmetry is at a position rotated to the right side of the vertical axis, and the distribution member 94 rotates clockwise. When there is, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 by the right ball receiving guide piece 942R.

The eccentric portion 943 is integrated with the rotating shaft 941 via a supporting portion 946 extending downward on the front side of the rotating shaft 941 along the axis of symmetry between the left ball receiving guide piece 942L and the right ball receiving guide piece 942R. ing. The eccentric portion 943 has a columnar shape extending in the same direction as the rotating shaft 941 and is offset to the left with respect to the support portion 946 . As a result, the distribution member 94 stops at a position rotated counterclockwise in a stationary state. As a result, the ball-receiving guide piece 942 is inclined slightly to the left in the stationary state (the left ball-receiving guide piece 942L is slightly lower than the right ball-receiving guide piece 942R). It stands by while the game balls 99 are distributed. In the distribution member 94, the eccentric portion 943 causes the ball receiving guide piece 942 to be tilted to the left in a stationary state, so that the game balls 99 introduced from the introduction port 920 of the distribution device 92 are received by the ball receiver. Maintaining a stationary state when received by the guide piece 942 can be suppressed. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 when the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state, it is possible to suppress the ball clogging of the game ball 9 . In addition, when the amusement arcade opens, the distributing member 94 distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 921, which is advantageous to the player when the amusement arcade opens. Countermeasures can be taken. Note that the eccentric portion 943 is not limited to a cylindrical shape, and may have a shape other than a cylindrical shape such as a spherical shape, a hemispherical shape, or a prismatic shape.

The load generating portion 944 is a leaf spring and extends downward behind the rotating shaft 941 along the axis of symmetry between the left ball receiving and guiding piece 942L and the right ball receiving and guiding piece 942R. When the load generator 944 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, it interferes with the rotation restrictor 945 provided below the distribution member 94 to generate an elastic force. As the plate spring, a plate spring made of metal or resin is preferably used.

The rotation restricting portion 945 has an upwardly-opening U-shape in which a pair of restricting pieces 948 and 949 formed as rigid bodies or substantially rigid bodies extend upward from the left and right edges of the base portion 947 . Here, that the rotation restricting portion 945 is rigid or substantially rigid means that the rotation restricting portion 945 is not deformed at all or hardly deformed when the load generating portion 944 interferes with the rotation restricting portion 945 . The rotation restricting portion 945 is arranged such that the load generating portion 944 is positioned between the pair of restricting pieces 948 and 949 . Therefore, the load generating portion 944 generates an elastic force by being elastically deformed when it interferes with either of the pair of restricting pieces 948 and 949 . The elastic force generated by the load generator 944 acts as a force to rotate the distribution member 94 in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation when the elastic force is generated. For example, as shown in FIGS. 82A and 82B, when the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise, it interferes with the regulation piece 949 and elastic force is generated in the load generating portion 944. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 82(B) to 82(D), the load generator 944 rotates the distribution member 94 clockwise. On the contrary, as shown in FIGS. 82(C) and 82(D), when the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise, it interferes with the regulation piece 948 and the load generating portion 944 is elastically deformed. When an elastic force is generated as a result, the load generator 944 rotates the distribution member 94 counterclockwise. Note that the rotation restricting portion 945 may be configured with only a pair of restricting pieces 948 and 949 without the base portion 947 . Moreover, the restricting pieces 948 and 949 may be formed as elastic bodies. In this case, the regulation pieces 948 and 949 are elastically deformed when they interfere with the load generation section 944 , thereby generating an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94 .

Further, the restricting piece 948 is provided with a detecting portion 95 at a portion where the load generating portion 944 interferes. The detection unit 95 is a piezoelectric element, and generates voltage when the load generation unit 944 interferes with it. That is, by monitoring the output from the detection section 95, it is possible to detect that the load generation section 944 is interfering with the regulation piece 948. FIG. When the load generating portion 944 interferes with the restricting piece 948, the axis of symmetry between the left ball receiving and guiding piece 942L and the right ball receiving and guiding piece 942R is at a position rotated to the left of the vertical axis. Based on the output of 95, it can be known that the distribution unit 95 is in a state of distributing game balls to the second path 922.例文帳に追加Note that the detection unit 95 may be a contact switch or an optical sensor instead of the piezoelectric element.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the distribution member 94, in the stationary state, is in an attitude slightly tilted to the left (in which the left ball receiving guide piece 942L is slightly lower than the right ball receiving guide piece 942R). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when a game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 while the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state, the game ball 99 is received by the ball receiving guide piece 942. The distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise. At this time, the load generating portion 944 is elastically deformed by the load generating portion 944 interfering with the restricting piece 949, and an elastic force is generated in the load generating portion 944 to rotate the distribution member 94 clockwise. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(B), when the distribution member 94 rotates to a predetermined position, for example, when the tip of the left ball receiving/inducing piece 942L is positioned below the horizontal, the game ball 99 is left ball receiving. It is distributed to the first passage 921 (see FIG. 80) of the distribution device 92 by the guide piece 942L.

Here, when the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 by the distribution member 94, an elastic force is generated in the load generating section 944 to rotate the distribution member 94 clockwise. Therefore, the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise by the elastic force of the load generating portion 944 . At this time, as shown in FIGS. 83(C) and 83(D) , the load generating portion 944 interferes with the restricting piece 948, causing the load generating portion 944 to be elastically deformed. An elastic force is generated to rotate counterclockwise. After that, when the game ball 99 is not introduced into the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 repeats rotation in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. stops. That is, the distribution member 94 is in a state in which the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the first passage 921 (distributable state) and a state in which the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 until the distribution member 94 becomes stationary. (distributable state) is repeated a plurality of times to rotate.

In the rotating operation of the distribution member 94 by such an elastic force, the unit rotation period Ts (see FIG. 88) of the distribution member 94 is a positive integral multiple of the shooting interval Th (see FIG. 88) of the game ball 99. (eg, 1-fold to 3-fold, preferably 1-fold or 2-fold) or a value close to it (eg, positive integer multiple ± 15% range, preferably positive integer multiple ± 10% range, more preferably positive ±5% range of integral multiples of ). For example, when the firing interval Th is 0.6 seconds, the unit rotation period Ts is set in the range of 0.51 seconds to 0.69 seconds or 1.02 seconds to 1.38 seconds. In addition, when a plurality of intervals are set as the shooting intervals of the game balls 99, the unit rotation period Ts of the distribution member 94 is a positive integral multiple of the shortest shooting interval or a value close to it.

Here, FIG. 88 shows the change over time of the rotation angle when the distribution member 94 rotates, and the output voltage, firing voltage, and lighting/lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 at the detection unit 95 corresponding to this change over time. It shows the relationship of extinguishing control. In FIG. 88, the rotation angle is 0° when the left ball receiving and guiding piece 942K and the right ball receiving and guiding piece 942R are symmetrical with respect to the vertical axis. Further, in the example of FIG. 88, the unit rotation period Ts starts from the left switching point Pl at which the distribution member 94 switches the rotation direction from the counterclockwise direction (left rotation direction) to the clockwise direction (right rotation direction), for example. , it is the time required to reach the left switching point Pl again via the right switching point Pr at which the rotational direction is switched from the clockwise direction to the counterclockwise direction. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the unit rotation period Ts is twice the firing interval Th.

In this way, the unit rotation cycle Ts is a positive integral multiple of the firing interval Th or a value close to it, so that the game balls 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 (distributable state) and the game balls can be distributed. It becomes easy to link with the firing timing of 99. Also, if the timing of launching the game ball 99 can be matched with the timing of distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, the game ball can be distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop shot after that. It is also possible to For example, in the example of FIG. 88, after matching the launch timing of the game ball 99 with the timing of distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, the launching of one ball and the stopping of one ball are repeated. It is also possible to distribute game balls to the second path 922 with a high probability. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible for the game ball 99 to pass through the second passage 922 with a high probability depending on the skill of the player.

Further, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 while the distribution member 94 is rotating, the posture and rotation direction of the distribution member 94 when the game ball 99 is received by the distribution member 94 is in a state of distributing the game ball 99 to the first passage 921, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921.例文帳に追加On the contrary, if the posture and the rotation direction when the game ball 99 is received by the distribution member 94 are in a state of distributing the game ball 99 to the second passage 922, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922. .

By the way, some conventional game machines have a sorting device that alternately sorts game balls between a first starter and a second starter whose function is different from that of the first starter. However, in the conventional sorting device, the game balls are physically alternately sorted to the first starting section and the second starting section regardless of the player's intention, and thus the player has no freedom in playing the game. There is concern that the game will become monotonous and the interest in the game will decrease. In addition, since half of the game balls are entered in the first starting part, the distribution device is difficult to adopt when a special game is to be executed mainly with the second special game as in the variable probability game state.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when game balls are introduced into the distribution device 92 while the distribution member 94 is stationary, the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. It can be rotated alternately in the circular direction. Further, when the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99 while the distribution member 94 is rotating, the game ball 99 moves through the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 according to the receiving posture of the game ball 99 and the like. be distributed to either Since the distribution member 94 can be visually recognized from the outside as described above, the player can confirm the posture and rotation direction of the distribution member 94 . As a result, the player can launch the game ball 99 while confirming the posture (center of gravity) of the distribution member 94. It is possible to launch the game ball 99 at a timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by the so-called stop hitting. Also, by alternately hitting the game balls 99 one by one into the left area and the right area of the game board 31, it is possible to hit the game balls 99 at the timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second path 922. Become.

The synchronizing lamp 923 shown in FIGS. 79 and 80 is a light source such as a light emitting diode, and is lit when the distribution member 94 is in a posture of distributing the game balls to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92. The member 94 informs the player that it is time to distribute the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 . This synchronizing lamp 923 is provided at a portion that does not hinder the visual recognition of the distribution member 94 . A housing 924 of the sorting device 92 is provided with a lighting mark 925 in front of the synchronization lamp 923 . The lighting mark 925 includes a light-transmitting region 9251 that transmits light, and a mask region 9252 that has a low light transmittance and does not transmit light or hardly transmits light (see FIG. 88). The light-transmissive region 9251 is a star-shaped transparent or colorless portion that transmits light from the synchronization lamp 923 when the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on. The mask region 9252 has a circular outer edge around the translucent region 9251 so as to surround the translucent region 9251 . The mask region 9252 makes it possible to emphasize the light transmitted through the translucent region 9251 when the synchronizing lamp 923 is lit, so that the lighting of the synchronizing lamp 923 can be clearly recognized. Therefore, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 922 as in mode C are difficult to enter the second starting port 315, and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 922 are distributed to the second starting port 315. In this case, the game ball 99 can be launched into the right area of the game board 31 while confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on. When the operation time of the electric support member 93 is long as in mode E, even if the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 when the electric support member 93 is operated, the second starting port 315 Since the game ball 99 can be entered, even if the game ball 99 is continuously hit at the minimum shooting interval without performing a stopping shot etc., the game ball 99 automatically moves between the first passage 921 and the second passage. 922 alternately.

Note that the light-transmitting region 9251 is not limited to a star shape, and may be, for example, a circle or a character. When the translucent area 9251 is formed as characters, for example, it may be a display suggesting the launch timing of the game ball 99, such as "hit!", "hit", "CHANCE", "GO", etc. It may be a display suggesting the rotation direction or posture of the sorting member 94, such as "right" or "left." In addition, the outer edge of the mask region 9252 may be set according to the shape of the translucent region 9251, etc., and is not limited to a circular shape.

The synchronizing lamp 923 is controlled to be turned on and off based on the output voltage from the detector 95 according to commands set by the MPU 41 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88, when the output voltage from the detection unit 95 is detected (when it is not 0 V), the MPU 41 sets a synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the synchronization lamp 923, and the detection unit 95 If the output voltage from is not detected (is 0V), a sync lamp off command is set to turn off the sync lamp 923 . On the other hand, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns on or off the synchronous lamp 923 according to the synchronous lamp lighting command and the synchronous lamp turning off command set by the MPU 41 . In other words, the synchronization lamp 923 is lit while the load generator 944 of the distribution member 94 is interfering with the detector 95 . The synchronization lamp 923 may be lit when the output voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined positive value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the synchronization lamp 923 from turning on unnecessarily when the output voltage is detected due to vibration or the like.

By the way, since the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is provided with a through gate 319' for performing a lottery per normal drawing for opening the second start port 315, compared to the first passage 921, Distributing the game balls 99 to the second path 922 is advantageous for the player. In this embodiment, since the distribution member 94 can be visually recognized, the game ball 99 is launched at a timing at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by stopping hitting, and the game ball 99 is sent to the second passage 922. It becomes possible to aim and shoot so that However, it may be difficult for some players to launch the game ball 99 at the timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second path 922 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the load generator 944 of the distribution member 94 is interfering with the detector 95, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on. The timing at which the load generating section 944 interferes with the detecting section 95 is a state in which the game ball 99 is likely to be guided to the second passage 922 . Therefore, by notifying the player of the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second path 922 by the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923, the game ball 99 can be launched with the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923 as a guideline. becomes possible. As a result, the player can easily guide the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 as compared with the case where the player launches the game ball 99 while visually confirming the orientation and rotation direction of the distribution member 94. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily hit the game ball 99 at the timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second path 922.例文帳に追加

Also, the timing at which the game balls 99 are easily guided to the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94 and the timing at which the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 are matched or substantially matched. It is also possible. In this case, the lighting timing of the synchronization lamp 923 not only informs the player of the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922, The player is notified of the launch timing of the . When the timing of launching the game ball 99 is notified by the synchronizing lamp 923, the player has a better timing to pass the second passage 922 than when the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922 is notified. , the game ball 99 can be easily launched.

Here, FIGS. 89A and 89B are diagrams showing examples of tables used in the main controller of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 89A is an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 89B is an example of a mode data table. In addition, in this embodiment, the success/failure table for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type distribution table, and the success/failure table for the general drawing lottery are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (FIGS. 12A to 12D ), see FIGS. 13(C) and 13(D)), the jackpot types include 2R variable jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, 5R variable jackpot, 5R normal jackpot, and 16R variable jackpot.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 89(A) prescribes the relationship between mode transition conditions and mode transition destinations, and the mode data table shown in FIG. 89(B) prescribes the contents of the special figure gaming state mode. In this embodiment, mode A, mode B and mode E are included as modes in the special figure gaming state. The contents of these modes A, B and E are the same as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13B), and the mode E, mode B and mode A are advantageous to the player in that order. state.

Mode A is a mode that shifts when the upper limit number of special figure games ends, that is, when the time saving ends in mode B which is a time saving mode limited to the number of times described later. Mode A is a jackpot low-probability mode in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12A). Mode A is a non-time-saving mode in which the variable display time of normal symbols is not shortened (time saving), and the variable display time of normal symbols is the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319' passes the position of the electric support member 93, the normal pattern is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery becomes a win. Even if the electric support member 93 is actuated, it cannot be expected that the second starting port 315 will be won by the support of the electric support member 93 . In addition, mode A is a low probability per normal pattern lottery that a normal per symbol lottery is performed based on a normal symbol low probability success or failure table (see FIG. 13 (C)) in which the probability of winning the lottery result in the normal per symbol lottery is low. mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 89B, in mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is short (for example, 0.05 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is winning. Therefore, in mode A, the probability that the game ball 99 launched into the right area of the game board 31 and introduced into the sorting device 92 enters the second start hole 315 is extremely low. In addition, the first starting port 314 is not provided in the right region of the game board 31, and the first starting port 314 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31 so that the game ball 99 can be entered when hit left. there is Therefore, in mode A, it is not a good idea to hit the game ball 99 to the right in order to introduce the game ball 99 into the sorting device 92, and it is better to hit the game ball 99 left to enter the first start port 314. encouraged.

Mode B is a mode that shifts after the normal jackpot game (2R normal jackpot game and 5R normal jackpot game) ends (see FIG. 89(A)), and is a mode (game state) more advantageous to the player than mode A. be. Mode B is a jackpot low-probability mode in which the probability that the jackpot lottery will result in a jackpot is low as in mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(A)). . In addition, unlike mode A, mode B is a time-saving mode that is a shortened variable display time in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shorter than the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) of the non-time-saving mode. The mode is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). In other words, mode B is a limited time reduction mode in which an upper limit is set for the number of times of time reduction, but is more advantageous than mode A because it is a time reduction mode. Here, the shortened variable display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 319 ′ can enter the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 93 , and the time between the through gate 319 ′ and the electric support member 93 is set. It is set according to the positional relationship (distance, etc.) and the operating time of the electric support member 93, and is, for example, about 0.004 to 0.2 seconds. In addition, as shown in FIG. 89B, in mode B, similarly to mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.05 seconds) when the lottery for the normal symbol is won, but the electric support The support of the member 36 allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315 . Therefore, in mode B, unlike in mode A, it is recommended to hit the game ball 99 to the right side of the game board 31 by striking to the right.

In mode B, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot and the upper limit number of special game games are played, the mode shifts to mode A as described above. In addition, in the present embodiment, an effect that clearly indicates that it is mode B (time saving mode) may be executed in the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341 . In this case, an effect may be performed by the effect means as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of being a definite variable.

Mode E is a mode that shifts after the definite variable jackpot game (2R definite variable jackpot game, 5R definite variable jackpot game and 16R definite variable jackpot game) ends (see FIG. 89 (A)), mode A, mode B and mode E This is the most advantageous mode for the player. Mode E is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is high, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 12(B)). . In addition, mode E, like mode B, is a time-saving mode that is a shortened variable display time in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shorter than the normal variable display time (for example, 30 seconds) of the non-short-time mode, and the next jackpot. It is also a guaranteed jackpot guaranteed time saving mode. In addition, in the mode E, it is specified that the variable probability gaming state (high-probability mode) is produced in the production means such as the symbol display unit 341 and the like.

In mode E, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is long (for example, 1 second) when winning the normal symbol lottery (see FIG. 89(B))). In the mode E in which the electric support member 93 operates for a long time, the game ball passing through the second passage 922 when the result of the normal drawing winning lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the second passage 922 is a win. Not only 99 but also the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 can enter the second starting port 315 which is more advantageous than the first starting port 314 . Therefore, in mode E, it is recommended to hit the game ball 99 to the right side of the game board 31 to hit the right side.

It is also conceivable that the electric support member 36 operates a plurality of times with respect to one win in the normal symbol win lottery. For example, in mode E, it is conceivable to operate the electric support member 93 five times for 0.2 seconds, thereby making the total operating time of the electric support member 93 1 second. However, the one operation time and the number of times of operation of the electric accessory 93 described above are examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operation time of the electric support member 93 in mode E is not limited to one second, and can be changed as appropriate.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the main controller of the present embodiment.

In the main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 performs sensor detection processing (step S1001), update processing of random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2 (step S1002), update processing of counters C1 to C4 (step S1003), start winning processing (step S1004), launch control processing (step S1005), and through gate processing (step S1006) are executed. Further, in the main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the MPU 41 executes synchronous lamp control processing for controlling lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 (step S3201).

[Synchronous lamp control processing]
Here, FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the synchronous lamp control process, lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 are controlled according to the attitude of the distribution member 94 based on the output of the detection unit 95 .

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
In the synchronous lamp control process, first, the MPU 41 acquires the output voltage from the detection unit 95 (step S3301), and determines whether or not the output voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0 V) (step S3302). If the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3303, and if the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: No), shifts the process to step S3306.

<Steps S3303 to S3305>
When the output voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0 V) (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3303). Here, the sync lamp lighting flag indicates whether or not the sync lamp 923 is lighting, and is set to ON in step S3305, which will be described later. That is, in step S3303, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the synchronization lamp 923 is on. When the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes) and the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 maintains the lighting state of the synchronization lamp 923. The synchronous lamp control process ends. On the other hand, when the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3303: No), the MPU 41 sets the synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3304) and sets the synchronous lamp lighting flag to ON (step S3305). , the synchronous lamp control process ends. That is, when the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes), and when the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3303: No), the synchronous lamp 923 is turned on to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. A synchronous lamp lighting command for lighting is set (step S3304), a synchronous lamp lighting flag indicating that the synchronous lamp 923 is lighting is set to ON (step S3305), and the synchronous lamp control processing is terminated. .

The synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S3304 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns on the synchronization lamp 923 in step S3507 in the command determination process in FIG. 93, which will be described later. As a result, the player confirms that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on in the translucent area 9251, and the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture capable of distributing the game balls 99 to the second passage 922. can recognize Also, the timing at which the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture capable of distributing the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 and the timing at which the game balls 99 can pass through the second passage 922 are shot. match or substantially match, the player can recognize that the game ball launch timing allows the game ball 99 to pass through the second passage 922 . By confirming the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent area 9251, the player can determine the timing at which the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922 (when the game ball 99 enters the second start port 315). It becomes possible to launch the game ball 99 at an easy timing). When confirming the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent area 9251, the player more easily puts the game ball 99 into the second start port 315 than visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94. It becomes possible to enter the ball.

<Steps S3306 to S3308>
When the output voltage is not equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0 V) (step S3302: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the synchronous lamp 923 is lighting, and the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON. (step S3306). If the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: No), and if the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 of the synchronization lamp 923 A synchronous lamp extinguishing command for extinguishing the synchronous lamp 923 is set (step S3307), the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3308), and the synchronous lamp control process is terminated. Further, when the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold voltage (step S3302: No), and when the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3306: No), the MPU 41 turns off the synchronization lamp 923. In order to maintain the state, the synchronous lamp control process is terminated.

The synchronous lamp extinguishing command set in step S3307 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 turns off the light in step S3509 in the command determination process in FIG. 93, which will be described later. As a result, the player confirms that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off in the light-transmitting area 9251, so that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture that makes it difficult to distribute the game balls 99 to the second passage 922. can recognize

[Main processing]
In this embodiment, the main process is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, but unlike the first embodiment described above, mode A, mode B and mode E as the type of special figure gaming state There are three and there are no modes C and D. Therefore, in the present embodiment, part of the steps related to the modes of various processes in the main process are different from those in the above-described first embodiment. Specifically, in the ordinary electric accessory control process of FIG. 18 (step S1305 of the main process of FIG. 17), "Mode A to Mode C?" In special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1308 of the main processing in FIG. 17), "mode C or mode E?" in step S1801 becomes "mode E?". Then, the game state transition process of step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 is executed as the process described below.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of this embodiment.

<Step S3401>
In this embodiment, as described above, there are three types of special figure gaming states, mode A, mode B and mode E, and mode C and mode D are absent. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92, in the game state transition processing of this embodiment, in the game state transition processing of FIG. "Turn off the mode B flag or mode D flag" becomes "turn off the mode B flag" (step S3401).

<Step S3402>
MPU41, when ending the jackpot game (steps S1901, S1914 and S1915), whether the lottery result flag set to ON in step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 is a normal jackpot flag, that is, It is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3402). When the normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403, and when the normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3407.

<Steps S3403 to S3406>
In step S3403, when the normal jackpot game (2R normal jackpot game or 5R normal jackpot game) ends, the MPU 41 sets on a time saving flag indicating that it is a limited time saving mode. At this time, MPU41 sets the upper limit of the number of times of time saving as a time saving counter. The number of times of time saving is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as a time saving counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode B (step S3404) and sets the mode B flag to ON (step S3405). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S3406), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3407 to S3409>
At step S3407, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to mode E, and further sets the mode E flag to ON (step S3408). That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes) and the normal jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), the probability variation jackpot flag (2R probability variation jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) is set to ON. Therefore, in steps S3407 and S3408, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E, which is the transition destination mode after the end of the probability variable jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 turns off the probability variable jackpot flag set to be turned on (step S3409), and terminates the game state transition process.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S1954 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the command determination process, a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 93, in the command determination process of this embodiment, first, in step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. FIG. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3501: No), it ends the command determination process. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. Note that the commands stored in the unprocessed command storage area are deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S3501 and becomes the object of processing. remembered.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S3502: No), the process proceeds to step S3506.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a combination of stop symbols of main symbols, a variation type, and an effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table and effect type table stored in advance in the ROM 511 , and the counter value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 . Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 2R normal jackpot, sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to ON. is a 2R probability variable jackpot, sets the 2R probability variable jackpot flag to ON, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot Set the jackpot flag on.

The effect type table includes, for example, a normal reach effect table corresponding to normal reach, a super reach effect table corresponding to super reach, and a special reach effect table corresponding to special reach.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S1953 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the count value of the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols in the symbol display section 341, the variation type, and the effect type, and terminates the command determination process. Let The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols, the variation type, and the effect type determined in step S3503. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image of the main symbol and the effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in this embodiment) until a preset variable display time elapses. Then, the variations of the main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the big win lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next variation game or processing corresponding to the big win game is executed. Here, during the variable display of the main symbols, an effect corresponding to the contents of the variation type and the effect type specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
In step S3506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a synchronous lamp lighting command. The synchronous lamp lighting command is a command for lighting the synchronous lamp 923, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 at step S3304 in the synchronous lamp control process of FIG. 91 as described above. Here, if the received command is a synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 51 lights the synchronous lamp 923 (step S3707). On the other hand, when the received command is not the synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3508.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
In step S3508, it is determined whether or not the received command is a synchronous lamp turn-off command. The synchronous lamp extinguishing command is a command indicating to extinguish the synchronous lamp 923, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 at step S3307 in the synchronous lamp control process of FIG. 91 as described above. Here, if the received command is the synchronous lamp extinguishing command (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 51 extinguishes the synchronous lamp 923 (step S3709). On the other hand, when the received command is not the synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3508: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3510.

<Step S3510>
In step S3510, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing.

As described above, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a distribution device that alternately distributes game balls to the first starting section and the second starting section having a function different from that of the first starting section. Unlike conventional game machines, the distribution member 94 can be alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by introducing game balls into the distribution device 92 . Specifically, when the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 by the eccentric portion 943. Therefore, when the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state, distribution is performed. When the game ball 99 is introduced into the device 92 , the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 by rotating the distribution member 94 counterclockwise. At this time, the load generating portion 944 is elastically deformed by the load generating portion 944 interfering with the restricting piece 948, and an elastic force is generated in the load generating portion 944 to rotate the distribution member 94 counterclockwise. Therefore, the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise by the elastic force of the load generating portion 944 . After that, when the game ball 99 is not introduced into the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 repeats rotation in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. stops. That is, the distribution member 94 is in a state in which the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the first passage 921 (distributable state) and a state in which the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 until the distribution member 94 becomes stationary. (distributable state) is repeated a plurality of times.

Further, when the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99 while the distribution member 94 is rotating, the game ball 99 moves through the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 according to the receiving posture of the game ball 99 and the like. be distributed to either The distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99 during rotation and distributes the game ball 99 to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, thereby continuing the rotation operation in the same manner as before attenuation.

Here, since the distribution member 94 is visible from the outside as described above, the rotational movement of the distribution member 94 can be visually recognized, and the posture (center of gravity) of the distribution member 94 can be confirmed. It becomes possible to perform 99 launches. Therefore, the player can hit the game ball 99 by repeating the operation and non-operation of the ball stop switch 21b, that is, the game ball 99 can be hit at the timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922. be possible. Since the unit rotation cycle Ts of the distribution member 94 is a positive integral multiple of the shooting interval Th of the game balls 99 or a value close to it, the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 (distributable state) and the launch timing of the game ball 99 can be easily linked. Further, if the timing of launching the game ball 99 can be matched with the timing of being distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, the game ball can be distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop shot after that. It is also possible to

In addition, a detecting portion 95 is provided at a portion of the restricting piece 948 with which the load generating portion 944 interferes. can be detected. In the state where the load generating portion 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948, the game balls are distributed to the second passage 922. It is possible to know that it is in a state of distributing game balls. Specifically, in this embodiment, while the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 is interfering with the detection portion 95, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on, thereby distributing the game balls 99 to the second passage 922. The player is notified that the timing is easy. As a result, the player can launch the game ball 99 by turning on and off the synchronizing lamp 923. Therefore, the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is easily guided to the second path 922, that is, the ball It becomes easy to find the timing for changing the stop switch 21b from the operating state to the non-operating state.

<Fortieth to Seventy-third Embodiments>
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the load generating portion 944 provided in the distribution member 94 repeatedly interferes with the regulating pieces 948 and 949 of the rotation regulating portion 945, thereby generating an elastic force in the load generating portion 944. A case has been described in which the distribution member 94 rotates due to the elastic force. On the other hand, the 40th to 73rd embodiments are common in that the distribution member is rotated by an elastic force, but there is a configuration that generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution member. This is different from the thirty-ninth embodiment described above. In the 40th to 73rd embodiments, since the distribution member rotates due to the elastic force generated by the rotation of the distribution member, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment. can. The differences between the fortieth to seventy-third embodiments and the thirty-ninth embodiment described above will be described below with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the drawings referred to in the description of each embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of other embodiments.

(Forty-seventh embodiment)
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 formed as a plate spring protrudes downward behind the rotating shaft 941, and the rotation restricting portion 945 interfering with the load generating portion 944 is the load generating portion. It was provided in a lower position overall than 944. On the other hand, in the fortieth to forty-seventh embodiments, the configuration of the load generating section and the rotation restricting section is different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment.

(40th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, in the distribution device 92 of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944A of the distribution member 94A protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941, and the rotation restricting portion 945A is positioned further than the distribution member 94A. It is generally placed upwards.

The rotation restricting portion 945A has a base portion 947A and a pair of restricting pieces 948A and 949A extending downward from the base portion 947A, and is formed in a downward opening U-shape. A detecting portion 95 is provided on the restricting piece 949A.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, the projecting direction of the load generating portion 944A and the direction of the rotation restricting portion 945A are different from those of the thirty-ninth embodiment, but the same operation as that of the thirty-ninth embodiment is performed. It works.

(Forty-first embodiment)
Here, FIG. 95(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the sorting member of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 95(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. is. As shown in FIGS. 95(A) and 95(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment has a distribution member 94B with a rotation shaft 941 as in the thirty-ninth embodiment. A rotation regulating portion 945 is provided which has a load generating portion 944 projecting downward from the distribution member 94B and interferes with the load generating portion 944 when the distribution member 94B rotates. The sorting device 92 of this embodiment further has a load generating portion 944A in which the sorting member 94B protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941 opposite to the load generating portion 944, as in the fortieth embodiment. , a rotation restricting portion 945B with which the load generating portion 944A interferes when the distribution member 94B rotates. In other words, the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment is configured by combining the thirty-ninth embodiment and the fortieth embodiment.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, since the configuration is a combination of the thirty-ninth embodiment and the fortieth embodiment, the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment and the fortieth embodiment play. Further, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944 and the load generating portion 944A protrude in opposite directions, and these load generating portions 944 and 944A interfere with the rotation restricting portions 945 and 945B at the same timing. . Therefore, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, not only can the two load generating sections 944 and 944A generate an elastic force, but also the impact when the load generating sections 944 and 944A interfere with the rotation restricting sections 945 and 945B is alleviated. can. As a result, even if the load generating portions 944 and 944A interfere with the repeated rotation restricting portions 945 and 945B, damage to the load generating portions 944 and 944A can be suppressed.

(Forty-second and forty-third embodiments)
Here, FIG. 96(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in the 42nd embodiment, and FIG. 96(B) is an example of the main part of the sorting device in the 43rd embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the forty-second and forty-third embodiments includes the same distribution member 94B as in the forty-first embodiment. However, the configuration of the rotation restricting portion 945 is different from that of the forty-first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96A, in the forty-second embodiment, the rotation restricting portion 945C is formed in a case shape surrounding the load generating portion 944 and the load generating portion 944A of the distribution member 94B. The rotation restricting portion 945C has a pair of side walls 948C and 949C extending between the upper wall 9471C and the lower wall 9472C. The pair of side walls 948C and 949C interfere with the load generating portion 944 and the load generating portion 944A when the distribution member 94B rotates. The pair of side walls 948C and 949C face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, and the side wall 948C is provided with a detection section 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like. The rotation restricting portion 945C may have a pair of side walls 948C and 949C, and one or both of the upper wall 9471C and the lower wall 9472C may be omitted.

The distribution device 92 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94B similar to that of the forty-first embodiment, and the load generating sections 944 and 944A interfere with the side walls 948C and 949C of the rotation restricting section 94C at the same timing. . Therefore, even in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, not only can the two load generators 944 and 944A generate an elastic force, but the load generators 944 and 944A may repeatedly interfere with the rotation restrictors 945 and 945A. However, damage to the load generators 944 and 944A can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96(B), in the forty-third embodiment, the rotation restricting portion includes a pair of restricting pieces 948D and 949D. These regulating pieces 948D and 949D are arranged vertically with a predetermined interval therebetween, and the regulating piece 948D is provided with a detection section 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94B rotates, the load generating section 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948D of the rotation regulation section, and the load generation section 944 interferes with the regulation piece 949D. 944A interfering with the state are repeated. In the present embodiment, compared with the above-described 42nd embodiment and the like having the same distribution member 94B, the distribution member 94B can be rotated using elastic force with a simple configuration.

(Forty-fourth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 97(A) is a perspective view showing an example of a sorting member of the sorting device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 97(B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. is. As shown in FIGS. 97(A) and 97(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a distribution member 94E in which a load generating portion 944E protrudes to the right from a rotating shaft 941 and rotates. The restricting portion 945E is provided entirely to the right of the distribution member 94E.

The rotation restricting portion 945E has a base portion 947E and a pair of restricting pieces 948E and 949E extending leftward from the base portion 947E, and is formed in a left-opening U-shape. A detecting portion 95 is provided on the restricting piece 948E.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, the projecting direction of the load generating portion 944E and the direction of the rotation restricting portion 945E are different from those of the thirty-ninth embodiment, but the same operation as that of the thirty-ninth embodiment is performed. It works.

(Forty-fifth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 98(A) is a perspective view showing an example of a sorting member of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 98(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. is. As shown in FIGS. 98(A) and 98(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment has a distribution member 94F with a rotation shaft 941, as in the forty-fourth embodiment. A rotation restricting portion 945E having a load generating portion 944E protruding rightward from the distribution member 94F interferes with the load generating portion 944E when the distribution member 94F rotates. The sorting device 92 of the present embodiment further has a load generating portion 944F in which the sorting member 94F protrudes from the rotation shaft 941 to the left opposite to the sorting member 94E, and the load is generated when the sorting member 94F rotates. A rotation restricting portion 945F with which the portion 944F interferes is provided.

Since the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment has the load generator 944E as in the forty-fourth embodiment, the same effect as in the forty-fourth embodiment is achieved. Further, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944E and the load generating portion 944F protrude in opposite directions, and these load generating portions 944E and 944F interfere with the rotation restricting portions 945E and 945F at the same timing. . Therefore, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, not only can the two load generating units 944E and 944F generate an elastic force, but also the impact when the load generating units 944E and 944F interfere with the rotation restricting units 945E and 945F is mitigated. can. As a result, even if the load generating portions 944E and 944F interfere with the repeated rotation restricting portions 945E and 945F, damage to the load generating portions 944E and 944F can be suppressed.

(Forty-sixth and forty-seventh embodiments)
Here, FIG. 99(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in the 46th embodiment, and FIG. 99(B) is an example of the main part of the sorting device in the 47th embodiment. FIG. 10 shows.

As shown in FIGS. 99A and 99B, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the forty-sixth and forty-seventh embodiments includes the same distribution member 94F as that of the forty-fifth embodiment. However, the configuration of the rotation restricting portion 945 is different from that of the forty-first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 99A, in the forty-sixth embodiment, the rotation restricting portion 945G is formed in a case shape surrounding the load generating portions 944E and 944F of the distribution member 94F. The rotation restricting portion 945G has a lower wall 948G and an upper wall 949G extending between a pair of side walls 9471G and 9472G. The load generator 944E and the load generator 944F interfere with the lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G when the distribution member 94F rotates. The lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, and the lower wall 948G is provided with a detection unit 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like. The rotation restricting portion 945G may have a lower wall 948G and an upper wall 949G, and one or both of the pair of side walls 9471G and 9472G may be omitted.

The distribution device 92 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94F similar to that of the forty-fifth embodiment described above, and the load generating sections 944E and 944F are configured to rotate the lower wall 948G or the upper wall 949G of the rotation restricting section 94G at the same timing. interfere with Therefore, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, not only can elastic force be generated by the two load generating portions 944E and 944F, but also the load generating portions 944E and 944F can rotate the lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G of the repetitive rotation restricting portion 945G. Even in the case of interference with the load generators 944E and 944F, damage to the load generators 944E and 944F can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(B), in the forty-seventh embodiment, the rotation restricting portion includes a pair of restricting pieces 948H and 949H. These regulating pieces 948H and 949H are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval therebetween, and the regulating piece 948H is provided with a detecting portion 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94F rotates, the load generating portion 944F interferes with the regulation piece 948H of the rotation regulation portion, and the load generating portion 944E with the regulation piece 949H. interfering with each other is repeated. In this embodiment, compared with the forty-fifth embodiment and the like having the same distribution member 94F, the distribution member 94H can be rotated using elastic force with a simple configuration.

It should be noted that the load generating portion may project leftward from the rotating shaft, and the rotation restricting portion may be arranged leftward of the load generating portion as a whole. Further, the load generating portion may protrude from the rotating shaft in directions other than the vertical and horizontal directions.

(48th embodiment)
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 is formed as a leaf spring. In contrast, the present embodiment is different from the thirty-ninth embodiment in that the load generating section is provided with a compression coil spring. Further, in this embodiment, since the load generating section includes a compression coil spring, the configuration of the rotation restricting section is also different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 100, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a load generating portion 944I in which the distribution member 94I protrudes downward to the rear side of the rotating shaft 941, and a load generating portion 944I in which the distribution member 94I rotates. It has a left interference surface 9451I and a right interference surface 9452I with which the load generating portion 944I interferes when the load generating portion 944I is engaged.

The load generator 944I includes an arm portion 9441I extending downward from the rotating shaft 941, and a pair of compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I fixed to the tip side of the arm portion 9441I. The pair of compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I includes a left compression coil spring 9442I projecting leftward and slightly upward from the arm portion 9441I and a right compression coil spring 9443I projecting rightward and slightly upward from the arm portion 9441I. The compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I are compressed and generate elastic force when the load generating portion 944I interferes with the interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I due to the rotation of the distribution member 94I. The distribution member 94I is rotated in the opposite direction by the elastic forces generated by the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I. That is, the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I have the same function as the load generator 944 of the thirty-ninth embodiment. A left interference plate 9444I that can interfere with the left interference surface 9451I is fixed to the left compression coil spring 9442I on the tip side thereof. A right interference plate 9445I that can interfere with the right interference surface 9452I is fixed to the right compression coil spring 9443I on the tip side thereof. The interference plates 9444I and 9445I are fixed slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction because the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I project slightly upward in the horizontal direction.

The interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I are rotation restricting portions that interfere with the interference plates 9444I and 9445I of the load generating portion 944I to restrict the rotation of the distributing member 94I when the distributing member 94I rotates. Interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I are inclined similarly to interference plates 9444I and 9445I so as to be in surface contact with interference plates 9444I and 9445I. As a result, when the interference plates 9444I and 9445I interfere with the interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I, the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I can be effectively compressed, and the elastic forces generated by the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I can be efficiently dissipated. It can be used to rotate the distribution member 94I.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94I rotates clockwise, the left interference plate 9444I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I, and the sorting member 94I rotates counterclockwise. In this case, the right interference plate 9445I interferes with the right interference surface 9452I. When the left interference plate 9444I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94I, the left compression coil spring 9442I is compressed and elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9442I. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9442I is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9442I expands due to the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9442I. As a result, the distribution member 94I is rotated counterclockwise. Conversely, when the distribution member 94I is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the right interference plate 9445I interferes with the right interference surface 9452I, thereby generating an elastic force in the right compression coil spring 9443I and compressing the right side. The distribution member 94I is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9443I. Therefore, the distribution member 94I is in a state where the left interference plate 9444I of the load generating section 944I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I due to the clockwise rotation, and the right interference surface 9452I due to the counterclockwise rotation. On the other hand, the state where the right interference plate 9445I of the load generating portion 944I interferes is repeated, so that the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9442I and the right compression coil spring 9443I rotates. Therefore, in the present embodiment as well, although the structures of the load generating portion and the rotation restricting portion are different from those of the thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment can be obtained.

Although FIG. 100 does not show a detection unit for detecting that a game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92, the detection unit is provided in this embodiment as well. is preferred. In this case, the detection section is provided on the right interference surface 9452I or the right interference plate 9445I when configured to include a piezoelectric element, for example. Of course, the detection section may be provided on a portion other than the right interference surface 9452I and the right interference plate 9445I, and may be configured to include a contact switch or an optical sensor.

(Forty-ninth embodiment)
In the forty-eighth embodiment described above, when the load generating portion 944I of the distribution member 94I includes the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I, and the distribution member 94I is rotated by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I. explained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although it is common to the forty-eighth embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated using the elastic force of the compression coil spring, the distribution member generates a load. It is different from the forty-eighth embodiment in that it does not have a portion and a compression coil spring (load acting portion) that generates an elastic force is provided separately from the distribution member.

Here, FIG. 101(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the sorting member of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 101(B) is a cross section showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 101(A) and 101(B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the distribution member 94J includes a load input section 940J. The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment also includes a pair of load acting portions 961J and 962J that interfere with the load input portion 940J that interferes when the distribution member 94J rotates. 100(A) and 100(B), the detection unit for detecting that the game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is not described, but this embodiment Also in terms of the form, it is preferable to provide a detection unit as in the forty-eighth embodiment and the like.

The load input portion 940J of the distribution member 94J protrudes downward from the rotating shaft 941 in the same manner as the load generating portion 944 of the thirty-ninth embodiment. is formed as Here, that the load input portion 940J is rigid or substantially rigid means that the load input portion 940J is not deformed at all or hardly deformed when the load acting portions 961J and 962J interfere with the load input portion 940J. The load input portion 940J has a rotating piece 9401J that is continuous with the rotating shaft 941, and an interference portion 9402J that rotates integrally with the rotating piece 9401J and interferes with the load acting portions 961J and 962J. It is rotatable around axis 941 .

The load acting portions 961J and 962J include a left load acting portion 961J and a right load acting portion 962J. The left load acting portion 961J includes a left compression coil spring 9611J. The left compression coil spring 9611J has a base end fixed to the left fixing surface 9612J and protrudes downward to the right from the left fixing surface 9612J. A left interference plate 9613J is fixed to the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611J. The right load acting portion 962J includes a right compression coil spring 9621J. The right compression coil spring 9621J has its base end fixed to the right fixing surface 9622J and protrudes downward to the left from the right fixing surface 9622J. A right interference plate 9623J is fixed to the tip of the right compression coil spring 9621J.

Here, the left compression coil spring 9611J is arranged downward to the right, and the right compression coil spring 9621J is arranged downward to the left. It is arranged along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc regulation) of 9402J. Also, the left interference plate 9613J and the right interference plate 9623J are arranged on the rotation locus of the interference portion 9402J in the load input portion 940J when the distribution member 94J rotates. Accordingly, when the distribution member 94J rotates, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J or the right interference plate 9623J. The left fixing surface 9612J and the right fixing surface 9622J can be provided by forming through-holes or recesses in the game board 31, and a member having the left fixing surface 9612J and the right fixing surface 9622J can be provided on the game board 31. A fixation can also be provided.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, and interferes when the sorting member 94J rotates counterclockwise. The portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J. When the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left compression coil spring 9611J is compressed and elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9611J. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611J is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611J expands due to the elastic force generated in the left compression coil spring 9611J. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. Conversely, when the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J, thereby generating an elastic force in the right compression coil spring 9621J and compressing the right side. The distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9621J. Therefore, the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise to cause the interference portion 9402J to interfere with the left interference plate 9613J, and rotates counterclockwise to cause the interference portion 9402J to interfere with the right interference plate 9623J. is repeated, the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment can be obtained. be able to.

In addition, the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J are arranged so that their expansion and contraction directions are along the tangential direction of the movement trajectory (arc regulation) of the interference portion 9402J, so that the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J are effectively operated. Since it can be compressed and expanded, the distribution member 94J can be rotated appropriately.

(Fiftieth to fifty-second embodiments)

Here, FIG. 102(A) is a sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in the fiftieth embodiment. FIG. 102(B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the fifty-first embodiment. FIG. 103 is a sectional view showing an example of a main part of a sorting device according to the fifty-second embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 102(A), 102(B) and 103, the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the fiftieth to fifty-second embodiments performs the same sorting as in the forty-ninth embodiment. Although a member 94J is provided, the configuration of the load acting portion is different from that of the forty-ninth embodiment. 102(A), 102(B) and 103 do not show a detection unit for detecting that a game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92. Also in the fiftieth to fifty-second embodiments, it is preferable to provide a detection unit as in the forty-eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), load acting portions 961K and 962K of the fiftieth embodiment include a left load acting portion 961K and a right load acting portion 962K. The left load acting portion 961K includes a left compression coil spring 9611K and a left interference arm 9613K. The left compression coil spring 9611K has a base end fixed to the left fixing surface 9612K, and a tip end of the left compression coil spring 9611K contacts the left interference arm 9613K. The left interference arm 9613K has a base end rotatably fixed by a left rotation support portion 9614K, and a tip end disposed at a position where the interference portion 9402J of the load input portion 940 in the distribution member 94J can interfere. there is The right load acting portion 962K includes a right compression coil spring 9621K and a right interference arm 9623K. The right compression coil spring 9621K has a base end fixed to the right fixing surface 9622K and a tip end contacting the right interference arm 9623K. The base end of the right interference arm 9623K is rotatably fixed by the right rotation support portion 9624K, and the tip end thereof is arranged at a position where the interference portion 9402J of the load input portion 940 in the distribution member 94J can interfere. there is The left fixing surface 9612K and the right fixing surface 9622K can be provided by forming through-holes or recesses in the game board 31, and a member having the left fixing surface 9612K and the right fixing surface 9622K can be provided on the game board 31. A fixation can also be provided.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference part 9402J interferes with the tip of the left interference arm 9613K, and the sorting member 94J rotates counterclockwise. In this case, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623K. When the interference part 9402J interferes with the distal end of the left interference arm 9613K due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left interference arm 9613K rotates clockwise while compressing the left compression coil spring 9611K. An elastic force is generated at 9611K. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611K is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611K expands due to the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611K. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. Conversely, when the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623K, causing the right interference arm 9623K to rotate counterclockwise. Due to the movement, an elastic force is generated in the right compression coil spring 9621K, and the distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the right compression coil spring 9621K. Therefore, the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise to cause the interference portion 9402J to interfere with the left interference arm 9613K, and rotates counterclockwise to cause the interference portion 9402J to interfere with the right interference arm 9623J. is repeated, the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611K and the right compression coil spring 9612K rotates. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment can be obtained. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 102(B), the load acting portions 961L and 962L of the fifty-first embodiment include a left load acting portion 961L and a right load acting portion 962L. The left load acting portion 961L includes a left compression coil spring 9611L. The left compression coil spring 9611L is wholly accommodated in the left accommodating portion 9612L, and the left interference plate 9613L is fixed to the tip portion thereof. The left accommodating portion 9612L is inclined upward to the left, and the left compression coil spring 9611L is arranged upward to the left. The right load acting portion 962L includes a right compression coil spring 9621L. The right compression coil spring 9621L is entirely accommodated in the right accommodating portion 9622L, and the right interference plate 9623L is fixed to the tip portion. The right accommodating portion 9622L is inclined upward to the left, and the right compression coil spring 9621L is arranged upward to the left. Here, the left compression coil spring 9611L is arranged to rise to the left, and the right compression coil spring 9621L is arranged to rise to the right. It is arranged along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc regulation) of 9402J.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, and interferes when the sorting member 94J rotates counterclockwise. The portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L. When the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left compression coil spring 9611L is compressed and elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9611L. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611L is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611L expands due to the elastic force generated in the left compression coil spring 9611L. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. Conversely, when the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L, thereby generating an elastic force in the right compression coil spring 9621L and compressing the right side. The distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9621L. Therefore, the distribution member 94J rotates in the clockwise direction so that the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L, and rotates in the counterclockwise direction so that the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L. is repeated, the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment can be obtained. can be done.

In addition, the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L are arranged so that the direction of expansion and contraction of the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L is along the tangential direction of the movement trajectory (arc regulation) of the interference portion 9402J, thereby effectively compressing the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L. and can be extended, the distribution member 94J can be rotated appropriately.

As shown in FIG. 103, the load acting portion 961M of the fifty-second embodiment comprises a left compression coil spring 9611M and a right compression coil spring 9612M. The compression coil springs 9611M and 9612M are entirely housed in a housing portion 9613M and arranged horizontally. A left interference plate 9614M is fixed to the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611M, and a right interference plate 9615M is fixed to the tip of the right compression coil spring 9612M. The left interference plate 9614M and the right interference plate 9615M are always in contact with the interference portion 9402J of the load input portion 940J of the distribution member 94J. In other words, the interference portion 9402J is located between the left interference plate 9614M and the right interference plate 9615M. Here, when the distribution member 94J is stationary, both the left compression coil spring 9611M and the right compression coil spring 9612M are in a compressed state. is also located on the right side. That is, when the distribution member 94J is stationary, the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed more than the left compression coil spring 9611M.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference portion 9402J moves the left interference plate 9614M leftward, compressing the left compression coil spring 9611M. Here, since the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed compared to the left compression coil spring 9611M in a stationary state, it expands when the interference portion 9402J rotates clockwise, and the right interference plate 9615M follows the interference portion 9402J. to move to the left. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611M is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611M expands due to the elastic force generated in the left compression coil spring 9611M. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. Conversely, when the distribution member 94J rotates counterclockwise, the interference portion 9402J moves the right interference plate 9615M to the right, compressing the right compression coil spring 9612M. At this time, the counterclockwise rotation of the interference portion 9402J causes the left interference plate 9614M to follow the interference portion 9402J and move to the right. Further, when the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed by a certain amount, the right compression coil spring 9612M expands due to the elastic force generated by the right compression coil spring 9612M. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise. Therefore, when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, an elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9611M to rotate the distribution member 94J counterclockwise. The rotation causes the right compression coil spring 9612M to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94J clockwise, thereby rotating the distribution member 94J. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment can be obtained. can be done.

(Fifty-third embodiment)
In the forty-ninth embodiment described above, the load acting portions 961J and 962J provided separately from the distribution member 94J are provided with the compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J, and the distribution member 94J is moved by the elastic force generated in the compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J. The case of rotation has been explained. In contrast, the fifty-third embodiment is common to the forty-ninth embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by utilizing the elastic force of the spring of the load acting portion provided separately from the distribution member. However, it differs from the forty-ninth embodiment in that the spring that generates the elastic force is a torsion coil spring.

Here, FIG. 104(A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 104(B) is a diagram showing the torsion coil spring of FIG. 104(A).

As shown in FIGS. 104(A) and 104(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same sorting member 94J as in the forty-ninth embodiment. Moreover, the load acting portions 961N and 962N of the present embodiment include a left torsion load acting portion 961N having a left torsion coil spring 9611N and a right load acting portion 962N having a right torsion coil spring 9621N. The torsion coil springs 9611N, 9621N have fixed end portions 9612N, 9622N, movable end portions 9613N, 9623N, and coil portions 9614N, 9624N, and have the same configuration.

The fixed terminal portions 9612N, 9622N are portions for fixing the torsion coil springs 9611N, 9621N to the fixed surface 963N, and are formed continuously with the coil portions 9614N, 9624N. The movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N are movable in the direction toward and away from the fixed terminal portions 9612N and 9622N, and are formed continuously with the coil portions 9614N and 9624N. An interference portion 9402J of the distribution member 94J is in contact with the movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N. Here, when the distribution member 94J is stationary as described above, the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the first passage 921 of the distribution device 92 by the eccentric portion 943 . In other words, the distribution member 94J is stopped at a position slightly rotated counterclockwise compared to the case where the left ball receiving and guiding piece 942L and the right ball receiving and guiding piece 942R are in symmetrical positions in the stationary state. When the coil portions 9614N and 9624N are moved to the movable terminal portion 9613N by the rotation of the interference portion 9402J, an elastic force is generated, and the elastic force generated by the coil portions 9614N and 9624N pushes the interference portion 9402J and thus the distribution member 94J in the opposite direction. rotate in the direction

104(A) and 104(B), the detection unit for detecting that the game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 is not described, but this embodiment Also in terms of the form, it is preferable to provide the detectors in the movable terminals 9613N and 9623N, as in the forty-eighth embodiment.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94J rotates clockwise, the interference part 9402J moves the movable terminal part 9613N of the left torsion coil spring 9611N in a direction to approach the fixed terminal part 9612N. As a result, a load is applied to the left torsion coil spring 9611N in the winding direction. As a result, when the distribution member 94J rotates clockwise, an elastic force is generated in the left torsion coil spring 9611N. Further, when the movable terminal portion 9613N of the left torsion coil spring 9611N moves in the winding direction by a certain torsion angle, the elastic force generated by the left torsion coil spring 9611N moves the movable terminal portion 9613N in the direction opposite to the winding direction. Move in the unfolding direction of the direction. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated counterclockwise. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the interference part 9402J moves the movable terminal part 9623N of the right torsion coil spring 9621N in the direction to approach the fixed terminal part 9622N. A load in the winding direction is applied to the right torsion coil spring 9621N. As a result, when the distribution member 94J rotates counterclockwise, an elastic force is generated in the right torsion coil spring 9621N. Further, when the movable terminal portion 9623N of the right torsion coil spring 9621N moves in the winding direction by a certain torsion angle, the elastic force generated by the right torsion coil spring 9621N causes the movable terminal portion 9623N to move in the unfolding direction. . As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise. Therefore, the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J generates an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94J counterclockwise in the left torsion coil spring 9611N, and the counterclockwise direction of the distribution member 94J. The distribution member 94J is rotated by repeating a state in which an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J clockwise is generated in the right torsion coil spring 9612N due to the rotation. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effects as those of the thirty-ninth embodiment can be obtained. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 105, in the present embodiment, the left torsion coil spring 9611N and the right torsion coil spring 9621N are arranged so that the movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N of the distribution member 94J are in the stationary state of the distribution member 94J. It may be arranged apart from the interfering portion 9402J. Also, in the stationary state of the distribution member 94J, the left torsion coil spring 9611N and the right torsion coil spring 9621N contact the interfering portion 9402J at the movable end portion of one of the torsion coil springs, and the other torsion coil spring may be placed apart from the interfering portion 9492J. Furthermore, the torsion coil spring may be configured as part of the distribution member. For example, instead of the compression coil spring, a torsion coil spring can be employed as the load generating portion in the forty-eighth embodiment (see FIG. 100).

(Fifty-fourth to sixty-seventh embodiments)
In the above-described forty-ninth embodiment, the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J of the load acting portions 961J and 962J provided separately from the distribution member 94J. . Also, in the fifty-third embodiment, the case where the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the torsion coil springs 9611N and 9621N of the load acting portions 961N and 962N has been described. On the other hand, in the fifty-fourth to sixty-seventh embodiments, the distribution member is rotated by utilizing the elastic force generated by the load acting portion provided separately from the distribution member. Although it is common to the 53rd embodiment, it is different from the above-described 49th and 53rd embodiments in that it is the leaf spring that generates the elastic force.

(54th embodiment)
Here, FIGS. 106(A) to 106(C) are diagrams showing an example of the main part of the sorting device according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106(A), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a sorting member 94 similar to that of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, and a and a different load acting portion 961O. The distribution member 94 has a load generating portion 944 extending downward from the rotating shaft 941 . The load generating portion 944 is configured as a leaf spring. The load acting portion 961O includes a left leaf spring 9611O and a right leaf spring 9612O. The plate springs 9611O and 9612O extend upward from a horizontal support surface 9613O in a facing state, and when the distribution member 94 rotates, the front end of the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 can interfere with the whole. is arranged below the load acting portion 961O.

As shown in FIG. 106B, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94 rotates clockwise, the load generating portion 944 interferes with the left leaf spring 9611O, causing the load generating portion 944 to and the left leaf spring 9611O are elastically deformed. As a result, when the distribution member 94 rotates clockwise, an elastic force is generated in both the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O. Further, when the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O are elastically deformed by a certain amount, the distribution member 94 rotates counterclockwise due to the elastic forces generated by both the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O.

Conversely, as shown in FIG. 106(C), in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94 rotates counterclockwise, the load generating portion 944 pulls the right leaf spring 9612O. , and both the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O are elastically deformed. Accordingly, when the distribution member 94 rotates counterclockwise, elastic force is generated in both the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O. Further, when the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O are elastically deformed by a certain amount, the distribution member 94 rotates clockwise due to the elastic forces generated by both the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O.

Thus, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94 rotates clockwise, the elastic force of the load generating part 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O rotates the sorting member 94 counterclockwise. and a state in which an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94 clockwise is generated in the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O due to the counterclockwise rotation of the distribution member 94. Thus, the distribution member 94 is rotated. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94 is partially different from the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effects as those of the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment are obtained. can be played.

(Fifty-fifth to Sixtieth Embodiments)
In the fifty-fourth embodiment described above, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 formed as a plate spring protrudes downward behind the rotating shaft 941, and the load acting portion 961O interfering with the load generating portion 944 protrudes upward. A load generating portion 961 O that is formed as leaf springs 9611 O and 9612 O and that interferes with the load generating portion 944 is provided entirely below the load generating portion 944 . In contrast, the fifty-fifth to sixtieth embodiments are common to the fifty-fourth embodiment in that the load generating portion and the load acting portion are configured as leaf springs. The configuration of the parts is different from that of the fifty-fourth embodiment.

(Fifty-fifth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 107A is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the distribution device 92 of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944P1 of the distribution member 94P1 protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941, and the load acting portion 961P1 is the distribution member. It is provided entirely above 94P1. Specifically, the load acting portion 961P1 includes a left leaf spring 9611P1 and a right leaf spring 9612P2, and the leaf springs 9611P1 and 9612P2 extend downward from a horizontal support surface 9613P1 in a facing state.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, the projecting direction of the load generating portion 944P1 is different from that of the fifty-fourth embodiment, and the direction of the load acting portion 961P1 is different. It works.

(Fifty-sixth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 107B is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a load generation in which the sorting member 94P2 protrudes downward from the rotating shaft 941, as in the fifty-fourth embodiment. A load generating portion 961O having a portion 944 and with which the load generating portion 944 interferes when the distribution member 94P1 rotates. As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the sorting device 92 of this embodiment further has a load generating portion 944P1 in which the sorting member 94P2 protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941. When the sorting member 94P2 rotates, A load acting portion 961P1 with which the load generating portion 944P1 interferes is provided. That is, the sorting device 92 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the above-described fifty-fourth embodiment and fifty-fifth embodiment are combined.

Since the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment is configured by combining the fifty-fourth embodiment and the fifty-fifth embodiment, the same effects as those of the fifty-fourth embodiment and the fifty-fifth embodiment play. In addition, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating section 944 and the load generating section 944P1 protrude in opposite directions, and these load generating sections 944 and 944P1 interfere with the load acting sections 961O and 961P1 at the same timing. . Therefore, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, not only can elastic force be generated by the two load generating portions 944 and 944P1 but also the two load acting portions 961O and 961P1, and the load generating portions 944 and 944P1 can generate the load acting portion 961O. , 961P1 can be more mitigated. As a result, even if the load generators 944 and 944P1 repeatedly interfere with the load acting parts 961O and 961P1, damage to the load generating parts 944 and 944P1 and the load acting parts 961O and 961P1 can be further suppressed.

(Fifty-seventh embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108(C) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(C), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same sorting member 94P2 as in the fifty-sixth embodiment described above, and a A load acting part is provided. The load acting portion includes an upper leaf spring 9611P3 and a lower leaf spring 9612P3. These plate springs 9611P3 and 9612P3 are arranged vertically with a predetermined interval therebetween.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94P2 rotates, the state in which the load generating portion 944P1 interferes with the upper leaf spring 9611P3 of the load acting portion and the state in which the load is generated on the lower leaf spring 9612P3. The state in which the portion 944 interferes is repeated. In this embodiment, compared with the fifty-sixth embodiment or the like having the same distribution member 94P2, the distribution member 94P2 can be rotated using elastic force with a simple configuration.

(58th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108A is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(A), in the distribution device 92 of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944Q1 of the distribution member 94Q1 protrudes to the right from the rotating shaft 941, and the load acting portion 961Q1 distributes the load. It is provided entirely to the right of the member 94Q1.

The load acting portion 961Q1 includes an upper leaf spring 9611Q1 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q1. These leaf springs 9611Q1 and 9612Q1 face each other and are arranged vertically with a predetermined interval therebetween.

In the sorting device 92 of this embodiment, the projecting direction of the load generating portion 944Q1 is different from that of the fifty-fifth embodiment, and the direction of the plate springs 9611Q1 and 9612Q1 of the load acting portion 961Q1 is different. The same effects as those of the embodiment can be obtained.

(Fifty-ninth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108B is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a load distribution member 94Q2 protruding rightward from the rotating shaft 941, as in the fifty-eighth embodiment. An upper leaf spring 9611Q1 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q1 with which the load generating part 944Q1 interferes when the distribution member 94Q2 rotates are provided. The sorting device 92 of the present embodiment further has a load generating portion 944Q2 in which the sorting member 94Q2 protrudes leftward from the rotation shaft 941, and an upper leaf spring with which the load generating portion 944Q2 interferes when the sorting member 94Q2 rotates. It has 9611Q2 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q2.

Since the sorting device 92 of this embodiment has the load generation section 944Q1 as in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the same effects as in the fifty-eighth embodiment can be obtained. Further, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944Q1 and the load generating portion 944Q2 protrude in opposite directions, and these load generating portions 944Q1 and 944Q2 interfere with the load acting portion 961Q1 and the spring 961Q2 at the same timing. do. Therefore, in the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, not only can the two load generators 944Q1 and 944Q2 generate an elastic force, but also the impact when the load generators 944Q1 and 944Q2 interfere with the load acting parts 961Q1 and 961Q2 is mitigated. can. As a result, even if the load generating portions 944Q1 and 944Q2 repeatedly interfere with the load acting portions 961Q1 and 961Q2, damage to the load generating portions 944Q1 and 944Q2, the load acting portions 961Q1 and the springs 961Q2 can be suppressed.

(60th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108(C) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108(C), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same sorting member 94Q2 as in the fifty-ninth embodiment and a load different from that in the fifty-ninth embodiment. It has an action part. The load acting portion includes a left leaf spring 9611Q3 and a right leaf spring 9612Q3. These leaf springs 9611Q3 and 9612Q3 are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval therebetween.

In the sorting device 92 of the present embodiment, when the sorting member 94Q2 rotates, the load generating portion 944Q2 interferes with the left leaf spring 9611Q3 of the load acting portion, and the load is generated on the right leaf spring 9612Q3. The state where the portion 944Q1 interferes is repeated. In the present embodiment, compared with the fifty-ninth embodiment or the like having the same distribution member 94Q2, the distribution member 94Q2 can be rotated using elastic force with a simple configuration.

Note that the load generating portion may protrude leftward from the rotating shaft, or may protrude from the rotating shaft in directions other than up, down, left, and right.

(61st to 67th Embodiments)

In the fifty-fourth to sixtieth embodiments described above, the case where the load generating portions of the distribution members 94, 94P1, 94P2, 94Q1, and 94Q2 are formed as elastic plate springs 944, 944P1, 944Q1, and 944Q2 has been described. . On the other hand, the 61st to 67th embodiments are different from the 54th to 60th embodiments described above in that the distribution member includes a load input section formed as a rigid body.
(61st embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109A is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(A), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a load acting portion 961O which is the same as that of the fifty-fourth embodiment and a load acting portion different from that of the fifty-fourth embodiment. and a distribution member 94R1 having an input portion 944R1. The load input portion 944R1 is a portion to which a load that rotates the distribution member 94R1 is input from the load acting portion 961O, and protrudes downward from the rotating shaft 941. As shown in FIG. The load input portion 944R1 has an arm 9441R1 projecting downward from the rotation shaft 941, and an interference portion 9441R1 provided at the end of the arm 9441R1 and interfering with the load acting portion 961O when the distribution member 94R1 rotates. It is formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 in the distribution device 92 of the fifty-fourth embodiment is changed to a load input portion 944R1 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. It is what I did.

(62nd embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109B is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a load acting portion 961P1 which is the same as that of the fifty-fifth embodiment and a load acting portion different from that of the fifty-fifth embodiment. and a distribution member 94R2 having an input portion 944R2. The load input portion 944R2 is a portion to which the load that rotates the distribution member 94R2 is input from the load acting portion 961P1, and protrudes upward from the rotating shaft 941. As shown in FIG. The load input portion 944R2 has an arm 9441R2 projecting upward from the rotation shaft 941, and an interference portion 9442R2 provided at the end of the arm 9441R2 and interfering with the load acting portion 961P1 when the distribution member 94R2 rotates. It is formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944P1 of the distribution member 94 in the distribution device 92 of the fifty-fifth embodiment is changed to a load input portion 944R2 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. It is what I did.

(63rd Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(C), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting portions 961O and 961P1 as in the fifty-sixth embodiment described above, and and a distribution member 94R3 having different load input portions 944R1 and 944R2. The load input sections 944R1 and 944R2 include the same load input section 944R1 as in the sixty-first embodiment and the same load input section 944R2 as in the sixty-second embodiment. That is, the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment replaces the load generating portions 944 and 944P1 of the distribution member 94P2 in the distribution device 92 of the fifty-sixth embodiment with a load input portion 944R1 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. , 944R2.

(64th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109D is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109(D), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting portions (plate springs 9611P3 and 9612P3) as in the fifty-seventh embodiment, and the sixty-third A distribution member 94R3 that is the same as the embodiment is provided. That is, the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment replaces the load generating portions 944 and 944P1 of the distribution member 94P2 in the distribution device 92 of the fifty-seventh embodiment with a load input portion 944R1 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. , 944R2.

(65th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(A), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a load acting portion 961Q1 which is the same as that of the fifty-eighth embodiment and a load acting section 961Q1 different from that of the fifty-eighth embodiment. and a distribution member 94S1 having an input portion 944S1. The load input portion 944S1 is a portion to which a load that rotates the distribution member 94S1 is input from the load acting portion 961Q1, and protrudes from the rotating shaft 941 to the right. The load input portion 944S1 has an arm 9441S1 that projects rightward from the rotation shaft 941, and an interference portion 9442S1 that is provided at the end of the arm 9441S1 and interferes with the load acting portion 961Q1 when the distribution member 94S1 rotates. , is formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944Q1 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the fifty-eighth embodiment is changed to a load input portion 944S1 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. It is what I did.

(66th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110(B) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting portions (plate springs 9611Q1, 9612Q1, 9611Q2, and 9612Q2) as in the fifty-ninth embodiment, and a distributing member 94S2 having load input portions 944S1 and 944S2 different from the fifty-ninth embodiment. The load input portions 944S1 and 944S2 include the same load input portion 944S1 as in the sixty-fifth embodiment, and a load input portion 944S2 projecting leftward from the rotating shaft 941. FIG. That is, the distribution device 92 of this embodiment replaces the load generating portions 944Q1 and 944Q2 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the fifty-ninth embodiment with a load input portion 944S1 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. , 944S2.

(67th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(C), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting portions (plate springs 9611Q3 and 9612Q3) as in the 60th embodiment described above, and the 66th It has the same distribution member 94S2 as the embodiment. That is, the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment replaces the load generating portions 944Q2 and 944Q3 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the 60th embodiment with a load input portion 944S1 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body. , 944S2.

Note that the load input portion may protrude leftward from the rotating shaft, or may protrude from the rotating shaft in directions other than up, down, left, and right.

(68th embodiment)
In the sixty-first embodiment described above, the distribution member 94I has the load input portion 944R1 formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body, and the load input portion 944R1 has the arm 9441R1 and the interference portion 9441R2. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the load input portion is formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body in common with the 61st embodiment described above, but the load generating portion is formed as a cam. is different from the sixty-first embodiment of

Here, FIGS. 111(A) and 111(B) are diagrams showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 111(A) and 111(B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes the same load acting portion 961O as in the 61st embodiment described above, and the 61st A distribution member 94T different from the embodiment is provided. The distribution member 94T includes a load input portion 944T having an inverted teardrop-like shape when viewed from the front. The load input portion 944T is fixed to the rotating shaft 941 and integrally rotates as the rotating shaft 941 rotates. This load input portion 944T has a left cam surface 9441T and a right cam surface 9442T.

The left cam surface 9441T is in contact with the left leaf spring 9611O of the load acting portion 961O, and elastically deforms the left leaf spring 9611O when the distribution member 94T rotates clockwise. The right cam surface 9442T is in contact with the right leaf spring 9612O of the load acting portion 961O, and elastically deforms the right leaf spring 9612O when the distribution member 94T rotates counterclockwise.

In this embodiment, when the distribution member 94T rotates clockwise, the left cam surface 9441T elastically deforms the left leaf spring 9611O, thereby generating an elastic force in the left leaf spring 9611O. The force causes the distribution member 94T to rotate counterclockwise. When the distribution member 94T rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the right cam surface 9442T elastically deforms the right leaf spring 9612O, generating an elastic force in the right leaf spring 9612O. Member 94T is rotated clockwise. As a result, the distribution member 94T is repeatedly rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise direction) and in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) by the elastic force of the leaf springs 9611O and 9612O that are alternately generated. Rotate.

The cam surfaces 9441T and 9442T need only be able to elastically deform the plate springs 9611O and 9612O when the distribution member 94T rotates. good.

(Sixty-ninth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 111(C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111(C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94T having the same load input section 944T as in the 68th embodiment described above formed as a cam, and and a load acting portion 961U having a configuration different from that of the sixty-eighth embodiment. The load acting portion 961U includes a left leaf spring 9611U and a right leaf spring 9612U having cylindrically rounded tips. Note that the left leaf spring 9611U and the right leaf spring 9612U may be formed of rod-shaped members, and in this case, the tips are formed in a ring shape.

(70th embodiment)
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the case where the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 is formed as a leaf spring has been described. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the thirty-ninth embodiment in that the load generating portion is formed by two spiral springs.

Here, FIG. 112A is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to this embodiment. 112(B) and 112(C) are perspective views showing the spiral spring of FIG. 112(A). FIG. 113(A) is a cross-sectional view along the A8-A8 cutting line of FIG. 112(A). FIG. 113(B) is a cross-sectional view along the A9-A9 cutting line in FIG. 112(A).

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a sorting member 94V having a load generator 944V and rotation restrictors 947V and 948V.

The load generator 944V includes a right-handed spiral spring 945V fixed to the rotating shaft 941 and a left-handed spiral spring 946V fixed behind the rotating shaft 941 relative to the right-handed spiral spring 945V.

The right-hand spiral spring 945V has a winding portion 9451V, an input piece 9452V and a fixed piece 9453V. The winding portion 9451V is a portion that generates an elastic force, and is wound clockwise along the peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 941 when viewed from the front. The input piece 9452V is a portion to which a load is input by interfering with the left rotation restricting portion 947V, and extends leftward from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9451V. The fixing piece 9453V is a portion that fixes the right-handed spiral spring 945V to the rotating shaft 941, and extends downward from the inner end of the winding portion 9451V. By embedding the fixed piece 9453V in the rotating shaft 941, the right-hand spiral spring 945V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941. As shown in FIG.

The left-hand spiral spring 946V has a winding portion 9461V, an input piece 9462V and a fixed piece 9463V. The wound portion 9461V is a portion that generates an elastic force, and is wound counterclockwise along the peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 941 when viewed from the front. The input piece 9462V is a portion to which a load is input by interfering with the right rotation restricting portion 948V, and extends rightward from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9461V. The fixed piece 9463V is a portion that fixes the left-handed spiral spring 946V to the rotating shaft 941, and extends downward from the inner end of the wound portion 9461V. The left-hand spiral spring 946V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941 by embedding the fixing piece 9463V in the rotating shaft 941 .

The rotation restricting portions 947V and 948V include a left rotation restricting portion 947V and a right rotation restricting portion 948V.

The left rotation restricting portion 947V inputs a load to the right spiral spring 945V via the input piece 9452V by restricting the rotation of the right spiral spring 945V when the distribution member 94V rotates. The left rotation restricting portion 947V has a right-opening U-shape in which a pair of restricting pieces 9472V and 9473V extends rightward from the upper and lower edges of the base portion 9471V. In the counterclockwise rotation regulating portion 947V, when the distribution member 94V rotates clockwise, the input piece 9452V interferes with the regulation piece 9472V, thereby regulating the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94V. At this time, since the fixing piece 9453V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941, the right-handed spiral spring 945V is wound by inputting a load in the deployment direction opposite to the winding direction to the winding portion 9451V. The portion 9451V generates an elastic force in the entrainment direction. The distribution member 94V whose clockwise rotation is restricted by the elastic force in the winding direction of the winding portion 9451V rotates counterclockwise. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94V rotates counterclockwise, the input piece 9452V interferes with the regulation piece 9473V, thereby restricting the counterclockwise rotation of the distribution member 94V. At this time, the winding portion 9451V generates elastic force in the unfolding direction by inputting a load in the winding direction to the winding portion 9451V. The distribution member 94V whose rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted by the elastic force in the deployment direction of the winding portion 9451V rotates in the clockwise direction.

On the other hand, the right rotation restricting portion 948V inputs a load to the left spiral spring 946V via the input piece 9462V by restricting the rotation of the left spiral spring 946V when the distribution member 94V rotates. The right rotation restricting portion 948V has a left-opening U-shape in which a pair of restricting pieces 9482V and 9483V extend leftward from the upper and lower edges of the base portion 9481V. In the right rotation regulating portion 948V, when the distribution member 94V rotates clockwise, the input piece 9462V interferes with the regulation piece 9483V, thereby regulating the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94V. At this time, since the fixed piece 9463V of the left-handed spiral spring 946V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941, a load in the winding direction is input to the winding portion 9461V, and the winding portion 9461V is elastically exerted in the deployment direction. occurs. The distribution member 94V whose clockwise rotation is restricted by the elastic force in the deployment direction of the winding portion 9461V rotates counterclockwise. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94V rotates counterclockwise, the input piece 9462V interferes with the regulation piece 9462V, thereby restricting the counterclockwise rotation of the distribution member 94V. At this time, a load in the unfolding direction is input to the winding portion 9461V, so that the winding portion 9461V generates an elastic force in the winding direction. The distribution member 94V whose rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted by the elastic force in the winding direction of the winding portion 9461V rotates in the clockwise direction.

In the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94V is rotated clockwise, an elastic force in the winding direction is generated in the winding portion 9451V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V, and the winding portion 9461V of the left-handed spiral spring 946V An elastic force is generated in the deployment direction. Therefore, when the distribution member 94V is rotated clockwise, it is rotated counterclockwise by the elastic force generated at the winding portions 9451V and 9461V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V and the left-handed spiral spring 946V. Conversely, when the distribution member 94V is rotated counterclockwise, an elastic force in the unfolding direction is generated in the winding portion 9451V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V, and the winding portion of the left-handed spiral spring 946V An elastic force in the winding direction is generated in 9461V. Therefore, when the distribution member 94V is rotated counterclockwise, the distribution member 94V is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated at the winding portions 9451V and 9461V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V and the left-handed spiral spring 946V. Thus, also in the present embodiment, due to the elastic force generated when the distribution member 94V rotates, the distribution member 94V rotates in one direction (eg, clockwise) and rotates in the other direction (eg, counterclockwise) of the distribution member 94V. It is possible to realize a rotating motion in which rotation in the clockwise direction is alternately repeated.

(71st embodiment)
In the 70th embodiment described above, the case where the load generating portion 944V of the distribution member 94V is a spiral spring has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although it is common to the above-described 70th embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by using the elastic force generated by the spiral spring, the spiral spring is used as the load acting portion. This is different from the 70th embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a distribution member 94W and a load acting section 945W.

The distributing member 94W has an interference portion 944W formed as a rigid or substantially rigid body instead of the load generating portion 944, which is a plate spring, in the distributing member 94 of the thirty-ninth embodiment. The interference portion 944W is a portion that interferes with a right-handed spiral spring 946W or a left-handed spiral spring 947W of a load acting portion 945W, which will be described later, when the distribution member 94W rotates. be.

The load acting portion 945W includes a right-handed spiral spring 946W, a left-handed spiral spring 947W, and a support portion 948W.

The right-hand spiral spring 946W has a winding portion 9461W, an input piece 9462W and a fixed piece 9463W. The winding portion 9461W is a portion that generates an elastic force, and is clockwise when viewed from the front. The input piece 9462W is a portion to which a load is input when the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes, and extends upward from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9461W. The fixing piece 9463W is a portion that fixes the right-hand spiral spring 946W to the support portion 948W, and extends rightward from the inner end portion of the winding portion 9461W.

The left-hand spiral spring 947W has a winding portion 9471W, an input piece 9472W and a fixed piece 9473W. The winding portion 9471W is a portion that generates an elastic force, and is left-handed when viewed from the front. The input piece 9472W is a portion to which a load is input when the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes, and extends upward from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9471W. The fixed piece 9472W is a portion that fixes the left-handed spiral spring 947W to the support portion 948W, and extends leftward from the inner end portion of the wound portion 9471W.

The support portion 948W has a pair of support arms 9482W and 9483W extending upward from the base 9481W. Support arms 9482W and 9483W support spiral springs 946W and 947W. Specifically, the centers of the winding portions 9461W and 9471W are inserted through fixed shafts 9484W and 9485W extending in the front-rear direction from the support arms 9482W and 9483W, and the fixed pieces 9463W and 9473W are embedded in the fixed shafts 9484W and 9485W. Thus, the spiral springs 946W and 947W are supported by the support arms 9482W and 9483W.

In this embodiment, when the distribution member 94W is rotated clockwise, the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes with the input piece 9462W of the right-handed spiral spring 946W. As a result, in the right-handed spiral spring 946W, the input piece 9462W moves leftward, and a load acts on the winding portion 9461W in the winding direction. Therefore, in the right-handed spiral spring 946W, an elastic force in the deployment direction is generated at the winding portion 9461W, and this elastic force causes the winding portion 9461W to be deployed. A load is input to rotate the distribution member 94W counterclockwise. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94W is rotated counterclockwise, the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes with the input piece 9472W of the left-handed spiral spring 947W. As a result, in the left-handed spiral spring 947W, the input piece 9472W moves to the right, and a load acts on the winding portion 9471W in the winding direction. Therefore, in the left-handed spiral spring 947W, an elastic force in the deployment direction is generated at the winding portion 9471W, and this elastic force causes the winding portion 9471W to be deployed, so that the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W moves from the input piece 9472W. A load is input to rotate the distribution member 94W clockwise. Thus, also in the present embodiment, due to the elastic force generated when the distribution member 94W rotates, the distribution member 94W rotates in one direction (eg, clockwise) and rotates in the other direction (eg, counterclockwise) of the distribution member 94W. It is possible to realize a rotating motion in which rotation in the clockwise direction is alternately repeated.

In this embodiment, when the distribution member 94W is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, the spiral springs 946W and 947W are wound, and the elastic force in the deployment direction is used to generate the distribution member. Although 94W is rotated in the opposite direction, the distribution member 94W may be rotated in the opposite direction by utilizing the elastic force in the winding direction generated by the deployment of the spiral springs 946W and 947W.

<72nd Embodiment>
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, and the distribution member 94 is caused by the elastic force generated by the load generating portion 944. has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the thirty-ninth embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by a load continuously input from the outside regardless of the distribution of the game balls.

Here, FIG. 115A is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. 115(B), 116(A) and 116(B) are diagrams showing the operation of the sorting device shown in FIG. 115(A).

As shown in FIG. 115, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a distribution member 94X and a drive mechanism 97X.

The distribution member 94X has a left load input portion 944X and a right load input portion 945X in addition to a rotating shaft 941, a left ball receiving guide piece 942L and a right ball receiving guide piece 942R. The left load input portion 944X is a plate-like rigid body or substantially rigid body, and protrudes leftward from the rotating shaft 941 . The right load input portion 945X is a plate-like rigid body or substantially rigid body, and protrudes rightward from the rotating shaft 941 . The left load input portion 944X and the right load input portion 945X may be formed as elastic bodies such as leaf springs.

The drive mechanism 97X includes a left rotating body 971X, a right rotating body 972X, a motor 973X that imparts a rotational force to rotate the rotating bodies 971X and 972X, and a motor that transmits the rotational force imparted from the motor 973X to the rotating bodies 971X and 972X. A plurality of meshing transmission gears 974X to 977X (four in this embodiment) are provided. A DC motor, a stepping motor, or the like can be used as the motor 973X. Further, another driving source such as a solenoid can be used instead of the motor 973X. The plurality of transmission gears 974X to 977X preferably have the same gear diameter and gear ratio.

The left rotating body 971X is rotated clockwise by the torque input from the motor 973X to the transmission gear 975X via the transmission gear 974X. The left rotating body 971X includes a gear 9712X integrated with the rotating shaft 9711X and a plurality of interference plates 9713X (three in this embodiment) extending from the rotating shaft 9711X at equal angular intervals. The gear 9712X is a portion to which the torque from the motor 973X is input via transmission gears 974X and 975X. The plurality of interference plates 9713X are portions that interfere with the left load input portion 944X of the distribution member 94X when the left rotating body 971X is rotated clockwise, and are formed of elastically deformable leaf springs.

The right rotating body 972X is rotated counterclockwise by the rotational force input from the motor 973X to the transmission gear 975X via the transmission gears 976X and 977X. The right rotating body 972X includes a gear 9722X integrated with the rotating shaft 9721X, and a plurality of interference plates 9723X (three in this embodiment) extending from the rotating shaft 9721X at equal angular intervals. The gear 9722X is a portion to which the torque from the motor 973X is input via transmission gears 975X to 977X. The plurality of interference plates 9723X are portions that interfere with the right load input portion 945X of the distribution member 94X when the right rotating body 972X is rotated counterclockwise, and are formed of elastically deformable plate springs. . Note that the plurality of interference plates 9723X of the right rotating body 972X are arranged with a 60° phase shift from the plurality of interference plates 9713X of the left rotating body 971X. Also, the rotation speed of the right rotor 972X is the same as the rotation speed of the left rotor 971X.

The left rotating body 971X rotates clockwise while the phases of the plurality of interference pieces 9723X of the right rotating body 972X are shifted by 60° with respect to the plurality of interference pieces 9713X of the left rotating body 971X shown in FIG. , when the right rotating body 972X rotates counterclockwise, the interference piece 9713X of the left rotating body 971X interferes with the left load input portion 944X of the distribution member 94X, as shown in FIG. 115(B). As a result, as shown in FIG. 116A, the clockwise rotational force of the left rotating body 971X is input to the left load input portion 944X of the distribution member 94X via the interference piece 9713X, and the distribution member 94X Rotated in the counterclockwise direction. Further, when the distribution member 94X is rotated by the rotational force of the left rotation body 971X, the interference piece 9713X of the left rotation body 971X is elastically deformed, and the right load input part 945X of the distribution member 94X is moved to the right rotation body 972X. It interferes with the interference piece 9723X. As a result, the counterclockwise rotational force of the right rotating body 972X is input to the distribution member 94X through the interference piece 9723X to the right load input portion 945X of the distribution member 94X. At this time, as shown in FIG. 116B, the elastically deformed interference piece 9713X of the left rotating body 971X is separated from the left load input portion 944X of the distribution member 94X. Therefore, the distribution member 94X is rotated clockwise by the counterclockwise rotational force of the right rotating body 972X.

On the other hand, although not shown in the drawings, when the distribution member 94X is rotated clockwise by the rotational force of the right rotating body 972X, the left load input portion 944X of the distributing member 94X becomes the interference piece of the left rotating body 971X. As it interferes with 9713X, the interference piece 9723X of the right rotating body 972X is elastically deformed. After that, the interference piece 9723X of the right rotating body 972X is separated from the right load input portion 945X of the distribution member 94X, so that the distribution member 94X is rotated counterclockwise by the left rotating body 971X as described above. be done. In this way, the distribution member 94X is rotated by being alternately rotated counterclockwise and clockwise by the left rotating body 971X and the right rotating body 972X.

Thus, in this embodiment, regardless of the distribution of the game balls 99 by the distribution member 94X, the driving mechanism 97X rotates the left rotating body 971X in the clockwise direction and rotates the right rotating body 972X in the counterclockwise direction. , the distribution member 94X is rotated alternately counterclockwise and clockwise. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, it is possible for the player to launch the game ball 99 at the timing when the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 . Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 94X can be rotated by rotating the motor 973X in the same direction at a constant speed, so the control of the motor 973X is facilitated.

<Seventy-third embodiment>
In the above-described 72nd embodiment, the drive mechanism 97X rotates the left rotating body 971X clockwise and rotates the right rotating body 972X counterclockwise regardless of the distribution of the game balls 99 by the distribution member 94X. A case has been described in which the distribution member 94X is rotated by rotating . On the other hand, in this embodiment, although it is common to the above-described 72nd embodiment in that the sorting member is rotated by the drive mechanism, a rotational force is applied to the rotating shaft of the sorting member from the outside of the sorting member. This is different from the 72nd embodiment in that the sorting member is rotated by input.

Here, FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the sorting device in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a distribution member 94Y and a drive mechanism 97Y.

The distribution member 94Y includes a rotating shaft 941, a left ball receiving guide piece 942L, a right ball receiving guide piece 942R, and a load input portion 944Y. The load input portion 944Y is a bevel gear integrated with the rear end portion of the rotating shaft 941 and rotates together with the rotating shaft 941 .

The drive mechanism 97Y inputs a rotational force for rotating the distribution member 94Y to the load input section 944Y. The drive mechanism 97Y includes a rotating shaft 971Y rotated by a motor 970Y and a bevel gear 972Y integrally provided at the end of the rotating shaft 971Y. A DC motor, a stepping motor, or the like can be used as the motor 970Y. Further, another driving source such as a solenoid can be used instead of the motor 970Y. The bevel gear 972Y rotates integrally with the rotating shaft 971Y when the rotating shaft 971Y is rotated by the motor 970Y. The load input portion 944Y of the distribution member 94Y is meshed with the bevel gear 972Y. Therefore, when the rotary shaft 971Y is rotated by the rotational force from the motor 970Y, the load input portion 944Y of the distribution member 94Y is rotated by the rotation of the bevel gear 972Y accompanying the rotation of the rotary shaft 971Y. As a result, the rotating shaft 941 of the distribution member 94Y is rotated, thereby rotating the distribution member 94Y as a whole. In addition, the motor 970Y is controlled by the MPU 41 . That is, by controlling the driving source by the MPU 41, the rotation shaft 971Y is rotated in the normal direction or the reverse direction, and accordingly the distribution member 94Y is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction.

By the way, in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923 are controlled according to the attitude (rotational angle) of the distribution member 94 based on the output voltage of the detection section 95 . In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the thirty-ninth embodiment in that the synchronization lamp 923 is controlled to turn on and off according to the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y.

Here, FIG. 118 is a diagram showing lighting timing and turning off timing of the synchronization lamp 923. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 118, in the present embodiment, the MPU 41 alternately rotates the sorting member 94Y clockwise (rightward) and counterclockwise (leftward) by a predetermined rotation angle to sort The member 94Y is rotated. Further, in the present embodiment, the synchronization lamp 923 is lit at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is controlled to rotate counterclockwise (leftward), and the distribution member 94Y is controlled to rotate clockwise (rightward). is turned off at the timing of As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94Y is rotating counterclockwise when the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on, and the distribution member 94Y is rotating clockwise when the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off. I can recognize that. Therefore, the player launches the game ball 99 at the timing when the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922, using the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y ascertained by lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923 as a guide. becomes possible. For example, when the timing at which the synchronization lamp 923 is lit is set to the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922, the timing at which the synchronization lamp 923 is lit is the game ball 99. , the game ball 99 can efficiently pass through the second passage 922 . In this case, lighting of the synchronizing lamp 923 informs the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second path 922 . On the contrary, even if the rotation pattern of the distribution member 94Y is set so that the turning off of the synchronization lamp 923 informs the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922. Better, the synchronization lamp 923 may be turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is controlled to rotate clockwise (to the right).

Note that the unit rotation period Ts (see FIG. 118) of the distribution member 94Y is a positive integer multiple (eg, 1 times to 3-fold, preferably 1-fold or 2-fold) or values close to it (eg positive integer multiple ±15% range, preferably positive integer multiple ±10% range, more preferably positive integer multiple ±5% range). For example, when the firing interval Th is 0.6 seconds, the unit rotation period Ts is set in the range of 0.51 seconds to 0.69 seconds or 1.02 seconds to 1.38 seconds. Thus, the unit rotation period Ts is a positive integral multiple of the firing interval Th or a value close to it, so that the game balls 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 (distributable state), and the game balls can be distributed. It becomes easy to link with the firing timing of 99. Further, if the timing of launching the game ball 99 can be matched with the timing of being distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, the game ball can be distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop shot after that. It is also possible to

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, sensor detection processing (step S1001), update processing of random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2 (step S1002), as in the first embodiment described above. ), update processing of counters C1 to C4 (step S1003), start winning processing (step S1004), launch control processing (step S1005), and through gate processing (step S1006) are executed. In the main timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, distribution member control processing (step S3601) and synchronous lamp control processing (step S3602) are further executed. In this embodiment, in the through-gate process, when the passage of the game ball 99 through the through-gate 319' is detected (Yes in step S1201 of FIG. 16), the number of game balls is counted. The count of the number of game balls is referred to when setting the left rotation time in step S3707 of the distribution member control process described later.

[Distribution member control processing]
Here, FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in step S3601 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the distribution member control process, the MPU 41 controls the output of the motor 972Y in the drive mechanism 97Y, thereby controlling the rotation of the rotating shaft 971Y in the forward or reverse direction. As a result, the right rotation (clockwise rotation) and left rotation (counterclockwise rotation) of the distribution member 94Y are controlled, and the rotation operation of the distribution member 94Y is controlled.

<Step S3701>
In the distribution member control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the clockwise rotation flag is set to ON (step S3701). The right rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is being rotated right, and is set to ON in step S3714, which will be described later. When the right rotation flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702, and when the right rotation flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the process proceeds to step S3702. Move to S3709.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
In step S3702, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the clockwise rotation time set in step S3712, which will be described later, has elapsed, that is, whether or not it is time to change the direction of rotation of the distribution member 94Y from right to left. do. When the clockwise rotation time has elapsed (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the clockwise rotation flag to OFF (step S3703), and ends the clocking of the clockwise rotation time (step S3704). If the clockwise rotation time has not elapsed (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 terminates the distribution member control process.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 determines the left rotation time and sets the determined left rotation time. The left rotation time is determined according to the allocation frequency or allocation ratio of the game balls 99 to the second path 922, short time (eg 0.5 seconds), standard time (eg 1 second) and long time (eg 1 second). .5 seconds) to determine the left rotation time. For example, the standard time of the counterclockwise rotation time is approximately 1:1 (for example, the range of 0.4:0.6 to 0.6:0.4) between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. It is selected when it is distributed, it is selected when the distribution ratio for the first passage 921 is low for a short time and the distribution ratio for the second passage 922 is high, and for a long time the distribution ratio for the first passage 921 is high, and the It is selected when the distribution ratio for the 2 passages 922 is low.

Specifically, the MPU 41 first determines that the number of game balls counted when passage of the game ball 99 through the through gate 319' is detected (Yes in step S1201 of FIG. 16) is counted for a predetermined time (eg, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.), whether it is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and if it is not greater than or equal to the first threshold, it is set to a value smaller than the first threshold. Determine whether or not The first threshold is, for example, a value at which the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is 0.4:0.6 or more, that is, the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is equal to that of the first passage 921. It is set to a value equivalent to 1.5 times the distribution ratio. The second threshold is, for example, a value at which the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is 0.6:0.4 or less, that is, the distribution ratio of the first passage 921 is equal to that of the second passage 922. It is set to a value equivalent to 1.5 times the distribution ratio. That is, when the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is high, a short time is selected as the counterclockwise rotation time to make it difficult for the game ball 99 to be distributed to the second passage 922, while the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is high. In this case, a short time is selected as the counterclockwise rotation time so that the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922, and the distribution ratio between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be made constant. Become. As a result, when the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is low, the player 99 can be relieved, and when the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the second passage 922 Since a higher level of skill is required to distribute the game balls 99, the playability can be enhanced. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 that can adjust the difficulty of shooting the game ball 99 at the timing when the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 according to the skill of the player. As a result, while the unfairness to players with low skill can be reduced, the difficulty level of the shooting timing of the game balls 99 for distributing the game balls 99 to the second path 922 is increased for players with high skill. It is possible to provide enhanced playability. It should be noted that the predetermined time for determining whether it is equal to or greater than the first threshold value or equal to or less than the second threshold value is the time from when the counterclockwise rotation time was set last time, and similarly passes through the second passage 922 . The count number of game balls is also the count number after setting the left rotation time last time.

In this embodiment, the left rotation time is selected from three stages of short time, standard time and long time, but the left rotation time is selected from two stages of short time and standard time and two stages of standard time and long time. Alternatively, the time may be selected from four or more levels of time. Further, in the present embodiment, the right rotation time, which will be described later, is a fixed value (one step), but the right rotation time may be selected from a plurality of times. In this case, the counterclockwise rotation time may be a fixed value (one step) or may be selected from multiple steps. Furthermore, instead of adjusting the left rotation time or the right rotation time, the distribution member 94Y is stopped for a certain period of time at the left switching point Pl or the right switching point Pr, and the stop time at the left switching point Pl or the right switching point Pr By adjusting , a state in which the game balls 99 are more easily distributed to the second passage 922 than to the first passage 921, or a state in which the game balls 99 are more easily distributed to the first passage 921 than to the second passage 922 is realized. You may For example, by making the stop time of the distribution member 94Y at the right switching point Pr longer than the stop time of the distribution member 94Y at the left switching point Pl, the second passage 922 is operated more than the first passage 921. A state in which the game balls 99 are easily distributed can be obtained.

Further, in this embodiment, the counterclockwise rotation time is determined based on the number of game balls passing through the through gate 319', that is, based on the number of game balls passing through the second passage 922. Instead, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game balls 99 is provided near the introduction port 920 and the first passage 921, and the ratio of the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is accurately grasped. You may make it determine left rotation time above. In this way, the player temporarily launches the game ball 99 to the left area of the game board 31 or stops launching the game ball 99, thereby causing the game ball 99 to move to the right area of the game board 31. Even when hitting is stopped, the distribution ratio for the second passage 922 can be accurately grasped. As a result, the player can take countermeasures against attacking attacks.

<Step S3706>
When the counterclockwise rotation time is set, the MPU 41 changes the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from clockwise to counterclockwise (step S3706). The MPU 41 rotates the distribution member 94Y to the left at a rotational speed corresponding to the left rotation time determined in step S3705 described above. For example, the rotation speed may be a low speed corresponding to a long counterclockwise rotation, a standard speed corresponding to a standard counterclockwise rotation, and a high rotation speed corresponding to a short counterclockwise rotation. A speed is prepared, and the MPU 41 rotates the distribution member 94Y to the left at a rotation speed corresponding to the left rotation time determined in step S3705 described above.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
When the left rotation of the distribution member 94Y is started, the MPU 41 sets the left rotation flag to ON (step S3707), sets the synchronization lamp lighting flag to ON (step S3708), and starts the distribution member control process. finish. Here, the counterclockwise rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is being rotated counterclockwise. Also, the synchronous lamp lighting flag is referred to in step S3801 of the synchronous lamp control process to be described later in order to determine whether or not to light the synchronous lamp 923 .

<Steps S3709-3711>
When the right rotation flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), that is, when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the left, the MPU 41 determines whether the left rotation time set in step S3705 has passed. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to change the direction of rotation of the distribution member 94Y from left to right (step S3709). When the counterclockwise rotation time has elapsed (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the counterclockwise rotation flag to OFF (step S3710), and finishes counting the counterclockwise rotation time (step S3711). If the left rotation time has not elapsed (step S3709: No), the MPU 41 terminates the distribution member control process.

<Steps S3712 to S3715>
In step S3712, the MPU 41 determines the right rotation time and sets the determined right rotation time. In this embodiment, the right rotation time is a fixed value and is not determined from multiple stages like the left rotation time, but may be selected from multiple stages as described above. When the right rotation time is set, the MPU 41 changes the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from left rotation to right rotation, and starts right rotation of the distribution member 94Y (step S3713). Then, when the distribution member 94Y starts to rotate to the right, the MPU 41 sets the right rotation flag to ON (step S3714), sets the synchronization lamp turn-off flag to ON (step S3715), and controls the distribution member. End the process. Here, the right rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is rotated to the right.

[Synchronous lamp control processing]
Here, FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in step S3602 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the synchronous lamp control process, lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 are controlled based on the control state of the distribution member 94Y.

<Step S3801>
In the synchronous lamp control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3801). Here, the synchronous lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting a synchronous lamp lighting command for lighting the synchronous lamp 923, and is set to ON in step S3708 of the distribution member control processing described above. If the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3802, and if the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the process to step S3804.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
When the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a synchronous lamp lighting command (step S3802), sets the synchronous lamp lighting flag to OFF (step S3803), Terminate the synchronous lamp control process. That is, the MPU 41 sets a synchronous lamp lighting command for lighting the synchronous lamp 923 to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 when the direction of rotation of the distribution member 94Y is changed from right to left.

The synchronous lamp lighting command in step S3802 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 turns on the sync lamp 923 in step S3507 in the command determination process of FIG. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is rotating counterclockwise by confirming the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent area 9251 . Then, by confirming the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent area 9251, at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922 (the timing when the game ball 99 is likely to enter the second start port 315). A game ball 99 can be launched. When confirming the lighting of the synchronizing lamp 923 in the translucent area 9251, the player more easily puts the game ball 99 into the second start port 315 than visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94Y. It becomes possible to enter the ball.

<Steps S3804 to S3806>
When the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3804). Here, the synchronous lamp extinguishing flag is a flag for setting a synchronous lamp extinguishing command for extinguishing the synchronous lamp 923, and is set to ON in step S3715 of the distribution member control processing described above. When the synchronization lamp turn-off flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a synchronization lamp turn-off command for turning off the synchronization lamp 923 to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 (step S3805). , the synchronous lamp turn-off flag is set to OFF (step S3806), and the synchronous lamp control process is terminated.

Note that the synchronous lamp turn-off command in step S3805 is sent to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 turns off the light in step S3509 in the command determination process of FIG. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is rotated to the right by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off in the translucent area 9251 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is rotated leftward and rightward by the drive mechanism 97X. Therefore, in order for the distribution member 94Y to perform a regular operation, compared to the above-described thirty-eighth embodiment in which the game ball 99 is rotated when the game ball 99 is received, at the timing when the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 It becomes easier to launch the game ball 99.例文帳に追加

Moreover, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on or off according to the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y controlled by the MPU 41 . In other words, the synchronizing lamp 923 can be turned on or off based on the control of the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y by the MPU 41 without detecting the orientation of the distribution member 94Y. Therefore, as in the case of detecting the orientation of the distribution member 94Y, there is no problem such as lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 due to malfunction of the detection unit. It is also advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the distribution member 94Y is rotated counterclockwise at a rotation speed corresponding to the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94Y, the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be made constant. As a result, when the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is low, the player 99 can be relieved, and when the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the second passage 922 Since a higher level of skill is required to distribute the game balls 99, the playability can be enhanced.

The technical idea of notifying the player of the direction of rotation of the distribution member can also be applied to the case where the distribution member is rotated by elastic force as in the thirty-ninth embodiment. In this case, the rotating direction of the sorting member is grasped by a detecting means such as an optical sensor for detecting the rotating direction of the sorting member.

<74th Embodiment>
In the seventy-third embodiment described above, the distribution member 94Y is rotated by inputting a rotational force from the outside of the distribution member 94Y, and one synchronization lamp 923 is turned on and turned on based on the rotation control of the distribution member 94Y. The case where the extinguishing is controlled has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, although it is common to the above-described 73rd embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by inputting a rotational force from the outside of the distribution member, the rotation direction of the distribution member It differs from the above-described 73rd embodiment in that two synchronous lamps are provided which are turned on and off in accordance with the above.

Here, FIG. 122(A) is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the sorting device in this embodiment, and FIG. 122(B) is a cross-sectional view showing the internal configuration of the sorting device. As shown in FIGS. 122(A) and 122(B), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same sorting member 94Y as in the 73rd embodiment and two synchronizing lamps. 923L and 923R are provided. The distribution member 94Y is alternately rotated leftward and rightward by a predetermined rotation angle by a rotational force applied from a driving source such as a motor, as in the seventy-third embodiment. The sync lamps 923L, 923R include a left sync lamp 923L and a right sync lamp 923R. The left sync lamp 923L and the right sync lamp 923R are light sources such as light emitting diodes.

Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the lighting timing and lighting timing of the synchronization lamp. As shown in FIG. 123, the left synchronization lamp 923L is turned on when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the left, and is turned off when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the right. On the other hand, the right synchronization lamp 923R is turned on when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the right, and is turned off when the distribution member 94Y is rotating to the left. That is, while the left synchronization lamp 923L is lit, the right synchronization lamp 923R is extinguished, and conversely, while the right synchronization lamp 923R is lit, the left synchronization lamp 923L is extinguished. The left synchronizing lamp 923L and the right synchronizing lamp 923R alternately light up according to the rotation direction of 94Y. Such control of lighting and extinguishing of the left sync lamp 923L and the right sync lamp 923R is performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 according to the left sync lamp lighting command and the right sync lamp lighting command set by the MPU 41. is executed by turning on or off the The left synchronization lamp lighting command is set when the distribution member 94Y is changed from right rotation to left rotation, and the right synchronization lamp lighting command is set when the distribution member 94Y is changed from left rotation to right rotation. is set to

These synchronizing lamps 923L and 923R are provided at portions that do not obstruct the visual recognition of the distribution member 94Y. In the example shown in FIGS. 122(A) and 122(B), it is above the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 . A housing 924 of the distribution device 92 is provided with a left lighting mark 925L in front of the left synchronization lamp 923L and a right lighting mark 925R in front of the right synchronization lamp 923R. The lighting marks 925L and 925R include translucent areas 9251L and 9251R that transmit light, and mask areas 9252L and 9252R that have low light transmittance and do not transmit light or hardly transmit light. The translucent regions 9251L and 9251R are star-shaped transparent or colorless portions that transmit light from the synchronizing lamps 923L and 923R when the synchronizing lamps 923L and 923R are turned on. The mask regions 9252L and 9252R have circular outer edges around the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R so as to surround the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R. The mask areas 9252L and 9252R can highlight the light transmitted through the translucent areas 9251L and 9251R when the synchronizing lamps 923L and 923R are turned on. Even if the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R are turned on, it is possible to clearly recognize the lighting of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R. The lighting marks 925L and 925R can be changed in design in the same manner as the lighting mark 925 of the thirty-ninth embodiment.

By the way, in the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment, when the distribution member 94Y is in a state where the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, or when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 A synchronizing lamp 923 is turned on when it is time to shoot a game ball 99.例文帳に追加However, it is assumed that some players do not understand that the synchronization ramp 923 is the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to be guided to the second passage 922 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left synchronization lamp 923L lights when the distribution member 94Y rotates to the left, while the right synchronization lamp 923R lights when the distribution member 94Y rotates to the right. do. Thus, in this embodiment, the lighting timings of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R are synchronized with the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y, and the player can easily understand the significance of the lighting timings of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R. As a result, it becomes easy to use the lighting timing of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R as a guideline in searching for the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92.例文帳に追加

[Distribution member control processing]
Here, FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in step S3601 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution member control process of this embodiment is basically the same as the distribution member control process of the 72nd embodiment described above. Specifically, when the right rotation flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), steps S3702 to S3703 are executed in the same manner as in the 73rd embodiment, and the right rotation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3701: No), steps S3709 to S3714 are executed in the same manner as in the seventy-fourth embodiment. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from right rotation to right rotation and the left rotation flag is set to ON (steps S3706 and S3707), a command to turn on the left synchronization lamp 923L is issued. A left sync lamp lighting flag for setting is set to ON (step S3901). Further, in the present embodiment, when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from right rotation to left rotation and the right rotation flag is set to ON (steps S3713 and S3714), a command for turning on the right synchronization lamp 923R is issued. is set to ON (step S3902).
different in that respect.

[Synchronous lamp control processing]
Here, FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in step S3602 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. In the synchronous lamp control process, a command is set to cause the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 to turn on and off the left synchronous lamp 923L and the right synchronous lamp 923R.

<Step S4001>
In the synchronous lamp control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the left synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4001). Here, the left synchronizing lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting a left synchronizing lamp lighting command for lighting the left synchronizing lamp 923L, and is set to ON in step S3901 of the distribution member control processing described above. When the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4002, and when the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No). , the process proceeds to step S4004.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
When the left sync lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a left sync lamp lighting command (step S4002) and sets the left sync lamp lighting flag to OFF (step S4003). ), the synchronous lamp control process ends. That is, the MPU 41 sets a left synchronization lamp lighting command for turning on the left synchronization lamp 923L to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 when the distribution member 94Y is changed from right rotation to left rotation.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
When the left synchronizing lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the right synchronizing lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4004). Here, the right synchronizing lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting a right synchronizing lamp lighting command for lighting the right synchronizing lamp 923R, and is set to ON in step S3902 of the above-described distribution member control processing. When the right sync lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a right sync lamp lighting command for lighting the right sync lamp 923R to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 ( Step S4005), the right synchronous lamp lighting flag is set to OFF (step S4006), and the synchronous lamp control process ends.

Note that the left sync lamp lighting command set in step S4002 and the left sync lamp lighting command set in step S4005 are sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. be. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 controls lighting and extinguishing of the left synchronization lamp 923L and controls lighting and extinguishing of the right synchronization lamp 923R in the command determination processing of FIG. 126, which will be described later. As a result, the player confirms the lighting of the left synchronization lamp 923L in the translucent area 9251L and the lighting of the right synchronization lamp 923R in the translucent area 9251R. It can recognize whether it is rotating or rotating to the right. By confirming that the left synchronization lamp 923L or the right synchronization lamp 923R is turned on in the translucent areas 9251L and 9251R, the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922 (the game ball to the second start port 315 It is possible to launch the game ball 99 at the timing when the ball 99 is likely to be entered. When confirming the lighting of the left synchronization lamp 923L or the right synchronization lamp 923R in the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R, the player can more easily check the position of the distribution member 94Y than visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94Y. It becomes possible to enter the game ball 99 into the starting port 315 .

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the command determination process of this embodiment, similarly to the command determination process of the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, when a variation pattern command is received (Yes in steps S2001 and S2002), the processes of steps S2003 to S2005 are executed. . Further, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the left synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4002 of the synchronization lamp control process is received (step S4101: Yes), the processes of steps S4102 and S4103 are executed to When the right synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4005 of the lamp control process is received (step S4104: Yes), the processes of steps S4105 and S4105 are executed.

<Steps S4101 to S4003>
In step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the left synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4002 of the synchronous lamp control process has been received. When the MPU 41 receives the left sync lamp lighting command (step S4101: Yes), it lights the left sync lamp 923L (step S4102) and turns off the right sync lamp 923R (4103). If the MPU 51 has not received the left synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4101: No), the process proceeds to step S4104.

<Steps S4104 to S4006>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the right synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S4005 of the synchronous lamp control process has been received. When the MPU 41 receives the right sync lamp lighting command (step S4104: Yes), it lights the right sync lamp 923R (step S4105) and turns off the left sync lamp 923L (4106). If the MPU 51 has not received the right sync lamp lighting command (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S2008), and terminates the command determination processing.

As described above, this embodiment has the same effect as the above-described 73rd embodiment based on the common configuration with the above-described 73rd embodiment. That is, compared to the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment in which the distribution member 94Y rotates by receiving the game ball 99 in order to perform regular operations, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 at the timing. Since it is not necessary to detect the posture of the distribution member 94Y, there is no problem such as lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 due to malfunction of the detection section. It is only advantageous in terms of manufacturing process and also in terms of manufacturing cost. Then, in this embodiment, like the seventy-third embodiment described above, the distribution member 94Y is rotated at a rotational speed corresponding to the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94Y. If it is rotated counterclockwise, the distribution ratio between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be made constant. As a result, when the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is low, the player 99 can be relieved, and when the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the second passage 922 Since a higher level of skill is required to distribute the game balls 99, the playability can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, two synchronizing lamps (left synchronizing lamp 923L and right synchronizing lamp 923R) are provided. A synchronization lamp (right synchronization lamp 923R) lights up as the distribution member 94Y rotates to the right. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lighting timings of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R are synchronized with the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y, and the player can easily understand the significance of the lighting timings of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R. As a result, it becomes easy to use the lighting timing of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R as a guideline in searching for the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92.例文帳に追加

The technical idea of notifying the player of the direction of rotation of the distribution member by means of two lighting lamps can also be applied to the case where the distribution member is rotated by elastic force as in the thirty-ninth embodiment. In this case, the rotating direction of the sorting member is grasped by a detecting means such as an optical sensor for detecting the rotating direction of the sorting member.

<75th to 81st Embodiments>
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the electric support member 93 rotates to open and close the second starting port 315, and the game balls released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 enter the second starting port. A case has been described in which the support state in which the ball is guided and the non-support state in which the game ball is not guided to the second starting port are switched. On the other hand, in the 75th to 81st embodiments, the configuration and operation of the electric support member are different from those in the 39th embodiment. However, in the 75th to 81st embodiments, since the configuration of the sorting device is the same as that of the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment, the same effect as that of the above-described thirty-ninth embodiment can be obtained.

(75th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 127(A) is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member, and a second starting port in this embodiment, and FIG. 127(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. be. FIG. 128(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A10-A10 in FIG. 127(A), and FIG. 128(B) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 128(A).

As shown in FIGS. 127(A) and 127(B), the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same sorting device 92 as in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, and a and a different electric support member 93A.

The electric support member 93A does not guide the game ball 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 to the second start port 315, and prevents the game ball 99 from entering the second start port 315. It is possible to guide game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 to the standby position (see FIG. 128 (A)) that restricts the ball, and the second start port 315. It can be moved back and forth by driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between the operating position (see FIG. 128(B)) that allows the game ball 99 to enter the 2-starting port 315 . The electric support member 93A includes a left guiding portion 931A, a right guiding portion 932A and a through hole 933A. The left guide part 931A is a part that guides the game ball 99 released from the first passage 921 of the sorting device 92 to the second start port 315, and is inclined downward to the right toward the second start port 315. . The right guide part 932A is a part that guides the game balls 99 released from the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 to the second start port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second start port 315. . The through-hole 933A is provided between the left guiding portion 931A and the right guiding portion 932A, and downwardly guides the game ball 99 guided from the left guiding portion 931A and the right guiding portion 932A when the electric support member 93A is in the operating position. It is a part that allows the ball to enter the second starting hole 315 by dropping it.

As shown in FIG. 128(A), the electric support member 93A does not protrude from the game board 31 when it is in the standby position, and the game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are It is not guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 93A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128(B), the electric support member 93A protrudes from the game board 31 when it is in the operating position, and is released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. The ball 99 is guided to the through hole 933A by the left guide portion 931A and the right guide portion 932A of the electric support member 93A, and enters the second starting port 315 through the through hole 933A.

(76th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 129(A) is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the game board including the sorting device, the electric support member and the second starting port in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129(A), the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same sorting device 92 as in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, and the thirty-ninth An electric support member 93B different from the embodiment is provided. This embodiment also differs from the thirty-ninth embodiment in that the second starting port 315 is provided immediately below the second passage 922 .

The electric support member 93B has a plate-like shape that is slightly inclined downward to the left, and is movable along the game board 31 along the moving direction of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 93B. Specifically, the electric support member 93B is in a standby position (solid line in FIG. 129(B)) and an operating position (the position of the phantom line in FIG. 129(B)) in which the second starting port 315 is opened to the left of the standby position. That is, the electric support member 93B has a standby position (a solid line position in FIG. 129(A)) in which the second starting port 315 is closed, and an operating position (a position in FIG. 129(B)) in which the second starting port 315 is opened. virtual line position).

When the electric support member 93B is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 93B closes the second starting port 315 and limits entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93B is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93B and discharged from the out port 317 .

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93B is at the operating position indicated by the phantom lines in FIG. 2 The starting port 315 is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315 .

(77th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 129(B) is a diagram showing the main part of the game board including the electric support member in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129(B), the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a sorting device 92 that is the same as that of the thirty-ninth embodiment and an electric support member 93C that is different from that of the thirty-ninth embodiment. Prepare. Although not clearly shown in the drawings, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922 in the present embodiment as well, as in the seventy-sixth embodiment.

The electric support member 93C has a plate-like shape that is slightly inclined downward to the left, and the electric support member 93C is tilted in a plan view by inputting a rotational force from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid to the rotating shaft 931C. (B) are rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the electric support member 93C is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane that is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

In addition, the electric support member 93C is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the second start-up member 93C is directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second start-up port 315. 129(B)), and an operating position (FIG. 129(B)) where the opening of the second starting port 315 is protruded forward at a position adjacent to the right side of the second starting port 315 (FIG. 129(B)). B) the position of the virtual line)). That is, the electric support member 93C can operate between a standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and an operating position in which the second starting port 315 is open.

When the electric support member 93C is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIG. The electric support member 93C closes the second starting port 315 to restrict entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93C is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93C and discharged from the out port 317. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93C is in the operating position indicated by the phantom lines in FIG. 93C opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315 .

The electric support member 93C may be arranged horizontally without being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, and configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, the surface of the electric support member 93C may be provided with a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left to promote the movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315 side.

(78th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a sorting device, an electric support member, and a second starting port according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 130, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same sorting device 92 as in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, and an electric support member 93D different from that in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above. Also in this embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided immediately below the second passage 922, as in the seventy-sixth embodiment.

The electric support member 93D rotates clockwise or counterclockwise in FIG. be done. In addition, the electric support member 93D is rotated in the vertical plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the standby position ( 130) and an operating position standing on the right side of the 32nd starting port 315 (the phantom line position in FIG. 130). That is, the electric support member 93D is in a standby position (a solid line position in FIG. 130) in which the second starting port 315 is closed, and an operation to open the second starting port 315 by standing on the right side of the second starting port 315. position (the phantom line position in FIG. 130). In addition, the electric support member 93D is inclined slightly downward to the left in the standby position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 93D. However, the electric support member 93D may be arranged horizontally. In this case, the surface of the electric support member 93D is provided with a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left, and the game ball 99 is placed on the side of the second starting port 315. may promote movement to

When the electric support member 93D is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 93D closes the second starting port 315 and restricts entry of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is not entered into the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93D is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93D and discharged from the out port 317. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93D is in the standby position indicated by the phantom lines in FIG. It is opened to allow entry of a game ball 99. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315 .

(79th embodiment)
Here, FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B) are diagrams showing an example of essential parts of the game board including the electric support member and the second starting port in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B), the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same distribution device 92 as in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, and a and a different electric support member 93E. Although not clearly shown in the drawings, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922 in the present embodiment as well, as in the seventy-sixth embodiment.

The electric support member 93E is an elliptical plate member in a plan view, and is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined downward to the left. The electric support member 93E has an elliptical through hole 931E, a closing portion 932E, and a rotating shaft 933E. The through-hole 931E has a minor diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and allows the game ball 99 to pass through.

The electric support member 93E rotates in a direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane) as shown in FIG. (A) and FIG. 131(B) are rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. In addition, the electric support member 93E is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the closing portion 932E is positioned directly above the second starting port 315 so that the closing portion 932E rotates the second starting port. 315 (see FIG. 131(A)); and an operating position (see FIG. 131(B)) where the through-hole 931E is located directly above the second starting port 315 and opens the second starting port 315. can be moved between That is, the electric support member 93E is operable between a standby position that closes the second starting port 315 and an operating position that opens the second starting port 315 .

The shapes of the electric support member 93E and the through hole 931E are not limited to elliptical, and may be other shapes such as circular, oval, and oblong. In addition, the electric support member 93E may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that slopes downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 93E, and the game ball 99 is placed on the side of the second starting port 315. may promote movement to

When the electric support member 93E is in the standby position shown in FIG. 131(A), that is, when the closing portion 932E of the electric support member 93E is positioned above the second start port 315, the electric support member 93E is closed by the closing portion 932E. The second starting port 315 is closed to restrict entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315.例文帳に追加Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is not entered into the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93E is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93E and discharged from the out port 317. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93E is in the operating position shown in FIG. When positioned, the electric support member 93E opens the second starting port 315 by the through hole 931E to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315 .

(80th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 132(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the game board including the electric support member and the second starting port in this embodiment, and FIG. 132(B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. . As shown in FIGS. 132(A) and 132(B), the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes the same distribution device 92 as in the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, and a and a different electric support member 93F. Also in this embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided immediately below the second passage 922 .

The electric support member 93F has a through portion 931F and is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined downward to the left. The electric support member 93F is rotatable about a rotation axis extending substantially horizontally and slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41 . In addition, the electric support member 93F is rotated by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the penetrating portion 931F penetrates in the front-rear direction to the waiting position (see FIG. 132) for closing the second starting port 315. (C)) and the operating position (see FIG. 132 (A)) where the penetrating portion 931F penetrates vertically directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to open the second start port 315 can be moved with

When the electric support member 93F is at the standby position shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93F is tilted downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93F and discharged from the out port 317. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93F is at the operating position shown in FIG. 132(A), the electric support member 93F opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second starting port 315 .

Note that the through portion 931F of the electric support member 93F may have a shape in which not only the upper and lower sides but also a part thereof is opened sideways.

(81st embodiment)
Here, FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the game board including the sorting device, the electric support member and the second starting port in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 133, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a sorting device 92 that is the same as that of the thirty-ninth embodiment and an electric support member that is different from the electric support member 93 of the thirty-ninth embodiment. and an electric accessory device 93G having (left and right feather members 932G, 933G).

The electric accessory device 93</b>G is configured as a so-called electric tulip, and is provided in a region immediately below the distribution device 35 . The electric accessary device 93G has a housing 931G fixed to the game board 31 and rotatable left and right feather members 932G and 933G.

The housing 931G has an upper opening 934G that allows the left and right feather members 932G and 933G to rotate and the game ball 99 to enter. This upper opening 934G is a portion for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the electric accessory device 93G. area). That is, the game balls 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 934G. A second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 934G.

The left and right wing members 932G and 933G are rotatable by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the driving means causes the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G to approach each other. A state in which the second starting port 315 is closed (see FIG. 133(A)), and a state in which the tip portions of the left and right blade members 932G and 933G are separated to open the second starting port 315 (see FIG. 133(B)). can be switched. The left and right blade members 932G and 933G are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 93 of the first embodiment. That is, in the normal electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) causes the opening of the left and right feather members 932G and 933G of the present embodiment. Correspondingly, the return of the normal electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to the closing of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G of the present embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 133(A) where the tips of the left and right wing members 932G, 933G are close to each other, the game ball 99 passing through the first passage 921 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 932G, and the inside of the electric accessory device 93G A game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 922 collides with the side surface of the right wing member 933G and cannot enter the inside of the electric accessary device 93G. That is, in a state in which the tip portions of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are close to each other, the entry of the game ball 99 released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 into the second starting port 315 is caused by the left and right wing members 932G and Inhibited by 933G. At this time, the game ball 99 that has collided with the side surfaces of the left and right feather members 932G and 933G passes through the side of the electric accessory device 93G and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the tips of the left and right wing members 932G, 933G shown in FIG. A game ball 99 that enters the electric accessory device 93G and is released from the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 is picked up by the right wing member 933G and enters the electric accessory device 93G. As a result, the electric accessory device 93G, when the tip portions of the left and right feather members 932G, 933G are in a state of being separated from each other, allows any of the game balls 99 passing through the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the sorting device 92 to A ball is entered into the second starting port 315 .

<82nd and 83rd Embodiments>
In the thirty-ninth embodiment described above, the sorting device 92 provided with the sorting member 94 that rotates by rotating clockwise or counterclockwise upon receipt of the game ball 99 has been described. On the other hand, the sorting devices of the 82nd and 83rd embodiments serve as the sorting unit, and rotate the game balls in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction due to the interference of the game balls, thereby moving the game balls to the first path or the first path. It differs from the thirty-ninth embodiment in that it has a rotating body that distributes it to one of the two passages.

As shown in FIG. 134(A), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the eighty-second embodiment has a sorting portion that is cylindrical and can rotate freely in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. It is configured as a roller 94D (rotating body). The roller 94D is arranged directly below the introduction port 920 of the sorting device 92 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134(B), in the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the eighty-third embodiment, the sorting unit has a windmill capable of rotating freely both clockwise and counterclockwise. 94E. The windmill 94E is arranged directly below the introduction port 920 of the sorting device 92 . The windmill 94E has a rotating body 941E fixed by a nail 942E (fixing part) so as to be freely rotatable. The nail 942E has an end driven into the game board 31, the end being a fixed end, and the end opposite to the end being a free end. Also, the nail 942E is made of metal, for example, and is plastically deformable. Therefore, since the nail 942E of the windmill 94E is plastically changeable, when the position of the nail 942E deviates from the initial set position and the position of the rotor 941E deviates from the initial set position, the nail 942E is moved to the initial set position. It is possible to return to This makes it possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 942E.

Further, in the sorting device 92 of the 82nd and 83rd embodiments, since the game balls 99 interfere with each other to freely rotate in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction, the rollers 94D and the rotating bodies 941E of the windmills 94E are provided. The ratio at which the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode E, the game ball 99 is distributed to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, that is, the game ball 99 is supported by the electric support member 93 Since the player can enjoy the game while deciding whether or not to receive the ball and enter the second start hole 315, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when the distributing portion is freely rotatable such as the roller 94D or the windmill 94E, the player can easily determine the tendency (game It is also possible to read individual differences between machines. As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting strength (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding the shooting stroke at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage 922. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 922, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 922 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

Note that the configuration of the rotating body as the distribution unit is not limited to the cylindrical roller 94D shown in FIG. 134A or the rotating body 941E of the windmill 94E shown in FIG. 134B, and design changes are possible. For example, the rotating body may be a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular prism or a square prism, a member having a flat cross section such as an elliptical cylindrical member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having unevenness on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, or a rotating body having a plurality of blades. A propeller-like member or the like may be used.

Further, the rotating body such as the cylindrical roller 94D and the rotating body 941E of the windmill 94E may be configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating body. . In this case, it is conceivable that the rotation of the rotating body is alternately switched between the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, for example, at regular time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotating body does not necessarily have to switch the direction of rotation at regular time intervals, and may switch the direction of rotation at patterned irregular time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotor so that the game balls 99 are distributed between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 with a theoretical ratio of 1:1. The direction of rotation of the rotating body may be switched so that the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls to 922 is other than 1:1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of game balls between the first path 921 and the second path 922 may be changed according to the game state. For example, compared to mode B, the rotating body can be driven so that the game ball is more likely to be guided to the second passage 922 in mode E, or vice versa. In addition, a ball entry sensor is provided near the introduction port 920 of the sorting device 92, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 920 is detected by this ball entry sensor, the game ball 99 is rotated in the direction opposite to the previous rotation direction. It is also conceivable to rotate the rotor.

<84th and 85th Embodiments>
The distribution device of the eighty-fourth and eighty-fifth embodiments distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 by an immovable and non-rotatable distribution portion (fixed distribution portion) regardless of rotation or rotation. is different from the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 134(C), the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the eighty-fourth embodiment has a top portion 941F directly below the introduction port 920, and sorts as a bilaterally symmetrical mountain-shaped fixed portion 94F. part is formed. Since the game balls 99 interfering with the top portion 941F or its vicinity are distributed to the left and right in the mountain-shaped fixed portion 94F, the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134(D), in the sorting device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the eighty-fifth embodiment, the apex nail 941G (fixed portion) is positioned directly below the introduction port 920, and has a symmetrical triangular shape. A distribution portion is formed by the nails 94G. In this triangular nail 94G, game balls 99 interfering with the vertex nail 941G are distributed to the left and right, so the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. The ends of the triangular nails 38F are driven into the game board 31, the ends being fixed ends and the ends opposite to the ends being free ends. Also, the triangular nail 94G is made of metal, for example, and is plastically deformable. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 94G is plastically changeable, it is possible to return the triangular nail 94G to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 94G deviates from the initial setting position. As a result, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular peg 94G.

In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the eighty-fourth and eighty-fifth embodiments, since the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as the mountain-shaped fixed portion 94F or the triangular nail 94G, the game balls 99 The ratio distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. Thereby, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described 82nd embodiment and 83rd embodiment, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode E, the game ball 99 moves from the first passage 921 and the second Since the player can enjoy the game while deciding which one of the two passages 922 is distributed, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 receives the support of the electric support member 93 and enters the second start hole 315, the user can enjoy the game. can be improved. In addition, when the distribution section is a stationary and non-rotatable distribution section such as the mountain-shaped fixed section 94F or the triangular nail 94G, the player can distribute the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the fixed distribution section. It is also possible to read the tendency of (individual difference between game machines). As a result, the player can adjust the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 to adjust the shooting strength (shooting stroke) of the game ball, thereby finding the shooting stroke at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage 922. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy searching for a shooting intensity that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 922, or to search for a game machine 10 that allows game balls to be easily distributed to the second path 922 from a plurality of gaming machines 10. can be obtained.

In addition, the configuration of the distributing portion for distributing the game balls 99 to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing portion 94F shown in FIG. 134(C) and the triangular peg 94G shown in FIG. 134(D). The design can be changed without For example, the distributing portion may have other bilaterally symmetrical shapes such as a dome-shaped mountain portion, or four or more nails such as a square nail (rhombic nail) whose top nail is positioned directly below the inlet 920. It may consist of a nail or a single nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical, the distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 may be biased.

In the above description, when the distribution member is rotated by elastic force, an example in which the distribution member is rotated using the rotational force of a motor or the like has been described. By forming a weight portion at the tip of the portion, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a pendulum motion is performed when the game balls 99 are distributed.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the corresponding relationship between each additional note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the additional note is limited to the specific configuration attached with the reference numeral. not a thing Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction,
A game machine, wherein the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when the distribution section distributes the game balls to the first path and the distribution section rotates in the first direction, a rotational force is generated to rotate the distribution section in the second direction. . Therefore, since the distributing section is rotated in the second direction when it is rotated in the first direction, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the second path. The part hits the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path, so that more game balls can be distributed to the second path. As a result, the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second path is not mere luck or bad luck, but depends on the skill level of the player, i. fluctuates, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A2]
The allocating portion (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction, according to Appendix A1. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction by an elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then rotated in the second direction in the first direction. rotated in a first direction by a rotational force to That is, the distributing section is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by being rotated in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path. . Therefore, when the distribution part is rotated in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path, the distribution part can be repeatedly rotated with this as a trigger. Thus, by distributing the game balls to the first path once, the player can obtain the timing of distributing the game balls to the second path a plurality of times. On the other hand, it becomes easy to hit the game ball at the timing of distributing the game ball to the second path.

Further, when the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction, the allocating portion is rotated in the first direction, and after the rotation in the first direction, the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction again. be. Therefore, even after the game balls have been distributed to the second path, the distributing part can be in a state of distributing the game balls to the second path. In the above, it is possible to continuously distribute the game balls to the second path by hitting the game balls at appropriate timing by stop hitting or the like. This also enhances the amusement of the game.

[Appendix A3]
The game machine according to appendix A1, wherein the allocating part (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

[Appendix A4]
The game machine according to appendix A2, wherein the distribution part (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the second direction.

In the game machines according to appendices A3 and A4, the distribution unit can be rotated in the second direction by being rotated in the first direction by the simple principle of using elastic force, so the configuration is simple. becomes feasible.

[Appendix A5]
The distributing portion (94) is rotated in the first direction to generate elastic force for rotating in the second direction (944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1, 944Q1, 944Q2). , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, a situation can be provided in which game balls can be distributed to the second path by the distribution section by a simple configuration in which the distribution section is provided with a load generating section that generates an elastic force.

[Appendix A6]
The load generating section (944 or the like) generates an elastic force for rotating the distributing section (94 or the like) in the first direction when the distributing section (94 or the like) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix A5, characterized in that it occurs.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, with a simple configuration in which a load generating section that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution section, a player can move game balls to the second path by distributing the game balls to the first path once. can be obtained multiple times.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine according to appendix A5 or appendix A6, wherein the load generating part (944, etc.) protrudes from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the load generating section is protrudingly provided on the rotation shaft, so that the rotation period of the allocating section can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a deviation between the shooting timing of the game balls expected to be distributed to the second path and the timing of actually distributing the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix A8]
The game machine according to appendix A7, wherein the load generator (944, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8, the load generation unit is operated by a malicious player, and the distribution unit is put in a posture in which the game balls are distributed to the second path, so-called goto acts are performed. can be prevented.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generating unit (944, etc.) includes a leaf spring.

[Appendix A10]
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the leaf spring (944, etc.) extends from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generators (9442I, 9443I) include compression coil springs.

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A11, wherein the compression coil springs (9442I, 9443I) are fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A13]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generator includes a torsion coil spring.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the torsion coil spring is fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A5 to A8, wherein the load generator (9452V, 9462V) includes a spiral spring.

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine according to appendix A15, wherein the spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) are wound along the peripheral surface of the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A17]
The spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) have one end fixed to the rotating shaft (941), a first spiral spring (9452V) wound in the first direction, and one end extending from the rotating shaft (941). and a second spiral spring (9462V) fixed to and wound in the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A9 to A17, by rotating the distribution unit in the first direction, the simple configuration utilizes the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs. The allocating portion can be rotated in the second direction, and rotation of the allocating portion in the second direction can cause the allocating portion to rotate in the first direction.

[Appendix A18]
The sorting device (92) interferes with the load generating unit (944, etc.) when the sorting unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, causing the sorting unit ( 94), further comprising rotation restricting means (945, etc.) for restricting rotation in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, the rotation of the allocating portion is restricted by the rotation restricting means, so that it is possible to prevent the allocating portion from rotating more than necessary. In addition, since the load generation section can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation restriction means, the rotation of the load generation section can be controlled by a simple configuration in which the rotation of the load generation section is restricted by the rotation restriction section. Elastic force can be generated appropriately. In addition, since the rotation of the allocating portion is restricted by the rotation restricting means, the maximum rotation angle of the allocating portion can be made uniform, so that the rotation cycle of the allocating portion can be stabilized. becomes possible. This makes it easier for the player to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A19]
The game machine according to appendix A18, wherein the rotation restricting means (945, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Addendum A19, it is possible to prevent a malicious player from operating the rotation regulating section, thereby preventing the distributing section from being put in a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path. .

[Appendix A20]
A load applying part (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution part (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A19, further comprising:

The gaming machine according to Addendum A19 is provided with a load acting portion that generates an elastic force for rotating the allocating portion in the second direction when the allocating portion rotates in the first direction. A configuration in which such a load acting portion is provided can also be easily realized.

[Appendix A21]
The load acting portions (961J, 962J, etc.) rotate the distributing portion (94) in the first direction by elastic force generated when the distributing portion (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix A20, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21, the distribution section is rotated in the second direction, and an elastic force for rotating the distribution section in the first direction is generated in the load acting section. Triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of the game balls to the path, the rotation is performed by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction. Further, the allocating portion is rotated in the first direction with the rotation of the allocating portion in the second direction as a trigger, so that the allocating portion is rotated again in the second direction after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to appendix A21 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix A2.

[Appendix A22]
The game machine according to appendix A21, wherein the load acting portions (961J, 962J, etc.) are provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A22, a malicious player operates the load applying section so that the distributing section assumes a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path. can be prevented.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A20 to A22, wherein the load acting portion includes leaf springs (9611O, 9612O, etc.).

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A20 to A22, wherein the load acting portion includes a compression coil spring (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A20 to A22, wherein the load acting portion includes a torsion coil spring (961N, 962N).

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A20 to A22, wherein the load acting portion includes spiral springs (946W, 947W).

In the gaming machine according to appendices A23 to A26, the rotation of the distribution unit in the first direction is performed by a simple configuration that utilizes the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs. The allocating portion can be rotated in the second direction, and rotation of the allocating portion in the second direction can cause the allocating portion to rotate in the first direction.

[Appendix A27]
The game according to any one of appendices A20 to A26, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) further includes a load input unit (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.). machine.

[Appendix A28]
The load input unit (940J, etc.) is elastically deformed by interference with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution unit (94J, etc.). The gaming machine according to Appendix A27.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A27 and A28, the load application section interferes with the load input section, and an elastic force generated in the load application section for rotating the distribution section is input from the load input section. At this time, the load input section is elastically deformed, so that the load input section generates an elastic force that rotates the distribution section. Since the impact at the time of interference can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load acting portion and the load generating portion, it is possible to extend the life of the load acting portion and the load generating portion. In addition, it is possible to use the elastic force generated by elastic deformation when the load acting portion and the load generating portion interfere with each other to rotate the distributing portion. In addition, since the distribution member is in a state of distributing the game balls to the first passage at the opening time of the amusement arcade, compared to the case where the game balls are passed through the first passage, for example, the game balls are distributed to the second passage. If it is more advantageous for the player to let the ball pass through, it is possible to take measures against the so-called "morning", which is a state that is advantageous to the player when the game hall opens.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to appendix A27 or appendix A28, wherein the load input portion (940J or the like) projects from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29, the load input section protrudes from the rotation shaft, so that the rotation period of the distribution section can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a deviation between the shooting timing of the game balls expected to be distributed to the second path and the timing of actually distributing the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix A30]
The game machine according to appendix A29, wherein the load input section (940J, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A30, the load input unit is operated by a malicious player so that the distribution unit is put in a posture in which the game balls are distributed to the second path, so-called goto behavior. can be prevented.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine according to appendix A27, wherein the load input portion (944T) has cam surfaces (9441T, 9442T) on which the load acting portions (961O, 961U) slide.

[Appendix A32]
Any one of appendices A1 to A31, wherein the distribution unit (94) is capable of distributing game balls introduced from the inlet (920) in a stationary state to the first passage (921). The gaming machine described in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A32, when the distribution unit is in a stationary state, the distribution unit is in a posture in which game balls are distributed to the first path. When the game ball is introduced into the first path, the game ball is distributed to the first passage by the rotation of the distribution section. Therefore, when game balls introduced into the sorting device are received by the sorting unit, it is possible to prevent the sorting unit from being maintained in a stationary state, thereby preventing clogging of game balls in the sorting device.

[Appendix A33]
The game machine according to appendix A32, wherein the distributing part (94) has an eccentric part (943) that takes a posture in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first path (921) in the stationary state.

[Appendix A34]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A33, wherein the eccentric portion (943) is integrated with the rotating shaft (941) via a support portion (946) extending from the rotating shaft (941). .

[Appendix A35]
The distribution part (94) includes a first guide part (942L) that guides the game ball introduced from the inlet (920) to the first passage (921), and the first guide part (942L). and a second guiding portion (942R) arranged line-symmetrically with respect to the guiding portion (942R) for guiding the game ball introduced from the inlet (920) to the second passage (922),
The axis of symmetry between the first guide portion (942L) and the second guide portion (942R) is inclined toward the first passage (921) with respect to the vertical axis in the stationary state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A33 or Supplementary Note A34.

In the gaming machine according to notes A33 to A35, the simple configuration of providing the eccentric part in the sorting part can effectively prevent ball clogging in the sorting device and can take countermeasures against wake-up.

[Appendix A36]
Further comprising a shooting control means (41) capable of shooting game balls at predetermined intervals (Th),
The distributing part (94) shifts the rotational direction from the second direction to the first direction when a first switching point (P1) for switching the rotational direction from the first direction to the second direction is set as a starting point. The unit rotation period (Ts) from the second switching point (P2) to the first switching point (P1) again is a positive integer multiple or substantially positive of the predetermined interval (Th). The game machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A35, characterized in that it is an integral multiple (for example, a range of ±15% of the positive integral multiple of the rotation period).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A36, the unit rotation period (Ts) is a positive integral multiple of the game ball firing interval (predetermined interval (Th)) or a value close to it, so that game balls are distributed to the second path. It becomes easy to link the state (distributable state) and the shooting timing of the game ball. Also, if the shooting timing of the game balls can be matched with the timing of distribution to the second passage of the distribution device, the game balls can be distributed to the second passage with a high probability by performing stop shots after that. is also possible. For example, after matching the launch timing of the game ball with the timing of distribution to the second passage of the distribution device, by repeating the launching of one ball and the stopping of one ball, the game ball is sent to the second passage with a high probability. It is also possible to allow the balls to be sorted. In addition, when a plurality of game ball shooting intervals are set by the shooting control means, the unit rotation period is a positive integral multiple of the shortest shooting interval among the plurality of shooting intervals or a value close to it. .

[Appendix A37]
The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is within a range of a positive integral multiple of the predetermined interval (Th) ±15%.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is 1.6 to 2.4 times the predetermined interval (Th).

In the game machines according to appendices A37 and A38, even if the unit rotation period (Ts) deviates from a positive integral multiple of the game ball firing interval (Th), the deviation is within a predetermined range. , the same effects as those of the gaming machine according to appendix A36 can be obtained.

[Appendix A39]
a position indicator (923) that indicates to the player that the distribution section (94) is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path (922);
An instruction state for controlling the position instruction unit (923) to indicate to the player that the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922); and the instruction state. position indicator control means (51) for controlling switching between different non-instruction states;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A38, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Addendum A39, the position indication unit is controlled by the position indication unit control means, so that the player is notified that the distribution unit is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the indicated state of the position indicating portion as a guideline. As a result, the player can easily find the launching timing of the game ball at which the game ball is easily sorted to the second path, compared to the case where the game ball is launched while visually confirming the rotation direction and posture of the sorting section. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A40]
The position indication part (923) is a light emitting part ( 923).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40, the position indicating unit is placed in the indicating state and the non-indicating state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, so the position indicating unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix A41]
The game according to appendix A40, wherein the sorting device (92) further has a visual assistance part (925) for facilitating visual recognition between the lighting state and the light-out state of the light emitting part (923). machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A41, if the position indicator has a light emitting part, there is a concern that the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting part will be difficult to see due to the lighting of lamps other than the position indicator. By providing the portion, it is possible to easily distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting portion.

[Appendix A42]
The sorting device (92) further comprises position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94),
The position indication section control means (51) controls switching of the position indication section (923) between the indication state and the non-indication state based on the detection result of the position detection means (95). A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A39 to A41 characterized.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42, since the pointing state and the non-instructing state of the position indication unit are switched based on the detection result of the position detection means, an indication that appropriately reflects the rotational position (orientation) of the distribution unit States and non-indicating states can be implemented. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the distributing section is in a position where the game balls can be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A39 to A42, wherein the position indicating unit (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43, since the position indicator is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the timing at which game balls are likely to be sorted to the second path without looking away from the sorting device. Therefore, the player checks the sorting device to measure the launch timing of the game ball, and moves the line of sight greatly to see whether the game ball introduced to the sorting device is sorted to the first passage or the second passage. You can check without having to. As a result, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launching timing of the game ball by the player and the sorting result of the launching of the game ball at that timing.

[Appendix A44]
A launch instruction section (923) that indicates the launch timing of game balls that are likely to be distributed to the second passage (922);
Controls the firing instruction unit (923) to control switching between an instruction state indicating a shooting timing at which game balls are likely to be distributed to the second path (922) and a non-instruction state different from the instruction state. a firing instruction section control means (51) for
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A39 to A43, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A44, the launch instruction unit is controlled by the launch instruction unit control means, so that the player is notified that the game ball launch timing is such that the distribution unit can distribute the game balls to the second path. be notified. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the launch instruction section as a guideline. As a result, the player can easily find the shooting timing of the game ball, which makes it easier for the game ball to be guided to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually confirming the rotation direction and posture of the distribution part. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A45]
The shooting instruction part (923) has a light-emitting part (923) that is brought into the instruction state by being lit when it is the shooting timing of the game balls that are likely to be distributed to the second path (922). The gaming machine according to appendix A44, characterized by:

In the game machine according to appendix A45, the firing instruction unit is set in the instruction state and the non-instruction state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, so the shooting instruction unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix A46]
The game according to appendix A45, wherein the sorting device (92) further has a visual recognition assisting part (925) for facilitating visual recognition between the light emitting part (923) and the light emitting part (923). machine.

In the game machine according to appendix A46, if the firing instruction unit has a light emitting unit, it may be difficult to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit due to the lighting of lamps other than the firing instruction unit. By providing the portion, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting portion, so the above concerns are resolved.

[Appendix A47]
The sorting device (92) further comprises position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94),
The firing instruction section control means (51) controls switching of the position instruction section (923) between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the detection result of the position detection means (95). A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A44 to A46 characterized.

In the game machine according to appendix A47, since the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the firing instruction unit are switched based on the detection result of the position detection means, an instruction that appropriately reflects the rotational position (orientation) of the distribution unit States and non-indicating states can be implemented. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that it is time to shoot a game ball that can be distributed to the second path by the distribution unit.

[Appendix A48]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A44 to A47, wherein the launch instruction unit (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A48, since the launch instruction unit is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the launch timing at which the game balls are easily sorted to the second path without looking away from the sorting device. . Therefore, the player checks the sorting device and measures the shooting timing of the game balls, and moves the line of sight greatly to see whether the game balls introduced to the sorting device are sorted to the first passage or the second passage. You can check without having to. As a result, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launching timing of the game ball by the player and the sorting result of the launching of the game ball at that timing.

[Appendix A49]
Direction indicator parts (923, 923L, 923R) that indicate the direction of rotation of the distribution part (94);
an instruction state for controlling the direction instruction units (923, 923L, 923R) to indicate that the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction; A direction indicator control means (51) for controlling switching to a non-instruction state different from the
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A48, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A49, the rotation direction of the distribution section is notified to the player by controlling the direction instruction section by the direction instruction section control means. Therefore, it is possible to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path by using the indication state of the direction indicator as a guide. As a result, the player can easily find the launching timing of the game ball that easily guides the game ball to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually confirming the rotation direction and posture of the distribution unit. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix A50]
The direction indicating portions (923, 923L, 923R) are brought into the indicating state by being lit when the distributing portion (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction. The game machine according to appendix A49, characterized in that it has light emitting units (923, 923L, 923R) that

In the gaming machine according to appendix A50, the direction indicating unit is set in the indicating state and the non-indicating state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, so the direction indicating unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix A51]
The game according to appendix A50, wherein the sorting device (92) further has a visual assistance part (925) for facilitating visual recognition between the lighting state and the light-out state of the light emitting part (923). machine.

In the game machine according to appendix A51, if the direction indicator has a light emitting part, there is a concern that the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting part will be difficult to see due to the lighting of lamps other than the direction indicator. By providing the portion, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting portion, so the above concerns are resolved.

[Appendix A52]
The direction indicator (923L, 923R)
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means (51) is set to the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means. a first direction indicator (923L) brought into the non-instruction state by (51);
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means (51) is set to the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means a second direction indicator (923R) brought into the non-indicating state by (51);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A49 to A51, comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A52, since the direction indicator includes two of the first direction indicator and the second direction indicator, the direction of rotation of the sorting part is determined by the pointing state and the non-instructing state of one direction indicator. It becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution unit compared to the case of grasping. In addition, it is not necessary to pay attention to the directions of the pointing and non-pointing states of the direction pointing portion. Since the direction of rotation of the distribution unit can be grasped only by paying attention to the indication state of the two-direction indicator, it becomes easier to accurately grasp the direction of rotation of the distribution unit. As a result, it becomes easy to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, so even a player with low skill can easily hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the second passage. It is possible to improve the probability that can be launched.

[Appendix A53]
The sorting device (92) further comprises detection means for detecting the direction of rotation of the sorting unit (94),
The direction instruction section control means (51) controls switching of the direction instruction section (923) between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the detection result of the detection means. to Supplementary Note A52.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53, since the pointing state and the non-instructing state of the direction indicator are switched based on the detection result of the detection means, the direction indicator properly reflects the rotation direction (orientation) of the allocator. and non-indicating states can be realized. Therefore, based on the pointing state and the non-pointing state of the direction indicator, it is possible to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path, so that the skill of the player is appropriately reflected. It is possible to provide a game machine with a game that can be played.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A49 to A53, wherein the direction indicator (923, 923L, 923R) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54, since the direction indicating unit is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the rotation direction of the sorting unit without looking away from the sorting device. Therefore, the player checks the direction of rotation of the sorting section in the sorting device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and the game ball introduced into the sorting device goes to either the first passage or the second passage. You can check whether it has been sorted without moving your line of sight. As a result, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the sorting result of the launch of the game ball at that timing.

[Appendix A55]
The game machine according to appendix A1 to appendix A54, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A55, since the distribution section is visible from the outside, the player can play the game by checking the rotation operation of the distribution section and timing the game balls to be easily distributed to the second path. You can hit the ball.

[Appendix A56]
A prize winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the detection that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922) by the passage detection means (319'), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) ) is restricted from entering the winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation a movable accessory member (93) that operates to a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A55, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56, when the passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path, the game ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the game ball can be entered. It is determined whether or not to shift to the special game state. In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the second path, the player ignores the timing when the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which is the trigger for the determination of the transition to the special game state, and the game ball is launched. be possible. As a result, the player can advance the game in such a way that his/her skill is advantageous to him/herself. In other words, it is possible for the player to obtain an opportunity to receive a large number of transition determinations to a special game with a small number of game balls.

[Appendix A57]
a winning opening (314L) into which game balls can enter;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the passage detection means (319') detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the game ball passes through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922). From the first position (standby position) where entry of the game ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, the winning hole of the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) A movable accessory member (93) that operates to a second position (operating position) that allows entry into (315);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A56, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, both the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage are moved by the movable accessory member. A ball can be entered into the prize winning opening by the member. That is, the movable accessory member simultaneously restricts and permits entry of game balls into the winning opening for game balls passing through the first passage and game balls passing through the second passage. Therefore, a movable accessory member that restricts and permits entry of game balls passing through the first path into the winning opening and restricts and permits entry of game balls that pass through the second path into the winning opening. Compared to the case where the movable accessory member is separately provided, not only is it possible to restrict and allow the entry of game balls in the first path and the second path to the winning opening with a simpler configuration, but also the movable Control of accessory members is also simplified.

[Appendix A58]
The movable accessory member (93) triggered by the first game state (mode B) and the passage detection means (319') detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922). and a second game state (mode B) whose operation time is longer than that of the first game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A57.

[Appendix A59]
In the second game state, compared to the first game state, when the movable accessory member (93) is operated, the game ball passing through the first passage (921) 93) The gaming machine according to appendix A58, characterized in that it is easy for a ball to enter the game machine.

[Appendix A60]
The plurality of game states further include a special game state (jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (mode B) and the second game state (mode E),
In the first game state (mode B) and the second game state (mode E), whether to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the winning opening (315) Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the special game state (jackpot game state) when the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state). ,
The second game state (mode E) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) by the determination means (41) as compared with the first game state (mode B). The gaming machine according to appendix A58 or appendix A59, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine according to appendices A58 to A60, the operation time of the movable accessory member differs between the first game state and the second game state, and the number of game balls entering the winning opening when the movable accessory member is activated The easiness of entry of a game ball, especially the easiness of entry of a game ball into a winning opening for a game ball passing through the first passage, differs. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the winning opening depends on whether it is in the first game state or the second game state and whether it passes through the first passage or the second passage of the sorting device. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with different playability.

[Appendix A61]
The game machine according to any one of appendices A47 to A60, characterized in that the sorting device (92) is provided at a position where game balls launched to the right side area of the game board (31) are introduced. .

[Appendix A62]
Supplementary note A61 further comprising a guide part (31Y) for guiding all game balls launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to the introduction port (920) of the distribution device (92) The game machine described.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A61 and A62, the game ball is introduced into the sorting device by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game board, that is, hitting the game ball to the right. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a playability in which a game ball is entered into a prize winning opening using a sorting device in a specific game state among a plurality of game states.

[Appendix A63]
The movable accessory member (93) is
A first guiding portion (931A, 932G) that guides a game ball passing through the first passage (921) at the second position toward the winning opening (315);
A second guiding portion (932A, 933G) that guides the game ball passing through the second passage (922) at the second position toward the winning opening (315);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A57 to A62, characterized by having

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63, the movable role member having a simple configuration having the first guide portion and the second guide portion allows the game balls in the first path and the second path to move when the movable role member is at the second position. It is possible to guide both the game balls in the path to the winning opening.

[Appendix A64]
The movable accessory member (93) is provided between the first guide (931A) and the second guide (932A), and at the second position, the game ball enters the winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix A63, further comprising a through-hole (933A) for accepting a ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A64, in addition to the first guide portion and the second guide portion, the game balls in the first passage and the game balls in the second passage are moved by the movable accessory member having a simple structure having a through hole. It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole.

[Appendix A65]
The first guide portion (932G) and the second guide portion (933G) are
At the first position, they are close to each other and close the winning opening (315) to the winning opening (315) of the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922). Restricting the entry of game balls of
In the second position, they are separated from each other, and the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) enters the winning opening (315) with the winning opening (315) opened. The gaming machine according to appendix A64, characterized in that it allows entry of a game ball of

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56, the movable role member having a simple configuration having the first guide portion and the second guide portion that can be moved closer together and separated from each other allows the game in the first path to be played when the movable role member is at the second position. It is possible to guide the ball and the game ball in the second path to the winning opening.

[Appendix B1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the distribution unit (94) can distribute game balls introduced from the inlet (920) in a stationary state to the first passage (921).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the distribution unit is in a stationary state, the distribution unit is in a posture of distributing game balls to the first path. When the game ball is introduced into the first path, the game ball is distributed to the first passage by the rotation of the distribution section. Therefore, when game balls introduced into the sorting device are received by the sorting unit, it is possible to prevent the sorting unit from being maintained in a stationary state, thereby preventing clogging of game balls in the sorting device.

[Appendix B2]
The game machine according to appendix B1, wherein the distributing part (94) has an eccentric part (943) that takes a posture in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first path (921) in the stationary state.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B2, wherein the eccentric portion (943) is integrated with the rotating shaft (941) via a support portion (946) extending from the rotating shaft (941). .

[Appendix B4]
The distribution part (94) includes a first guide part (942L) that guides the game ball introduced from the inlet (920) to the first passage (921), and the first guide part (942L). and a second guiding portion (942R) arranged line-symmetrically with respect to the guiding portion (942R) for guiding the game ball introduced from the inlet (920) to the second passage (922),
The axis of symmetry between the first guide portion (942L) and the second guide portion (942R) is inclined toward the first passage (921) with respect to the vertical axis in the stationary state. The gaming machine according to appendix B2 or appendix B3.

In the game machines according to appendices B2 to B4, ball clogging in the distributing device can be effectively prevented by a simple configuration in which an eccentric portion is provided in the distributing portion.

[Appendix B5]
Supplementary notes B1 to B4, wherein the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by being rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, when the distribution unit distributes the game balls to the first path and the distribution unit rotates in the first direction, a rotational force is generated to rotate the distribution unit in the second direction. . Therefore, since the distributing section is rotated in the second direction when it is rotated in the first direction, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the second path. The part hits the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path, so that more game balls can be distributed to the second path. As a result, the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second path is not mere luck or bad luck, but depends on the skill level of the player, i. fluctuates, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix B6]
The distribution part (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction by an elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. rotated in a first direction by a rotational force to That is, the distributing section is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by being rotated in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path. . Therefore, when the distribution part is rotated in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path, the distribution part can be repeatedly rotated with this as a trigger. Thus, by distributing the game balls to the first path once, the player can obtain the timing of distributing the game balls to the second path a plurality of times. On the other hand, it becomes easy to hit the game ball at the timing of distributing the game ball to the second path.

Further, when the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction, the allocating portion is rotated in the first direction, and after the rotation in the first direction, the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction again. be. Therefore, even after the game balls have been distributed to the second path, the distributing part can be in a state of distributing the game balls to the second path. In the above, it is possible to continuously distribute the game balls to the second path by hitting the game balls at appropriate timing by stop hitting or the like. This also enhances the amusement of the game.

[Appendix B7]
The game machine according to appendix B6, wherein the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

[Appendix B8]
The game machine according to appendix B7, wherein the allocating part (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the second direction.

In the game machines according to appendices B7 and B8, it is possible to rotate the allocating portion in the first direction by using the simple principle of using elastic force, thereby allowing the distribution portion to rotate in the second direction. becomes feasible.

[Appendix B9]
The distributing portion (94) is rotated in the first direction to generate elastic force for rotating in the second direction (944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1, 944Q1, 944Q2). , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9, a situation can be provided in which game balls can be distributed to the second path by the distribution section by a simple configuration in which the distribution section is provided with a load generating section that generates an elastic force.

[Appendix B10]
The load generating section (944 or the like) generates an elastic force for rotating the distributing section (94 or the like) in the first direction when the distributing section (94 or the like) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix B9, characterized in that it occurs.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10, with a simple configuration in which a load generating section that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution section, a game ball can be distributed to the second passage once by distributing the game ball to the first passage. can be obtained multiple times.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to appendix B9 or appendix B10, wherein the load generating part (944, etc.) protrudes from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B11, since the load generating section is protruded from the rotating shaft, it is possible to make the rotation cycle of the allocating section uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a deviation between the shooting timing of the game balls expected to be distributed to the second path and the timing of actually distributing the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix B12]
The game machine according to appendix B11, wherein the load generator (944, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B12, it is possible that a malicious player operates the load generation unit so that the distributing unit assumes a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path, which is a so-called goto act. can be prevented.

[Appendix B13]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments B9 to B12, wherein the load generation unit (944, etc.) includes a leaf spring.

[Appendix B14]
The game machine according to appendix B13, wherein the leaf spring (944, etc.) extends from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B9 to B12, wherein the load generators (9442I, 9443I) include compression coil springs.

[Appendix B16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B15, wherein the compression coil springs (9442I, 9443I) are fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B17]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B9 to B12, wherein the load generator includes a torsion coil spring.

[Appendix B18]
The gaming machine according to appendix B17, wherein the torsion coil spring is fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B19]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B9 to B12, wherein the load generator (9452V, 9462V) includes a spiral spring.

[Appendix B20]
The gaming machine according to appendix B19, wherein the spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) are wound along the peripheral surface of the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B21]
The spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) have one end fixed to the rotating shaft (941), a first spiral spring (9452V) wound in the first direction, and one end extending from the rotating shaft (941). and a second spiral spring (9462V) fixed to and wound in the second direction.

In the game machine according to appendices B13 to B21, by rotating the distribution unit in the first direction by a simple configuration that utilizes the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs, The allocating portion can be rotated in the second direction, and rotation of the allocating portion in the second direction can cause the allocating portion to rotate in the first direction.

[Appendix B22]
The sorting device (92) interferes with the load generating unit (944, etc.) when the sorting unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, causing the sorting unit ( 94), further comprising rotation restricting means (945, etc.) for restricting rotation in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B22, the rotation of the allocating portion is restricted by the rotation restricting means, so that it is possible to prevent the allocating portion from rotating more than necessary. In addition, since the load generating section can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation restricting means, the load generating section can be controlled by a simple configuration in which the rotation of the load generating section is restricted by the rotation restricting means. Elastic force can be generated appropriately. In addition, since the rotation of the allocating portion is restricted by the rotation restricting means, the maximum rotation angle of the allocating portion can be made uniform, so that the rotation cycle of the allocating portion can be stabilized. becomes possible. This makes it easier for the player to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix B23]
The game machine according to appendix B22, wherein the rotation restricting means (945, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B23, it is possible to prevent a malicious player from operating the rotation regulating part, thereby preventing the distributing part from being put in a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path. .

[Appendix B24]
A load applying part (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution part (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B23, further comprising:

The gaming machine according to Appendix B24 is provided with a load acting portion that generates an elastic force for rotating the allocating portion in the second direction when the allocating portion rotates in the first direction. A configuration in which such a load acting portion is provided can be easily realized, and the same effects as those of the game machine according to appendix B23 in which the load generating portion is provided in the distribution portion can be obtained.

[Appendix B25]
The load applying parts (961J, 962J, etc.) rotate the distributing part (94) in the first direction by elastic force generated when the distributing part (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix B24, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B25, the distribution section is rotated in the second direction, and an elastic force for rotating the distribution section in the first direction is generated in the load acting section. Triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of the game balls to the path, the rotation is performed by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction. Further, the allocating portion is rotated in the first direction with the rotation of the allocating portion in the second direction as a trigger, so that the allocating portion is rotated again in the second direction after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to appendix B23 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix B9.

[Appendix B26]
The game machine according to appendix B25, wherein the load acting portions (961J, 962J, etc.) are provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix B26, it is possible that a malicious player operates the load applying section so that the distributing section assumes a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path, that is, a so-called goto act is performed. can be prevented.

[Appendix B27]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes leaf springs (9611O, 9612O, etc.).

[Appendix B28]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes a compression coil spring (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix B29]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes a torsion coil spring (961N, 962N).

[Appendix B30]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes spiral springs (946W, 947W).

In the game machine according to appendices B27 to B30, by rotating the distribution unit in the first direction by a simple configuration that utilizes the elastic force of known springs such as leaf springs, compression coil springs, torsion coil springs, and spiral springs, The allocating portion can be rotated in the second direction, and rotation of the allocating portion in the second direction can cause the allocating portion to rotate in the first direction.

[Appendix B31]
Any one of appendices B24 to B30, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) further includes a load input unit (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) The game machine described.

[Appendix B32]
The load input unit (940J, etc.) is elastically deformed by interference with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution unit (94J, etc.). The gaming machine according to Appendix B31.

In the gaming machines according to appendices B31 and B32, the load application section interferes with the load input section, and elastic force generated in the load application section for rotating the distribution section is input from the load input section. At this time, the load input section is elastically deformed, so that an elastic force for rotating the distribution section is generated in the load input section. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to appendix B31 and appendix B32, since the impact at the time of interference between the load applying part and the load generating part can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load applying part and the load generating part, the load applying part and the load generating part can be absorbed. It becomes possible to extend the life of the part. In addition, it is possible to use the elastic force generated by the elastic deformation when the load acting portion and the load generating portion interfere with each other to rotate the distributing portion. In addition, since the distribution member is in a state of distributing the game balls to the first passage at the opening time of the amusement arcade, compared to the case where the game balls are passed through the first passage, for example, the game balls are distributed to the second passage. If it is more advantageous for the player to let the ball pass, it is possible to take measures against the so-called "morning", which is a state that is advantageous to the player when the game parlor opens.

[Appendix B33]
33. The gaming machine according to Appendix 31 or 32, wherein the load input portion (940J, etc.) projects from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B33, since the load input section protrudes from the rotation shaft, it is possible to make the rotation cycle of the distribution section uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a deviation between the shooting timing of the game balls expected to be distributed to the second path and the timing of actually distributing the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix B34]
The game machine according to appendix A29, wherein the load input section (940J, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix B34, the load input unit is operated by a malicious player so that the distributing unit assumes a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second passage, which is a so-called goto act. can be prevented.

[Appendix B35]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B31, wherein the load input portion (944T) has cam surfaces (9441T, 9442T) on which the load acting portions (961O, 961U) slide.

[Appendix B36]
The game machine according to appendix B1 to appendix B35, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B36, since the distribution section can be visually recognized from the outside, the player can play the game by checking the rotation operation of the distribution section and at the timing when the game balls are likely to be distributed to the second path. You can hit the ball.

[Appendix B37]
A prize winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the detection that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922) by the passage detection means (319'), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) ) is restricted from entering the winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation a movable accessory member (93) that operates to a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B36, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B37, when the passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path, the game ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the game ball can be entered. It is determined whether or not to shift to the special game state. In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the second path, the player ignores the timing when the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which is the trigger for the determination of the transition to the special game state, and the game ball is launched. be possible. As a result, the player can advance the game in such a way that his/her skill is advantageous to him/herself. In other words, it is possible for the player to obtain an opportunity to receive a large number of transition determinations to a special game with a small number of game balls.

[Appendix C1]
a shooting control means (41) capable of shooting game balls at predetermined intervals (Th);
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
with
The distributing part (94) shifts the rotational direction from the second direction to the first direction when a first switching point (P1) for switching the rotational direction from the first direction to the second direction is set as a starting point. The unit rotation period (Ts) from the second switching point (P2) to the first switching point (P1) again is a positive integer multiple or substantially positive of the predetermined interval (Th). A gaming machine characterized by being an integer multiple (for example, a range of ±15% of a positive integer multiple of the rotation period).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the unit rotation period (Ts) is a positive integral multiple of the shooting interval (predetermined interval (Th)) of the game ball or a value close to it, so that the game balls are distributed to the second path. It becomes easy to link the state (distributable state) and the shooting timing of the game ball. Also, if the shooting timing of the game balls can be matched with the timing of distribution to the second passage of the distribution device, the game balls can be distributed to the second passage with a high probability by performing stop shots after that. is also possible. For example, after matching the launch timing of the game ball with the timing of distribution to the second passage of the distribution device, by repeating the launching of one ball and the stopping of one ball, the game ball is sent to the second passage with a high probability. It is also possible to allow the balls to be sorted. In addition, when a plurality of game ball shooting intervals are set by the shooting control means, the unit rotation period is a positive integral multiple of the shortest shooting interval among the plurality of shooting intervals or a value close to it. .

[Appendix C2]
The game machine according to appendix C1, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is within a range of a positive integral multiple of the predetermined interval (Th) ±15%.

[Appendix C3]
The game machine according to appendix C2, wherein the unit rotation period (Ts) is 1.6 to 2.4 times the predetermined interval (Th).

In the game machines according to appendices C2 and C3, even if the unit rotation period (Ts) deviates from a positive integral multiple of the game ball firing interval (Th), even if the deviation is within a predetermined range. , it is possible to achieve the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix C1.

[Appendix C4]
Any one of appendices C1 to C3, wherein the allocating portion (94) is rotatable in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by being rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, when the allocating unit distributes the game balls to the first path and the allocating unit rotates in the first direction, a rotational force is generated to rotate the allocating unit in the second direction. . Therefore, since the distributing section is rotated in the second direction when it is rotated in the first direction, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the second path. The part hits the game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path, so that more game balls can be distributed to the second path. As a result, the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second path is not mere luck or bad luck, but depends on the skill level of the player, i. fluctuates, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
According to appendix C4, the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by being rotated in the second direction. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, the allocating portion rotates in the second direction by an elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then rotates in the first direction obtained by rotating in the second direction. rotated in a first direction by a rotational force to That is, the distributing section is rotated by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction, triggered by being rotated in the first direction by distributing game balls to the first path. . Therefore, when the allocating portion is rotated in the first direction by allocating game balls to the first path, it is possible to rotate the allocating portion repeatedly with this as a trigger. Thus, by distributing the game balls to the first path once, the player can obtain the timing of distributing the game balls to the second path a plurality of times. On the other hand, it becomes easy to hit the game ball at the timing of distributing the game ball to the second path.

Further, when the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction, the allocating portion is rotated in the first direction, and after the rotation in the first direction, the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction again. be. Therefore, even after the game balls have been distributed to the second path, the distributing part can be in a state of distributing the game balls to the second path. In the above, it is possible to continuously distribute the game balls to the second path by hitting the game balls at appropriate timing by stop hitting or the like. This also enhances the amusement of the game.

[Appendix C6]
The game machine according to appendix C4, wherein the allocating part (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the first direction.

[Appendix C7]
The game machine according to appendix C6, wherein the allocating part (94, etc.) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by being rotated in the second direction.

In the game machines according to appendices C6 and C7, the distribution unit can be rotated in the first direction by the simple principle of using elastic force, and can be rotated in the second direction, so the configuration is simple. becomes feasible.

[Appendix C8]
The distributing portion (94) is rotated in the first direction to generate elastic force for rotating in the second direction (944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1, 944Q1, 944Q2). , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C8, a situation can be provided in which game balls can be distributed to the second path by the distribution section by a simple configuration in which the distribution section is provided with a load generating section that generates an elastic force.

[Appendix C9]
The load generating section (944 or the like) generates an elastic force for rotating the distributing section (94 or the like) in the first direction when the distributing section (94 or the like) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix C5, characterized in that it occurs.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9, with a simple configuration in which a load generating section that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution section, a game ball can be distributed to the second passage once by distributing the game ball to the first passage. Since the timing for distributing is obtained a plurality of times, even a player with low skill can easily launch a game ball at the timing for distributing the game ball to the second passage by the distributing part.

[Appendix C10]
The gaming machine according to appendix C8 or appendix C9, wherein the load generating part (944, etc.) protrudes from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10, since the load generating section protrudes from the rotating shaft, it is possible to make the rotation cycle of the allocating section uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a deviation between the shooting timing of the game balls expected to be distributed to the second path and the timing of actually distributing the game balls to the second path.

[Appendix C11]
The game machine according to appendix C10, wherein the load generator (944, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C11, the load generation unit is operated by a malicious player so that the distribution unit takes a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path, which is a so-called goto act. can be prevented.

[Appendix C12]
The sorting device (92) interferes with the load generating unit (944, etc.) when the sorting unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, causing the sorting unit ( 94), further comprising rotation restricting means (945, etc.) for restricting rotation in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C12, the rotation of the allocating portion is restricted by the rotation restricting means, so it is possible to prevent the allocating portion from rotating more than necessary. In addition, since the load generating section can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution section is restricted by the rotation restricting means, the load generating section can be controlled by a simple configuration in which the rotation of the load generating section is restricted by the rotation restricting means. Elastic force can be generated appropriately. In addition, since the rotation of the allocating portion is restricted by the rotation restricting means, the maximum rotation angle of the allocating portion can be made uniform, so that the rotation cycle of the allocating portion can be stabilized. becomes possible. This makes it easier for the player to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix C13]
The game machine according to appendix C12, wherein the rotation restricting means (945, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C13, it is possible to prevent a malicious player from operating the rotation regulating section, thereby preventing the distributing section from being put in a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path. .

[Appendix C14]
A load applying part (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution part (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution part (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C8 to C13, further comprising:

The gaming machine according to appendix C14 is provided with a load acting portion that generates an elastic force for rotating the allocating portion in the second direction when the allocating portion rotates in the first direction. A configuration in which such a load acting portion is provided can be easily realized, and the same effects as those of the game machine according to appendix C8 in which the load generating portion is provided in the distribution portion can be obtained.

[Appendix C15]
The load applying parts (961J, 962J, etc.) rotate the distributing part (94) in the first direction by elastic force generated when the distributing part (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to appendix C14, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, when the allocating portion is rotated in the second direction, an elastic force for rotating the allocating portion in the first direction is generated in the load acting portion. Triggered by rotation in the first direction due to distribution of the game balls to the path, the rotation is performed by repeating rotation in the second direction and rotation in the first direction. Further, the allocating portion is rotated in the first direction with the rotation of the allocating portion in the second direction as a trigger, so that the allocating portion is rotated again in the second direction after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to appendix C15 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix C9.

[Appendix C16]
The gaming machine according to appendix C15 or appendix C16, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) further includes a load input unit (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix C17]
The load input unit (940J, etc.) is elastically deformed by interference with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution unit (94J, etc.). The gaming machine according to appendix C16.

In the gaming machines according to appendices C16 and C17, the load application section interferes with the load input section, and elastic force generated in the load application section for rotating the distribution section is input from the load input section. At this time, the load input section is elastically deformed, so that an elastic force for rotating the distribution section is generated in the load input section. Therefore, in the game machine according to appendices C16 and C17, since the impact caused by the interference between the load acting part and the load generating part can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load acting part and the load generating part, the load acting part and the load generating part It becomes possible to extend the life of the part. In addition, it is possible to use the elastic force generated by elastic deformation when the load acting portion and the load generating portion interfere with each other to rotate the distributing portion.

[Appendix C14]
The game machine according to appendix C17, wherein the load acting portions (961J, 962J, etc.) are provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C14, it is possible that a malicious player operates the load applying section so that the distributing section assumes a posture in which game balls are distributed to the second path, that is, a so-called goto act is performed. can be prevented.

[Appendix C15]
The game machine according to appendix C1 to appendix C14, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, since the distribution section can be visually recognized from the outside, the player can play the game by checking the rotation operation of the distribution section and timing the game balls to be easily distributed to the second path. You can hit the ball.

[Appendix C16]
driving means (973X) for applying a driving force for rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) for controlling the driving means (973X) and rotating the allocating part (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the allocating part (94) )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C3, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C16, when the allocating unit is provided with a sorting device rotated by external power, the effect of the gaming machine according to supplementary note C1 can be achieved.

[Appendix C17]
A prize winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the detection that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922) by the passage detection means (319'), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) ) is restricted from entering the winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation a movable accessory member (93) that operates to a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C17, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C17, when the passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path, the game ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the game ball can be entered. It is determined whether or not to shift to the special game state. In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the second path, the player ignores the timing when the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which is the trigger for the determination of the transition to the special game state, and the game ball is launched. be possible. As a result, the player can advance the game in such a way that his/her skill is advantageous to him/herself. In other words, it is possible for the player to obtain an opportunity to receive a large number of transition determinations to a special game with a small number of game balls.

[Appendix D1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
a position indicator (923) that indicates to the player that the distribution section (94) is in a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path (922);
An instruction state for controlling the position instruction unit (923) to indicate to the player that the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922); and the instruction state. position indicator control means (51) for controlling switching between different non-instruction states;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the position indicator is controlled by the position indicator control means, so that the player is notified that the distribution section is at a position where game balls can be distributed to the second path. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the indicated state of the position indicating portion as a guideline. As a result, the player can easily find the launching timing of the game ball at which the game ball is easily sorted to the second path, compared to the case where the game ball is launched while visually confirming the rotation direction and posture of the sorting section. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix D2]
The position indication part (923) is a light emitting part ( 923).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, since the position indicator is placed in the pointing state and the non-indicating state by turning on and off the light emitting section, the position pointing section is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting section.

[Appendix D3]
The game according to appendix D2, wherein the sorting device (92) further has a visual assistance part (925) for facilitating visual recognition between the lighting state and the light-out state of the light emitting part (923). machine.

In the game machine according to appendix D3, if the position indicator has a light-emitting part, there is a concern that the lighting and extinguishing of the light-emitting part may become difficult to see due to the lighting of lamps other than the position indicator. By providing the portion, it is possible to easily distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting portion.

[Appendix D4]
The sorting device (92) further comprises position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94),
The position indication section control means (51) controls switching of the position indication section (923) between the indication state and the non-indication state based on the detection result of the position detection means (95). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, since the pointing state and the non-instructing state of the position indication unit are switched based on the detection result of the position detection means, an indication that appropriately reflects the rotational position (orientation) of the distribution unit States and non-indicating states can be implemented. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the distributing section is in a position where the game balls can be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix D5]
driving means (97X) for applying a driving force for rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) for controlling the driving means (97X) and rotating the allocating part (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the allocating part (94) )When,
further comprising
The position indication section control means (51) changes the indication state and the non-instruction state of the position indication section (923) based on the control state of the drive means (97X) by the drive control means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, characterized by controlling switching.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the pointing state and the non-indicating state of the position indicator are switched based on the control state of the driving means by the drive control means, so the rotation direction (attitude) of the distribution part is appropriately reflected. A pointing state and a non-pointing state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the distributing section is in a position where the game balls can be distributed to the second path.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D5, wherein the position indication unit (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, since the position indicator is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the timing at which the game balls are likely to be sorted to the second path without looking away from the sorting device. Therefore, the player checks the sorting device to measure the launch timing of the game ball, and moves the line of sight greatly to see whether the game ball introduced to the sorting device is sorted to the first passage or the second passage. You can check without having to. As a result, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launching timing of the game ball by the player and the sorting result of the launching of the game ball at that timing.

[Appendix D7]
A prize winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the detection that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922) by the passage detection means (319'), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) ) is restricted from entering the winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation a movable accessory member (93) that operates to a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D6, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D7, when the passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path, the game ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the game ball can be entered. It is determined whether or not to shift to the special game state. In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the second path, the player ignores the timing when the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which is the trigger for the determination of the transition to the special game state, and the game ball is launched. be possible. As a result, the player can advance the game in such a way that his/her skill is advantageous to him/herself. In other words, it is possible for the player to obtain an opportunity to receive a large number of transition determinations to a special game with a small number of game balls.

[Appendix E1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
A launch instruction section (923) that indicates the launch timing of game balls that are likely to be distributed to the second passage (922);
Controls the firing instruction unit (923) to control switching between an instruction state indicating a shooting timing at which game balls are likely to be distributed to the second path (922) and a non-instruction state different from the instruction state. a firing instruction section control means (51) for
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the launch instruction unit is controlled by the launch instruction unit control means, so that the player is informed that the game ball launch timing is such that the distribution unit can distribute the game balls to the second path. be notified. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the launch instruction section as a guideline. As a result, the player can easily find the shooting timing of the game ball, which makes it easier for the game ball to be guided to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually confirming the rotation direction and posture of the distribution part. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix E2]
The shooting instruction part (923) has a light-emitting part (923) that is brought into the instruction state by being lit when it is the shooting timing of the game balls that are likely to be distributed to the second path (922). The gaming machine according to appendix E1, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the firing instruction unit is set in the instruction state and the non-instruction state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, so the firing instruction unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix E3]
The game according to appendix E2, wherein the sorting device (92) further has a visual assistance part (925) for facilitating visual recognition between the light emitting part (923) and the light emitting part (923). machine.

In the game machine according to appendix E3, if the firing instruction unit has a light-emitting unit, there is a concern that it may be difficult to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the light-emitting unit due to the lighting of lamps other than the firing instruction unit. By providing the portion, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting portion, so the above concerns are resolved.

[Appendix E4]
The sorting device (92) further comprises position detection means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94),
The firing instruction section control means (51) controls switching of the position instruction section (923) between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the detection result of the position detection means (95). A gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3 characterized.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the firing instruction unit are switched based on the detection result of the position detection means. States and non-indicating states can be implemented. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that it is time to shoot a game ball that can be distributed to the second path by the distribution unit.

[Appendix E5]
driving means (973X) for applying a driving force for rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) for controlling the driving means (973X) and rotating the allocating part (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the allocating part (94) )When,
further comprising
The firing instruction section control means (51) changes the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the firing instruction section (923) based on the control state of the driving means (973X) by the drive control means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, characterized in that switching is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, the pointing state and the non-indicating state of the position indicator are switched based on the control state of the driving means by the drive control means, so the rotation direction (attitude) of the distribution part is appropriately reflected. A pointing state and a non-pointing state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that it is time to shoot a game ball that can be distributed to the second path by the distribution unit.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E5, wherein the launch instruction unit (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6, since the launch instruction unit is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the launch timing at which the game balls are easily sorted to the second path without looking away from the sorting device. . Therefore, the player checks the sorting device and measures the shooting timing of the game balls, and moves the line of sight greatly to see whether the game balls introduced to the sorting device are sorted to the first passage or the second passage. You can check without having to. As a result, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launching timing of the game ball by the player and the sorting result of the launching of the game ball at that timing.

[Appendix E7]
A prize winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the detection that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922) by the passage detection means (319'), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) ) is restricted from entering the winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation a movable accessory member (93) that operates to a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, when the passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path, the game ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the game ball can be entered. It is determined whether or not to shift to the special game state. In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the second path, the player ignores the timing when the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which is the trigger for the determination of the transition to the special game state, and the game ball is launched. be possible. As a result, the player can advance the game in such a way that his/her skill is advantageous to him/herself. In other words, it is possible for the player to obtain an opportunity to receive a large number of transition determinations to a special game with a small number of game balls.

[Appendix F1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
Direction indicator parts (923, 923L, 923R) that indicate the direction of rotation of the distribution part (94);
an instruction state for controlling the direction instruction units (923, 923L, 923R) to indicate that the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction; A direction indicator control means (51) for controlling switching to a non-instruction state different from the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, the rotation direction of the distribution section is notified to the player by controlling the direction instruction section by the direction instruction section control means. Therefore, it is possible to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path by using the indication state of the direction indicator as a guide. As a result, the player can easily find the launching timing of the game ball that easily guides the game ball to the second path, compared to the case where the player launches the game ball while visually confirming the rotation direction and posture of the distribution unit. Therefore, even a player with low skill can easily launch a game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second path.

[Appendix F2]
The direction indicating portions (923, 923L, 923R) are brought into the indicating state by being lit when the distributing portion (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction. The game machine according to appendix F1, characterized in that it has light emitting units (923, 923L, 923R) that

In the game machine according to appendix F2, the direction indicating unit is set in the indicating state and the non-indicating state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, so the direction indicating unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix F3]
The game according to appendix F2, wherein the sorting device (92) further has a visual assistance part (925) for facilitating visual recognition between the lighting state and the light-out state of the light emitting part (923). machine.

In the game machine according to appendix F3, if the direction indicator has a light-emitting part, there is a concern that the lighting and extinguishing of the light-emitting part will be difficult to see due to the lighting of lamps other than the direction indicator. By providing the portion, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting portion, so the above concerns are resolved.

[Appendix F4]
The direction indicator (923L, 923R)
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means (51) is set to the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means. a first direction indicator (923L) brought into the non-instruction state by (51);
When the distribution section (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction section control means (51) is set to the instruction state, and when the distribution section (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction section control means a second direction indicator (923R) brought into the non-indicating state by (51);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, since the direction indicating section includes two of the first direction indicating section and the second direction indicating section, the direction of rotation of the sorting section is determined by the indicated state and the non-indicated state of one direction indicating section. It becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution unit compared to the case of grasping. In addition, it is not necessary to pay attention to the directions of the pointing and non-pointing states of the direction pointing portion. Since the direction of rotation of the distribution unit can be grasped only by paying attention to the indication state of the two-direction indicator, it becomes easier to accurately grasp the direction of rotation of the distribution unit. As a result, it becomes easy to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, so even a player with low skill can easily hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the second passage. It is possible to improve the probability that can be launched.

[Appendix F5]
The sorting device (92) further comprises detection means for detecting the direction of rotation of the sorting unit (94),
The direction instruction unit control means (51) controls switching of the direction instruction unit (923) between the instruction state and the non-instruction state based on the detection result of the detection means. to F4.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, since the pointing state and the non-instructing state of the direction indicator are switched based on the detection result of the detection means, the direction indicator appropriately reflects the rotation direction (orientation) of the sorting unit. and non-indicating states can be realized. Therefore, based on the pointing state and the non-pointing state of the direction indicator, it is possible to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path, so that the skill of the player is appropriately reflected. It is possible to provide a game machine with a game that can be played.

[Appendix F6]
driving means (973X) for applying a driving force for rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) for controlling the driving means (973X) and rotating the allocating part (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the allocating part (94) )When,
further comprising
The direction indicator control means (51) controls the direction indicator state and the non-instruction state of the (923, 923L, 923R) based on the control state of the drive means (973X) by the drive control means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F5, characterized in that the switching of is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, the direction indicating unit is switched between the indicating state and the non-indicating state based on the control state of the drive unit by the drive control unit, so the rotation direction (attitude) of the distribution unit is appropriately reflected. A pointing state and a non-pointing state of the direction pointing portion which is moved can be realized. Therefore, based on the pointing state and the non-pointing state of the direction indicator, it is possible to hit the game ball at the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the second path, so that the skill of the player is appropriately reflected. It is possible to provide a game machine with a game that can be played.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F6, wherein the direction indicator (923, 923L, 923R) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7, since the direction indicating unit is provided in the sorting device, the player can grasp the rotation direction of the sorting unit without looking away from the sorting device. Therefore, the player checks the direction of rotation of the sorting section in the sorting device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and the game ball introduced into the sorting device goes to either the first passage or the second passage. You can check whether it has been sorted without moving your line of sight. As a result, while minimizing the movement of the line of sight, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the sorting result of the launch of the game ball at that timing.

[Appendix F8]
A prize winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the detection that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922) by the passage detection means (319'), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) ) is restricted from entering the winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation a movable accessory member (93) that operates to a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F7, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8, when the passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path, the game ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the game ball can be entered. It is determined whether or not to shift to the special game state. In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the second path, the player ignores the timing when the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which is the trigger for the determination of the transition to the special game state, and the game ball is launched. be possible. As a result, the player can advance the game in such a way that his/her skill is advantageous to him/herself. In other words, it is possible for the player to obtain an opportunity to receive a large number of transition determinations to a special game with a small number of game balls.

[Appendix G1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
driving means (973X) for applying a driving force for rotating the distribution part (94) in the first direction or the second direction;
Drive control means (41) for controlling the driving means (973X) and rotating the allocating part (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the allocating part (94) )When,
with
The drive control means (41) controls the rotation pattern of the distribution section (94) in accordance with the state of distribution of game balls to the second passage (922) in the distribution device (92). A game machine characterized by

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, the rotation pattern of the distribution section is controlled by the drive control means in accordance with the state of distribution of the game balls to the second path. That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the distribution unit is not rotated at a constant cycle, but the degree of expectation for distributing game balls to the second path is increased according to the state of distributing game balls to the second path. adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of adjusting the difficulty of shooting game balls at the timing when the game balls are distributed to the second path according to the skill of the player. As a result, while the unfairness to players with low skill can be reduced, the degree of difficulty of the shooting timing of the game balls for distributing the game balls to the second path is increased for players with high skill. It is possible to provide the playability.

[Appendix G2]
The rotation pattern is
A first expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage (921) in a continuous shooting game in which game balls are continuously shot at a minimum shooting interval, and the second passage (922) in the continuous shooting game ) with a first rotation pattern that is equal or substantially equal to the second expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to
a second rotation pattern in which the second expected value is larger than the first expected value by a predetermined value or more;
including
The drive control means (41)
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference between the game ball distribution ratio for the first path and the game ball distribution ratio for the second path is less than a specific value (for example, 0.4: 0.6 to 0.6: 0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the first rotation pattern,
When the distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value (for example, when it exceeds 0.6:0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled in the second rotation pattern. The game machine described.

[Appendix G3]
The second rotation pattern is a rotation direction of the distribution section from the second direction to the first direction from a first switching point for switching the rotation direction of the distribution section from the first direction to the second direction. The time required for the distributing unit to rotate in the second direction to the second switching point for switching between the The gaming machine according to appendix G2, wherein the time is longer than the time required for

[Appendix G4]
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference is equal to or less than a specific value, the total number of game balls introduced to the distribution device in a predetermined time (eg, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Among them, the distribution ratio of game balls to the first path is 0.4 to 0.6, and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second path is 0.6 to 0.4,
The distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value when the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage exceeds 0.6 and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage is less than 0.4. The gaming machine according to appendix G2 or appendix G3, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendices G2 to G4, when the distribution of game balls to the first path is excessive with respect to the distribution of game balls to the second path, the game balls are likely to be distributed to the second path. The distribution part is rotated in a two-rotation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the unfairness to a player with low skill by rotating the distribution part in the second rotation pattern.

[Appendix G5]
The rotation pattern is
A first expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage (921) in a continuous shooting game in which game balls are continuously shot at a minimum shooting interval, and the second passage (922) in the continuous shooting game ) with a first rotation pattern that is equal or substantially equal to the second expected value for the distribution ratio of game balls to
a third rotation pattern in which the second expected value is smaller than the first expected value by a predetermined value or more;
including
The drive control means (41)
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference between the game ball distribution ratio for the second path and the game ball distribution ratio for the first path is less than a specific value (for example, 0.4: 0.6 to 0.6: 0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the first rotation pattern,
From appendix G1 characterized in that when the distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value (for example, when it exceeds 0.6:0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled in the third rotation pattern The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix G4.

[Appendix G6]
The third rotation pattern is a rotation direction of the distribution section from the second direction to the first direction from a first switching point for switching the rotation direction of the distribution section from the first direction to the second direction. The time required to rotate the distributing unit in the second direction to the second switching point for switching between is the time required to rotate the distributing unit in the first direction from the second switching point to the first switching point The gaming machine according to appendix G5, wherein the time required for the game is shorter than the time required for the game.

[Appendix G7]
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference is equal to or less than a specific value, the total number of game balls introduced to the distribution device in a predetermined time (eg, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Among them, the distribution ratio of game balls to the first path is 0.4 to 0.6, and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second path is 0.6 to 0.4,
When the distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value, the distribution ratio of game balls to the first passage is less than 0.4, and the distribution ratio of game balls to the second passage exceeds 0.6. The gaming machine according to appendix G5 or appendix G6, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendices G5 to G7, when the distribution of game balls to the second path is excessive with respect to the distribution of game balls to the first path, the game balls are likely to be distributed to the first path. The distribution part is rotated in a three-rotation pattern. Therefore, by rotating the distribution part in the third rotation pattern, the difficulty level of the game ball shooting timing for distributing the game balls to the second path is increased for a highly skilled player. It is possible to provide the playability.

[Appendix G8]
A prize winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player due to the entry of a game ball;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the detection that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922) by the passage detection means (319'), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) ) is restricted from entering the winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation a movable accessory member (93) that operates to a position);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G7, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G8, when the passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second path, the game ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the game ball can be entered. It is determined whether or not to shift to the special game state. In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the second path, the player ignores the timing when the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which is the trigger for the determination of the transition to the special game state, and the game ball is launched. be possible. As a result, the player can advance the game in such a way that his/her skill is advantageous to him/herself. In other words, it is possible for the player to obtain an opportunity to receive a large number of transition determinations to a special game with a small number of game balls.

[Appendix H1]
An inlet (920), a first passage (921), a second passage (922), a first direction (counterclockwise direction) about a rotating shaft (941), and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution part (94 etc.) rotatable in two directions (clockwise direction), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is moved in the first direction of the distribution part (94 etc.) or a sorting device (92) that sorts to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotating in the second direction;
a winning opening (314L) into which game balls can enter;
Passage detection means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922);
Triggered by the passage detection means (319') detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the game ball passes through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922). From the first position (standby position) where entry of the game ball into the winning hole (315) is restricted, the winning hole of the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) A movable accessory member (93) that operates to a second position (operating position) that allows entry into (315);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, both the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage are moved by the movable accessory member. A ball can be entered into the prize winning opening by the member. That is, the movable accessory member simultaneously restricts and permits entry of game balls into the winning opening for game balls passing through the first passage and game balls passing through the second passage. Therefore, a movable accessory member that restricts and permits entry of game balls passing through the first path into the winning opening and restricts and permits entry of game balls that pass through the second path into the winning opening. Compared to the case where the movable accessory member is separately provided, not only is it possible to restrict and allow the entry of game balls in the first path and the second path to the winning opening with a simpler configuration, but also the movable Control of accessory members is also simplified.

[Appendix H2]
The movable accessory member (93) triggered by the first game state (mode B) and the passage detection means (319') detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922). and a second game state (mode B) whose operation time is longer than that of the first game state. The game machine according to appendix H1.

[Appendix H3]
In the second game state, compared to the first game state, when the movable accessory member (93) is operated, the game ball passing through the first passage (921) 93) The gaming machine according to appendix H2, characterized in that it is easy for a ball to enter the game machine.

[Appendix H4]
The plurality of game states further include a special game state (jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (mode B) and the second game state (mode E),
In the first game state (mode B) and the second game state (mode E), whether to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the winning opening (315) Further comprising determination means (41) for determining whether or not
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the special game state (jackpot game state) when the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state). ,
The second game state (mode E) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) by the determination means (41) as compared with the first game state (mode B). The gaming machine according to appendix H2 or appendix H3, characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to notes H2 to H4, the operation time of the movable accessory member differs between the first game state and the second game state, and the number of game balls entering the winning opening when the movable accessory member is activated. The easiness of entry of a game ball, especially the easiness of entry of a game ball into a winning opening for a game ball passing through the first passage, differs. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the winning opening depends on whether it is in the first game state or the second game state and whether it passes through the first passage or the second passage of the sorting device. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with different playability.

[Appendix H5]
The game machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H4, characterized in that the sorting device (92) is provided at a position where a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board (31) is introduced. .

[Appendix H6]
Supplementary note H5 further comprising a guide portion (31Y) that guides all game balls launched to the right side area of the game board (31) to the introduction port (920) of the distribution device (92) The game machine described.

In the gaming machines according to appendices H5 and H6, the game ball is introduced into the sorting device by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game board, that is, hitting the right side. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a playability in which a game ball is entered into a prize winning opening using a sorting device in a specific game state among a plurality of game states.

[Appendix H7]
The movable accessory member (93) is
A first guiding portion (931A, 932G) that guides a game ball passing through the first passage (921) at the second position toward the winning opening (315);
A second guiding portion (932A, 933G) that guides the game ball passing through the second passage (922) at the second position toward the winning opening (315);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H6, characterized by having

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7, the movable role member having a simple configuration having the first guide portion and the second guide portion allows the game balls in the first path and the second path to move when the movable role member is at the second position. It is possible to guide both the game balls in the path to the winning opening.

[Appendix H8]
The movable accessory member (93) is provided between the first guide (931A) and the second guide (932A), and at the second position, the game ball enters the winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix H7, further comprising a through-hole (933A) for allowing a ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8, in addition to the first guide portion and the second guide portion, the game balls in the first passage and the game balls in the second passage are moved by the movable accessory member having a simple structure having a through hole. It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole.

[Appendix H9]
The first guide portion (932G) and the second guide portion (933G) are
At the first position, they are close to each other and close the winning opening (315) to the winning opening (315) of the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922). Restricting the entry of game balls of
In the second position, they are separated from each other, and the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) enters the winning opening (315) with the winning opening (315) opened. The game machine according to appendix H8, characterized in that it allows entry of a game ball of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9, the movable role member having a simple configuration having the first guide portion and the second guide portion that can be moved closer together and separated from each other makes it possible to play the game in the first path when the movable role member is at the second position. It is possible to guide the ball and the game ball in the second path to the winning opening.

[Appendix H10]
The game machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H9, characterized in that the distribution units (94D to 94G) are fixed at positions where game balls introduced from the introduction port (920) interfere. .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the inlet interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can read the tendency (individual difference between game machines) of sorting between the first passage and the second passage by the sorting section. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball through trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball that allows the game ball to be easily distributed to the second passage. The enjoyment of searching for the launching position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when a plurality of game machines of the same type are installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game ball is thrown from those game machines to the second passage. It is possible to obtain the enjoyment of searching for an easy-to-understand game machine.

[Appendix H11]
The game machine according to Appendix H10, wherein the allocating portion (94F, 94G) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed portion.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11, it is determined by accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the fixed portion. Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H12]
The gaming machine according to appendix H11, wherein one end of the fixed part (942E, 941G) is fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix H13]
The game machine according to appendix H12, wherein the fixed portion (942E, 941G) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments H11 to H13, wherein the fixing parts (942E, 941G) are nails.

In the game machine according to notes H12 to H14, at least a part of the fixed part of the distribution part is plastically changeable, so that when the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial set value, the fixed part is returned to the initial position. it is possible to return. As a result, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix H15]
The distribution part (94G) has a plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged bilaterally symmetrically with one nail (941G) as the top and a vertical line passing through the one nail (941G) as the axis of symmetry in a front view. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H14.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15, by adjusting the peg on the top, it is possible to improve the deviation of the allocation ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix H16]
The distribution section (94E) has a rotating body (941E) rotatably fixed by the fixing section (942E),
The rotating body (941E) is a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (921), and a direction opposite to the first direction, and is directed toward the second passage (922). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H14, wherein the game machine is rotatable in the second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H16, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it is possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first path and the second path from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix H17]
The gaming machine according to appendix H16, wherein the rotating body (941E) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix H18]
Said distribution part (94D) is a first direction to move the game ball toward said first passage (921), and a direction opposite to said first direction, toward said second passage (922) A gaming machine according to Appendix H10, comprising a roller fixed for free rotation in a second direction for moving a game ball.

In the game machines according to appendices H17 and H18, rotating bodies such as freely rotatable rollers are employed as the distribution part, and even with these rotating bodies, accidental factors such as the collision position of the game ball against the rotating bodies determined by Therefore, the game balls are randomly distributed to the first path and the second path by an accidental factor, thereby reducing the monotony of the game and improving the interest of the game.

10: Gaming machine 31: Game board 314: First starting port 315: Second starting port 316b: Variable winning port 319': Through gate 41: MPU
92: Sorting device 920: Inlet 921: First passage 922: Second passage 923: Synchronization lamp 924: Housing 925: Lighting mark 9251: Translucent area 9252: Mask area 93, 93A-93F: Electric support member 93G : Electric tulip accessory device 931E: Through hole 931F: Through part 932S: Left wing member 933S: Right wing member 94, 94A, 94B, 94E, 94F, 94H~94J, 94P1, 94P2, 94Q1, 94Q2, 94R1~94R3, 94S1, 94S2, 94T, 94V to 94Y: Distribution members 940, 940J, 944R1, 944R2, 944S1, 944S2, 944T, 944Y: Load input part 941: Rotating shaft 942: Ball receiving guide piece 942L: Left ball receiving guide piece 942R : Right ball receiving piece 943: Eccentric parts 944, 944A, 944E, 944F, 944I, 944P1, 944P2, 944Q1, 944Q2, 944V, 961O: Load generating part 945W, 961J to 961O, 961P1, 961Q1, 961U: Load acting part 9452V, 9462V, 9462W, 9472W: input piece 946: support portion 947: base portion 948, 949: regulation piece 94D: roller 94E: windmill 941E: rotating body 941F: top portion 942E: nail 94F: mountain-shaped fixing portion 94G: triangular nail 941G : Vertex nail 95: Detection part 9611O, 9611P1, 9611P3, 9611Q1, 9611Q3: Leaf spring 99: Game ball

Claims (1)

The game board has an introduction part, a first flow path part, a second flow path part, and a distribution part, and the game balls introduced from the introduction part from a predetermined area on the left side of the game board are distributed by the distribution part. A gaming machine comprising flow path forming means capable of distributing and flowing down either the first flow path portion or the second flow path portion,
a first ball-entering means capable of entering the game balls distributed to the first flow path;
a second ball-entering means capable of entering the game balls distributed to the second flow path portion and having a function different from that of the first ball-entering means;
a third ball-entering means capable of entering the game balls distributed to the second flow path portion and having a function different from that of the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means;
a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the second flow path;
a second detection means provided in the right area of the game board for detecting that a game ball has flowed down a specific area;
Triggered by the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, the predetermined game ball flowing down the second flow path portion is restricted from entering the second ball entry means, From the first state in which the ball is allowed to enter the third ball entering means, the predetermined game ball flowing down the second flow path portion is allowed to enter the second ball entering means. state switching means for switching the state of the movable means to a second state in which the ball entering the third ball entering means is restricted;
A first game state in which detection of the falling game ball by the first detecting means is advantageous to the player, and detection of the falling game ball by the second detecting means is advantageous to the player. a game state transition means for transitioning the game state between a plurality of game states including a second game state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images